Accu Rus

Return to the Browser Screen
OPHTHALMIC SURGICAL SYSTEM
SERVICE MANUAL
ALCON SURGICAL
15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, California 92618-3818 U.S.A.
Telephone: 949/753-1393
800/832-7827
FAX: 949/753-6614
906-2020-501 B, ASSEMBLY ©1998, Alcon Laboratories, Inc.

906-2020-001 B, TEXT ONLY
®
ACCURUS® SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL REVISION RECORD
DATE REVISION ECN NUMBER & REVISED PAGE NUMBERS
04/98 A ECN 33803 - Initial release for -501 console with

software release V1.11 or below.
07/98 B ECN 34169 - Title thru viii, 1-1 thru 1-42, 2-1 thru
2-40, 3-2 thru 3-14, 5-1, 5-3, 5-6 thru 5-9, 5-11 thru
5-46, 6-1 thru 6-70, 7-1 thru 7-68. This ECN
incorportated information for 400 VSE and 600 DS
systems.
CAUTION: Federal (U.S.A.) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
Intel® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
ii 906-2020-501
®
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Manual Revision Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Section One - General Information

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Description of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking and Setting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Glossary of Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Front Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Rear Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Front Panel Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Posterior Setup and Surgery Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Anterior Setup and Surgery Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Options Screens and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
System Status Screens and Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Handpieces and Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Paks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Section Two - Theory of Operation

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Special I/O PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sound PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Controller PCB Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Air/Fluid Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Air/Fluid Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Receiver Mechanism PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Transducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
LPA/Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Illuminator Subframe/Universal Optic Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
LPA/Illuminator Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
U/S-Diathermy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
U/S-Driver PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Coagulation PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Front Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Front Panel Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Seven Segment Display PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Handpiece LED PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Switch Layer Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
906-2020-501 iii
®
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Section Three - Parts Location and Disassembly
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Tools, Spares, Test Supplies, and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Disassembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1 Removal of Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2 Removal of Illuminator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3 Removal of Lower Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4 Removal of Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
5 Removal of Handpiece LED PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
6 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1329-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
7 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
8 Removal of LCD Backlight (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
9 Removal of LCD (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
10 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
11 Removal of Touch Screen (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
12 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1511-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
13 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
14 Removal of LCD, Touch Screen, and Keypad (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . 3-9
15 Removal of LCD Backlight (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
16 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
17 Removal of Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
18 Removal of Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
19 Removal of Cassette Release Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
20 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly (see step 21 for alternate method) . . . . . . 3-11
21 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly Without Removing Receiver Mechanism 3-12
22 Removal of Transducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
23 Removal of Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
24 Removal of Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
25 General Procedure for Removal of Regulators RG2 and RG3 (on Press/Vac Manifold),
R1 and RV1 (on LPAS Manifold), and RV1 (on Main Air Source).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
26 General Procedure for Replacement of EPROMs on Controller PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
27 Removal of System (Host) Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Section Four - Service Test Procedure

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Section Five - Maintenance and Troubleshooting

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Fuse and Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Backup Low Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Replacement of Filter and O-Ring on Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminator Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Illuminator Optics Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
CPC Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Receiver Latch Vacuum Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Diathermy Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Adjustment of Regulators RG2 and RG3 on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
iv 906-2020-501
®
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Section Six - Schematics
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Section Seven - Parts Lists and Drawings

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Section Eight - Additional information

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
906-2020-501 v
®
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 1-1. The Accurus® Ophthalmic Surgical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2. Removal of Accessory Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Figure 1-3. Accurus® Shipping Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-4. Symbols and Icons Used on the Accurus® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-5. Labeling Used on the Accurus® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-6. Diathermy Power Through 75 Ohm Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-7. Diathermy Power vs. Load Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-8. Safe Operating Area for Irrigation/Aspiration When Using Phaco Handpiece . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-9. Footpedal Operation in Proportional Ultrasonic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-10. The Accurus® Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Figure 1-11. Front Panel Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors, with Connector LED’s . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-12. The Accurus® Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-13. Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Figure 1-14. Wireless Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-15. Power Up Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-16. Procedure Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-17. LCD Display and Touch Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-18. Accessory Selections in Modes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-19. Surgical Mode Selections in Modes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-20. Global Functions Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-21. Title Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-22. Doctor Memories Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-23. Miscellaneous Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-24. Primary Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-25. Popup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-26. Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Figure 1-27. Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Figure 1-28. Vit Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-29. Fixed Fragmentation Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-30. Proportional Scissors Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-31. Multiple Cut Scissors Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-32. Scissors Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-33. Extrusion Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 1-34. VFC Injection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 1-35. Cataract Surgery Setup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Figure 1-36. Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Figure 1-37. U/S Linear Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Figure 1-38. I/A Max Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Figure 1-39. Vit Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-40. Options Drop Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-41. Quick Save Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-42. PIN Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Figure 1-43. Common Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Figure 1-44. Posterior Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Figure 1-45. Anterior Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Figure 1-46. PIN Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-47. Sound Volumes Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-48. Timer Keypad Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-49. Posterior Metrics Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Figure 1-50. Anterior Metrics Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
vi 906-2020-501
®
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 1-51. System Fault Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Figure 1-52. System Error Popup Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-53. System Advisory Popup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-54. System information Popup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-55. InnoVit® Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-56. Accurus® Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-57. Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-58. Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-59. Single Use Bipolar Coagulation Brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-60. 4 Inch Nadler Coadaptation Forceps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-61. Accurus® Phaco Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 1-62. Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 1-63. Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Figure 2-1. System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 2-2. Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-3. Host System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-4. Special I/O PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-5. System Power Control on Special I/O PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-6. Sound PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-7. Controller Kernel Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-8. Air/Fluid Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-9. Vacuum vs. Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-10. Air/Fluid Controller PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-11. Receiver Mechanism PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Figure 2-12. Transducer PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-13. LPA/Illuminator Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Figure 2-14. U/S-Diathermy Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Figure 2-15. Front Panel Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 3-1. Accurus® Parts Location Diagram of Front Panel and Upper Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2. Upper Level Layout of Accurus® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3. Lower Level Layout of Accurus® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-4. Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly with Tranducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-5. Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-6. Captive Screws Securing Front of Upper Level to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-7. Screws Securing Illuminator Cover to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-8. Nylon Screw Restraining Illuminator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-9. Fifth Captive Screw Securing Lower Front Panel to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-10. Exploded View of 202-1329-501 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-11. View of Front Panel Assembly with Controller PCB Removed
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-12. Removing the 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-13. Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-14. Exploded View of 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-15. Location of LCD Backlights (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-16. Removing 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-17. Captive Screws Securing End Header to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-18. Screws Securing Receiver Mechanism Assembly to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-19. Screws Securing Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
906-2020-501 vii
®
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 3-20. Interference Points Encountered When Removing Pressure/Vacuum
Manifold Assembly from Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-21. Grasp Proportional Valve and Lift Rear Manifold Up While Pushing
Low Pressure Pump Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-22. Remove Manifold from System as Shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-23. Bottom of Transducer PCB Showing Installation of Spacers and O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 5-1. Fuse Module Location and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-2. Removal of the Fuse Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-3. Water Filter on Main Air Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-4. Bulb Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-5. CPC Connector Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-6. Removal of Latch Seal from Receiver Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-7. Erbe Coag PCB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
LIST OF TABLES
TITLE PAGE #
Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Table 1-2. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table 1-3. Tones and Their Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Table 1-4. Footswitch Functions in Posterior Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Table 1-5. Footswitch Functions in Anterior Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1-6. Posterior Domain Surgery Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Table 1-7. Anterior Domain Surgery Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Table 5-1. Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Table 5-2. Recommended Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-5. Fuse and Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-6. General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-7. System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-8. System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Table 5-9. Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Table 5-10. Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Table 5-11. Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Table 5-12. Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Table 5-13. Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Table 5-14. POST Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2. Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
viii 906-2020-501
®
SECTION ONE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION • Graphic user interface (GUI) for ease of operation
• Dual aspiration fluid cassette with sealed, detachable
The Alcon Accurus® ophthalmic surgical system is a drain bag (posterior only)
sophisticated instrument designed to be durable, reliable, • Pulsed air pressure to drive vitreous cutter probes
safe, and easy to operate. This state-of-the-art instrument and scissors
has been developed to be user friendly, combining • Proportional air pressure to drive scissors and
hardware that is easy to install and maintain along with Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) syringe
computer software that increases the effectivity of the • Infusion/Irrigation pressure to maintain intraocular
user. eye pressure
• Low pressure air for Fluid/Air Exchange (F/AX),
Interaction is through the console's hard keys, touch Vented Gas Forced Infusion "VGFI®", and optional
screen, remote control, and footswitch. Information is Anterior Vented Gas Forced Irrigation "Anterior
provided via digital Light Emitting Diode (LED) VGFI®"
displays, a color Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), lighted • Venturi vacuum to aspirate ocular matter from the eye
indicators, sound, and tactile feel. All of this, in • Halogen illuminators for fiber optic illumination
combination with a variety of probes and handpieces, • Posterior Vitrectomy
provides the ophthalmic surgeon with the following: • Fragmentation
• Diathermy
• Phacoemulsification (optional upgrade)
• Irrigation/Aspiration (optional upgrade)
• Anterior Vitrectomy (optional upgrade)
SURGICAL
Figure 1-1. The Accurus® Ophthalmic Surgical System
906-2020-501 1-1
®
DESCRIPTION OF THIS MANUAL REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
The purpose of this manual is to provide the field Although this manual provides the necessary information
engineer with the necessary information to maintain and for maintaining optimum performance of the Accurus®, it
repair the Accurus® system. This manual covers all does not contain all of the operating procedures or
configurations of the Accurus®, and is divided into eight functional descriptions contained in the Operator's
sections as follows: Manual (PN 905-2020-50X). In addition, the Warnings
and Cautions in the Operator's Manual also apply for this
Section One-General Information Service Manual. The Operator's Manual supplements
This section gives a general description of the Accurus® information provided in this manual and should be
features and components. Unpacking and installation available on-site with the system.
procedures are provided for all configurations of the
system. If you have any questions or require additional
information, please contact your local Service
Section Two-Theory of Operation Representative or the Technical Services Department at:
This section gives a detailed description of how the
Accurus® operates starting at the system level and ALCON SURGICAL
working down to the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) level. 15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618-3818
Section Three-Parts Location and Disassembly (949) 753-1393
This section contains parts location diagrams along with (800) 832-7827
field level disassembly procedures for the Accurus®
console. Disassembly procedures for OEM components If you are located outside the United States, please
are not provided. contact your local authorized Alcon Surgical
representative.
Section Four-Service Test Procedure
This section of the service manual is reserved for storage
of the Accurus® Service Test Procedure and checklist. EMC Statement
The Service Test Procedure is used to test the Accurus® This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
after repair or preventive maintenance to ensure the the limits for medical devices to the IEC 601-1-2:1993,
system performs within specifications. This procedure is EN60601-1-2:1994 and Medical Device Directive 93/42/
not included with the manual and is available to trained EEC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
personnel only. protection against harmful interference in a typical
medical installation.
Section Five-Maintenance & Troubleshooting
System maintenance procedures and troubleshooting
information are included here. Listings of spares, tools, Underwriter's Laboratories
and supplies required to repair the system are also The Accurus® ophthalmic surgical system is classified by
included. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., with respect to Electric
Shock, Fire, Mechanical and other specified hazards only
Section Six-Schematics in accordance with UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA 601.1, IEC
System interconnect diagrams, pneumatics diagrams, and 601-2-2, and IEC 601-2-18.
PCB and cable schematics are provided in this section.
LED Statement
Section Seven-Parts Lists and Drawings LED's used in this equipment are Class 1 LED products
This section contains parts lists and engineering according to EN60825-1 amendment 11. Oct. 1996.
documentation for each major assembly.
Section Eight-Additional Information

This section is used to store any additional information
pertaining to this system.
1-2 906-2020-501
®
RECEIVING
INSPECTION
The system was inspected mechanically and electrically

prior to shipment. If the shipping container appears
damaged, ask that the carrier’s agent be present when the
system is unpacked. The system should be inspected for
external damage (i.e., scratches, dents, or broken parts).
If damage is discovered or if the system fails any of the
functional tests notify the carrier and an Alcon Surgical
representative. Retain the shipping container and
packing material for the carrier’s inspection. As
necessary, file a claim with the carrier or, if insured
separately, with the insurance company.
UNPACKING AND SETTING UP

THE SYSTEM
1 Cut and remove the binding straps.
2 Open top of outer carton and remove accessory tray

(see Figure 1-2).
3 Remove outer carton. Refer to Figure 1-3 for an

exploded view of the shipping arrangement.
4 Remove front and top foam inserts.
CAUTION
The console weighs approximately 90 pounds when
unpacked. Two people are required to lift the console.
5 Remove console and place on an appropriate table or Figure 1-2. Removal of Accessory Tray
cart.
9 Perform the Accurus® Service Test Procedure as
6 Unwrap the footswitch and plug it into the specified in Section Four of this manual.
appropriate connector on the rear panel.
7 Remove air hose from bottom of carton and connect

to system and air source as necessary.
8 Release the 115 VAC power cord from the Rear

Panel and plug into a functioning 115 VAC
receptacle but do not turn on the AC Power Switch or
the Stand-by Switch until instructed to do so.
NOTE: If system is to be plugged into a voltage

source other than 115 VAC, fuses and voltage
selection changes must be made according to the
procedure in Section Five.
906-2020-501 1-3
®
Figure 1-3. Accurus® Shipping Arrangement
1-4 906-2020-501
®
GLOSSARY OF TERMS/ABBREVIATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

Many of the terms/abbreviations used in this manual, and on the Accurus®, are described in Table 1-1 below.
Symbols and icons are identified in Figure 1-4, and system labeling in Figure 1-5.
Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions
TERM OR ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
Anterior VGFI® Anterior Vented Gas Forced Infusion.
BSS® Plus Balanced Salt Solution enriched with bicarbonate, dextrose, and glutathione.
cmH2O Centimeters of water.
cpm Cuts Per Minute.
Detent A discrete footpedal position at which more force is required to depress the
footpedal to the next position.
Diathermy The production of heat in body tissues by electric current for therapeutic
purposes.
Extrusion A mode where vacuum is available to remove fluid/matter.
F/AX Fluid Air Exchange.
Frag Fragmentation.
Global Function A function whose status and controls are independent of the current footpedal
position and surgery mode.
Highlighted To center attention by video reversing the function key and changing the key
color from gray to blue.
I/A Irrigation/Aspiration.
IEC International Electromechanical Commission.
ISO International Standards Organization.
IV Intravenous.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
mmHg Millimeter of Mercury. A unit of vacuum.
N/A Not Applicable.
PEL Patient Eye Level. A difference in height between the cassette and the patient
eye level.
PIN Personal Identification Number.
psi Pressure per Square Inch. A unit of pressure.
pps Pulses Per Second.
U/S Ultrasound.
VFC Viscous Fluid Control.
VGFI® Vented Gas Forced Infusion.
Vit Vitrectomy. Extraction of the vitreous from the vitreous cavity.
906-2020-501 1-5
®
Posterior Surgery Infusion / Irrigation Eject
Fragmentation Fluid Air Exhange Up/Down Adjustments
Vitrectomy Diathermy Standby State
VFC 1 Illuminator 1 or 2 Air Pressure Input
Extrusion Bulb Burned Out Alternating Current
Scissors 0 Footswitch Positions Footswitch
Anterior Surgery System Information I/V Pole
Phacoemulsification SYSTEM System Fault OFF (power)

FAULT
Consult Operator's Manual, or

Caution, or
Anterior Vitrectomy
! System Error (yellow), or
System Advisory (green)
ON (power)
Irrigation/Aspiration Dangerous Voltage Equipotentiality
Test Type BF Equipment Fuse
Clean Type B Equipment Cassette Eject
Infusion / Irrigation Setup PC CARD Flash Card Slot Illuminator Eject
Exit Serial In/Out Hot
Figure 1-4. Symbols and Icons Used on the Accurus®
1-6 906-2020-501
®
®
®
SERIAL IN/OUT SURGICAL

ALCON LABORATORIES, INC. MODEL SERIAL NO. PART NO. REV MFR. DATE
FORT WORTH, TX 78134-2099, USA
UPGRADE CONNECTORS LABEL

! LA
100-120V 50/60 Hz 10A
SSIFIE MEDICAL/ELECTRICAL LA
SSIFIE
220V 50/60 Hz 6A
230V-240V 50 Hz 6A
C
D
D
EQUIPMENT
UL UL
202-1465-001 REV. __
CLASSIFIED
© ©
95KJ C 0123
UL2601-1/CAN CSA C22.2 NO. 601.1 !
OUTPUT DIATHERMY
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS.
TYPE BF CAUTION: GROUNDING RELIABILITY CAN ONLY BE ACHIEVED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS
CONNECTED TO AN EQUIVALENT RECEPTACLE MARKED HOSPITAL GRADE.
POWER
(W) 25
CAUTION: RISK OF BURNS AND FIRE - DO NOT USE NEAR CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS.
PC CARD IMPEDANCE
(‰) 75
RENEW ELECTRODE CABLES UPON EVIDENCE OF DETERIORATION.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE COVER.

ALCON WARRANTIES VOID IF COVER IS REMOVED. SAFETY HAZARDS ARE
FLASH CARD INSERTION SLOT LABEL FREQUENCY
340 EMINENT WITH COVER REMOVED. NO USER SERVICABLE COMPONENTS
(KHz) INSIDE.
WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A PRESSURE VESSEL, P/N: 202-1339-001, WITH

THE FOLLOWING RATINGS: PS= 6.2 BAR, Tmax= 85¡C, Tmin= 10¡C, V=0.11 L.
MADE IN U.S.A.
ACCURUS NAMEPLATE LABEL (1/2 SCALE)
90 - 120 Psi
!
(620 - 825 kPa)
AIR PRESSURE INPUT LABEL FOOTSWITCH CONNECTOR LABEL I/V POLE CONNECTOR LABEL
® USE ONLY WITH
SURGICAL ACCURUS®
202-1499-001 REV. __
MADE IN U.S.A.
100-120V T10A/250V
220/230-240V T5A/250V
ELECTRICAL INPUT LABEL
ACCURUS® FOOTSWITCH ID LABEL
EQUAL POTENTIALITY LABEL
REPLACEMENT BULB
ALCON CAT # 143-088

ANSI BRL 12V 50W 807-1176-001 REV. __
ILLUMINATOR EJECTOR LABEL BULB SPECIFICATION LABEL CASSETTE EJECTOR LABEL
Figure 1-5. Labeling Used on the Accurus®
906-2020-501 1-7
®
Table 1-2. Specifications
CONSOLE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: The console accepts the following

ranges or input commercial power voltages and frequencies and
DIMENSIONS: meets the leakage currents specified in IEC 601-1-1. Protection
against electrical shock is Class I.
Height: 50.8 cm (20.0 inches)
Width: 48.3 cm (19.0 inches) 100-120 Vac 50/60 Hz 10 A max. Fuse: T 10 A / 250 V
Depth: 52.1 cm (20.5 inches) 220 Vac 50/60 Hz 6 A max. Fuse: T 5 A / 250 V
230-240 Vac 50 Hz 6 A max. Fuse: T 5 A / 250 V
WEIGHT:
Unpacked: 40.8 kg (90 pounds) FOOTSWITCH

Packed: 61.4 kg (135 pounds)
DIMENSIONS:
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS:
Height: 14.0 cm (5.50 inches)
Operating Non-Operating Width: 22.9 cm (9.00 inches)
Depth: 43.2 cm (17.0 inches)
Altitude: 3,048 meters 12,191 meters
(10,000 feet) (40,000 feet) WEIGHT: 4.5 kg (10 pounds)
Temperature: 10° C to 35° C -40° C to 75° C ENVIRONMENTAL: The footswitch construction is water tight in
(50° F to 95° F) (-40° F to 167° F) compliance with IEC 601-1 and IEC 601-2-2, subclause 44.6 aa.
Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% 10% to 95% ELECTRICAL: The footswitch is connected to the console via
without without electrical cable. All power and communications enter/exit the
condensation condensation footswitch from this cable, which is a part of the footswitch assembly.
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS SCISSORS:

Submodes: Proportional and Multi Cut
AIR PRESSURE @ SEA LEVEL: Pressure: 0 to 40 psi
AVGFI, VGFI, F/AX: 0 to 120 mmHg Cut Rate: 1 to 300 cpm in Multi Cut
Flow Rate: 1.2 slpm min. @ 120 mmHg
VISCOUS FLUID:
DIATHERMY: Submodes: Injection and Extraction
25 Watts max., 75 Ohm load Injection Pressure: 0 to 80 psi (0-70 psi @ 5-BAR)
110 Vpp @ 340 ±17 Khz, 75 Ohm load Extraction Vacuum
129 Vpp @ 340 ±17 Khz, no load at Sea Level: 0 to 600 mmHg (0-450 psi @ 5-BAR)
ILLUMINATION: PHACOEMULSIFICATION:
Normal Intensity: 6.0 lumens min. @100% Submodes: Linear and Fixed
High Intensity: 10.5 lumens min. @ highest setting (HI3) Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.5 ± 0.5 mil
Resonant Frequency: 38.0 ± 1.9 KHz
VACUUM @ SEA LEVEL: @ 5-BAR: Pulse Rate Range: 0-15 pps
Vitrectomy: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-400 mmHg
Fragmentation: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg ANTERIOR VITRECTOMY:
Extrusion: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg Submodes: Wet and Dry
Extraction: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg Vitrector Probe: 100 to 800 cpm
Irrigation/Aspiration: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg
Phacoemulsification: 0 to 300 mmHg DOCTOR MEMORIES:
Prime: 450 mmHg Storage Capacity: 40 Doctors
Memory Cells per Dr: 11 (5 ant., 5 post., 1 common)
REFLUX:
Pulsed Micro Reflux: 20 - 50 microliters TIMER:
Continuous: Dependent on fluid bottle height Range: 0 to 99 hours
Resolution: 1 second
VITRECTOMY:
InnoVit® Probe: 100 to 1200 cpm TONE VOLUMES @ 1 Meter:
Accurus® Probe: 100 to 800 cpm Errors/Faults: 40 to 65 dB
Diathermy: 40 to 65 dB
FRAGMENTATION: Invalid Key: 40 to 65 dB
Submodes: Proportional, Fixed, Momentary Valid Key: Factory set and not adjustable
Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.1 ± 0.4 mil All Others Tones: 0 to 65 dB
Resonant Frequency: 39.0 ± 1.9 KHz Volume Accuracy: 6 dB
Pulse Rate Range: 0-15 pps
REMOTE CONTROL:
Frequency: 40 KHz
Channels: 4
1-8 906-2020-501
®
25.0
DIATHERMY POWER OUTPUT (WATTS) 20.0
15.0
10.0
5.0
0.0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
SET POWER LEVEL
Figure 1-6. Diathermy Power Through 75 Ohm Load
25.0
20% Set Power

40% Set Power
20.0 60% Set Power
DIATHERMY POWER (WATTS)
80% Set Power

100% Set Power
15.0
10.0
5.0
0.0
10 100 1000
LOAD (LOG OHMS)
Figure 1-7. Diathermy Power vs. Load Impedance
906-2020-501 1-9
®
350
300
250
ASPIRATION VACUUM LEVEL (mmHg)
200
150
100
SAFE OPERATING AREA USING 0.9 mm TIP

50
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
IRRIGATION PRESSURE (mmHg)
Figure 1-8. Safe Operating Area for Irrigation/Aspiration When Using Phaco Handpiece - When using
a 0.9 mm tip on the phaco handpiece it is advised to stay within the safe I/A operating area shown in
this graph.
PROPORTIONAL FRAGMENTATION FOOTSWITCH OPERATION PROPORTIONAL PHACO FOOTSWITCH OPERATION
Vacuum Max Limit Vacuum Max Limit
U/S Power Max Limit U/S Power Max Limit

m r m r
cuu we cuu we
Va Po Va Po
s ing U/
S
s ing U/
S
ea sin
g ea sin
g
cr cr
In ea In ea
cr cr
In In
Irrigation ON
Detent Full Depression

Footpedal Footpedal Detent 1 Detent 2 Full Depression
Released Released
Increasing Footpedal Depression Increasing Footpedal Depression
Figure 1-9. Footpedal Operation in Proportional Ultrasonic Modes - The footpedal controls different
system functions as it is depressed in proportional ultrasonic modes of operation.
1-10 906-2020-501
®
• Infusion/Irrigation pressure
FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION • Fluid/Air Exchange pressure
• Diathermy power
The front panel of the Accurus® is a multifunctional user • Two light sources for fiber optic illumination
interface that allows user control of most system functions.
The descriptions of the front panel components are coded to 1B. Global Function Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
match the illustration in Figure 1-10. The up/down adjustment buttons are located to the
left of the global function selection keys, and are
1. Global Functions used to adjust their associated global function values.
The global functions area of the system is located at These buttons can be pressed quickly to change
the top-left portion of the front panel. Global values one digit at a time, or pressed and held to
functions can be used any time and in any mode. Its rapidly change the values.
three major components are described below.
1C. Global Function LED Displays
1A. Global Function Selection Keys The five LED readouts, located to the left of the
These five keys, located within the color LCD adjustment buttons, display current global function
display, are used to select the following functions settings.
(from top to bottom):
1C. Global Function LED Displays
1B. Global Function Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
1. Global Functions 1A. Global Function Selection Keys
SURGICAL
2. Color LCD Display

and Touch Screen
3. Fluid Cassette
Aspiration Port
Irrigation In Port (phaco)
Irrigation Out Port (phaco)

Aspiration Port (vit) ®
4. Cassette Port LED's (2) 7. Illuminator Drawer
! Illuminator Receptacles
5. Eject Button
Illuminator Adaptors
8. Standby Switch
Drain Bag
!
9. Speaker
6. Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors

with Connector LED's
Figure 1-10. The Accurus® Front Panel - The front panel consists of five three-character, seven-segment LED displays;
five sets of membrane up/down arrow keys; a color LCD with touchscreen; a cassette eject button; two cassette
port LED's; twelve handpiece/probe connectors; an illuminator drawer with two illuminator ports; and a power On/
Off standby switch.
906-2020-501 1-11
®
2. Color LCD Display and Touch Screen 5. Eject Button

The color LCD display and touch screen is located in Pressing the Eject button, located to the left of the
the upper-right section of the front control panel. cassette, releases the latch that secures the cassette
This graphic user interface displays icons, keys, and within its receptacle, allowing removal of the
readouts appropriate to the mode of operation and cassette. This button is active when the system is
system status. The operator presses the icons and supplied with air pressure, but is invalid when
keys on the screen to interact with the system. vacuum is activated or system power is turned OFF.
3. Fluid Cassette with Aspiration and Irrigation 6. Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors
Ports The Accurus® contains two vertical columns of
The single use cassette converts vacuum generated by connectors, with six connectors in each, for surgical
the console into aspiration, and collects the aspirated handpieces and probes. The left column is for
fluid into its small, rigid, collection chamber. The pneumatic probes, and the right column is for
collection chamber is continuously drained into a electrical handpieces. Figure 1-11 identifies each
sealed drain bag, hanging from the front of the connector.
cassette. The cassette's design allows it to be
removed from the console without spilling the WARNING!
collected fluids. Connect only Alcon supplied consumables to
console/cassette connectors. Do not connect
Two ports, a male luer on the left and a female luer consumables to patient intravenous
on the right, are provided for aspiration in the connections.
posterior modes, allowing connection of two
handpieces/probes at the same time. For Connector LED's
phacoemulsification an irrigation luer port is There are twelve LED's located next to their
provided as a third, center connector for irrigation respective connectors on the front of the console.
fluid input, with irrigation (left port) and aspiration These LED's have dual functions:
(right port) lines going to the phaco handpiece. • During surgery setup, when the operator selects a
probe, handpiece or accessory, the corresponding
4. Cassette Port LEDs LED illuminates to guide the operator to the correct
One LED is located on each side of the cassette. connector.
During surgery, and while priming, the LED's • During surgery these LED's are used to indicate
illuminate to indicate which cassette port is active. which connectors are active.
Innovit or Accurus probe U/S or Frag Handpiece

(pressure)
Innovit probe U/S or Frag Handpiece

(pressure)
Scissors Electrical Connector

(pressure) (for future enhancements)
Viscous Fluid Control Electrical Connector

(pressure or vacuum) (for future enhancements)
Pneumatic Connector Diathermy Handpiece

(for future enhancements)
VGFI/AVGFI or F/AX Diathermy Handpiece

(pressure)
!
PNEUMATIC ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS CONNECTORS
Figure 1-11. Front Panel Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors, with Connector LED's
1-12 906-2020-501
®
7. Illuminator Drawer 8. Standby Switch

The illuminator drawer contains bulbs, mirrors, and This switch is used to turn internal DC power ON
lenses to direct high intensity light to fiber optic and OFF, usually between surgeries. When the
illumination probes. Pushing the illuminator ejector Accurus® is out of service for long periods of time,
button on the rear panel ejects the drawer from its the power switch on the rear panel should be used
slot (see Figure 1-12). When the illuminator drawer (see Figure 1-12).
is ejected, both illuminators turn off, allowing the
user to replace burnt bulbs. The bulbs only illuminate 9. Speaker
when the drawer is fully inserted into its slot. Tones and voice confirmation are emitted from the
speaker, hidden behind a front panel grill, to audibly
Illuminator Receptacles alert the operator to system operating status (see
Two illuminator receptacles accept Intralux Table 1-3).
connectors.
Illuminator Adaptors
Two tethered ACMI adaptors are used to adapt Alcon
illumination probes to the illuminator receptacles.
Table 1-3. Tones and Their Descriptions
TONE DESCRIPTION
Diathermy Continuous tone when Diathermy voltage is ON.
Vacuum Continuous tone when Vacuum is ON.
U/S Continuous tone when U/S power is ON.
Fault, Error, Advisory Single tone when system fault, error, or advisory is first displayed.
The advisory tone is unique from the error/fault tone.
Alternate infusion/irrigation Single or double periodic tone, used when alternate irrigation/
pressure enable/disable; infusion pressure is enabled or disabled, and in the posterior domain
Alternate infusion alarm when the infusion pressure is greater than or equal to 50 mmHg.
Function enable/disable Double/single tone when U/S power or Vit cutting is enabled/
disabled at the footswitch (same as the valid key tone).
Valid key Single tone for a valid touchscreen key or membrane button press.
Invalid key Single tone for an invalid touchscreen key or membrane button
press, including attempts to go beyond parameter limits.
Timer expire Single tone when count down timer has expired.
906-2020-501 1-13
®
3. Illuminator Ejector Button

REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION Pressing this button ejects the Illuminator drawer
from the front of the console, allowing the user to
The rear panel of the Accurus® contains a variety of change burnt illuminator bulbs. Two bulbs are
components. The descriptions of the rear panel components provided, allowing a backup source should a bulb
are coded to match the illustration in Figure 1-12. burn out during surgery. Upon completion of surgery,
the burnt bulb should be replaced.
1. PC Card Slot
The Accurus® is a computerized machine that NOTE: It is recommended that two good bulbs
operates under software control. A software program are always installed.
is installed at the factory prior to shipment. If and
when software upgrades are required, the new 4. Power Supply with Main Power Switch, Power
program can be installed into the system by inserting Input Connector, Fuse Module, Equal Potentiality
a PC card into this slot and turning system power Lug, and Power Supply Exhaust Grate
ON. The Main Power Switch is used to turn power Off for
overnight storage of the Accurus®. The Power Input
2. Illuminator Exhaust Grate Connector accepts main power input from external
Warm air is expelled from the Accurus® console electrical power source. The Fuse Module contains
through this grate. An internal fan draws air past the the fuse drawer and fuses, as well as the voltage
illuminator components, keeping them cool for selector box (see Section Four of this manual for fuse
longer life. For proper cooling at least two feet of replacement and voltage selection). The Equal
clearance must be provided at the rear of the unit to Potentiality Lug is for Service personnel use, and
ensure unrestricted air flow. also for equipotential equipment connection. Warm
air is expelled from the Power Supply Exhaust Grate.
SERIAL IN/OUT ®
®
SURGICAL
ALCON LABORATORIES, INC. MODEL SERIAL NO. PART NO. REV MFR. DATE
FORT WORTH, TX 78134-2099, USA
! C
LA
100-120V 50/60 Hz 10A
SSIFIE
MEDICAL/ELECTRICAL CLASSIFIE
220V 50/60 Hz 6A
230V-240V 50 Hz 6A
D
EQUIPMENT
UL UL
202-1465-001 REV. __
CLASSIFIED
© ©
95KJ C 0123
UL2601-1/CAN CSA C22.2 NO. 601.1 !
OUTPUT DIATHERMY
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS.
TYPE BF CAUTION: GROUNDING RELIABILITY CAN ONLY BE ACHIEVED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS
CONNECTED TO AN EQUIVALENT RECEPTACLE MARKED HOSPITAL GRADE.
POWER
(W) 25
CAUTION: RISK OF BURNS AND FIRE - DO NOT USE NEAR CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS.
RENEW ELECTRODE CABLES UPON EVIDENCE OF DETERIORATION.
IMPEDANCE
(‰) 75
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE COVER.
ALCON WARRANTIES VOID IF COVER IS REMOVED. SAFETY HAZARDS ARE
FREQUENCY EMINENT WITH COVER REMOVED. NO USER SERVICABLE COMPONENTS
(KHz) 340
INSIDE.
1. PC Card Slot WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A PRESSURE VESSEL, P/N: 202-1339-001, WITH
THE FOLLOWING RATINGS: PS= 6.2 BAR, Tmax= 85¡C, Tmin= 10¡C, V=0.11 L.
MADE IN U.S.A.
PC CARD
2. Illuminator Exhaust Grate
3. Illuminator Ejector Button
100-120V T10A/250V
220/230-240V T5A/250V
4. Power Supply
! 5. Manual Cassette Ejector
Main Power Switch 90 - 120 Psi
(620 - 825 kPa)
Power Input Connector

6. Cool Air Input Grate
Fuse Module
Equal Potentiality Lug

7. Compressed Air Connector
Power Supply Exhaust Grate
8. Footswitch Connector
Figure 1-12. The Accurus® Rear Panel - The rear panel consists of a variety of components for functional use and
connection of accessories. Included are a PC slot, air input and exhaust grates, an illuminator ejector button, a
cassette ejector, a compressed air connector, a footswitch connector, and a power supply.
1-14 906-2020-501
®
5. Manual Cassette Ejector modes of operation the footpedal is used to provide on/
Lifting this latch releases the fluid cassette when air off control of a function, with any depression resulting in
pressure is not available or in the event of power a fixed output of its parameter.
outage.
6. Cool Air Input Grate Right and left switches are used to enable and disable
Cool, filtered air enters the Accurus® console system functions. The switches are nudged sideways
through this grate. The main system cooling fan is (horizontal) for some functions, and pressed down
located directly behind the input filter. For proper (vertical) for others.
cooling at least two feet of clearance must be
provided at the rear of the unit to ensure unrestricted • Footpedal and its Detents - A tension adjustment
air flow. knob, located on the front of the footswitch, is used
to regulate the pressure needed to depress the
7. Compressed Air Connector footpedal. Additionally, the footpedal must be
An air pressure hose from a pressure source is pressed through detents to enter into new positions.
connected here via a Schraeder connector for input of The detent force levels are programmable in the
compressed air. Doctor Memory Summary screen.
8. Footswitch Connector • Reflux - While operating in modes that utilize

For connecting the footswitch cable to the Accurus®. aspiration, the heel switch can be pressed down and
released to generate a micro reflux pulse. After
pressing/releasing 10 consecutive times in posterior
FOOTSWITCH modes, or 20 times in anterior modes, vacuum must
be activated to allow reflux again. Reflux is available
Input of operator commands to the Accurus® console are only when the footpedal is released.
accepted from a footswitch. The footswitch consists of a
footpedal, right and left horizontal/vertical switches, and Momentary continuous reflux is available in anterior
a heel switch (see Figure 1-13). Functions controlled by modes. Pressing and holding the left horizontal switch
the footswitch are listed in Table 1-4 (posterior) and activates continous reflux for as long as the switch is
Table 1-5 (anterior). held, then turns off when released.
Generally, the footpedal is used to provide control of a

parameter, such as vacuum, with the footpedal's angle of
depression proportional to the parameter output. In some
Tension Adjustment Knob
Footpedal
Left Horizontal/Vertical Switch Right Horizontal/Vertical Switch
Heel Switch
Figure 1-13. Footswitch - The footswitch is used to input operator commands to the Accurus®.
906-2020-501 1-15
®
Table 1-4. Footswitch Functions in Posterior Domain
Mode Submode Footpedal Left Right Left Right Heel

Depression Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Switch
Vit InnoVit Cutting & Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Proportional Cutting Cutting Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Vacuum Toggle
Accurus Cutting & Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Proportional Cutting Cutting Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Vacuum Toggle
Frag* Fixed Proportional Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum & U/S Power U/S Power Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Fixed U/S Power Toggle
Proportional Proportional Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum & U/S Power U/S Power Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Prop U/S Power Toggle
Momentary Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Enable Diathermy Infusion Reflux
U/S Power Toggle
Scissor Prop Proportional Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Scissor Proportional Multi-Cut Diathermy Infusion
Closure Subfunction Subfunction Toggle
Multi Multi Cut Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Proportional Multi-Cut Diathermy Infusion
Subfunction Subfunction Toggle
Calibration N/A Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Proportional Multi-cut Diathermy Infusion
Subfunction Subfunction Toggle
Extrude Low Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Diathermy Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Toggle
Medium Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Toggle
High Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Toggle
Inject Proportional N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

VFC Pressure Diathermy Infusion
Toggle
Extract Proportional N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

Vacuum Diathermy Infusion
Toggle
Surgery Setup, N/A N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

Test, Clean Diathermy Infusion
Toggle
Memory N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
* Pulsed mode is available in all U/S functions
1-16 906-2020-501
®
Table 1-5. Footswitch Functions in Anterior Domain
Mode Submode Footpedal Depression Left Right Left Right Heel

1 2 3 Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Switch
U/S* Linear Irrigation Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro
Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Max Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle
Linear U/S
Fixed Irrigation Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Linear Vac Max Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle
Fixed U/S
I/A Maximum Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Linear Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle
Minimum Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Linear Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle
Vit Wet Irrigation Irrigation Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Cut On Cutting Cutting Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Toggle
Dry Cut On Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Linear Vac Cutting Cutting Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Toggle
Surgery N/A N/A N/A Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate N/A

Setup Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation
Reflux Toggle Toggle
Clean N/A N/A N/A N/A Continuous Momentary Alternate N/A

Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation
Toggle Toggle
Test N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Momentary N/A N/A

Diathermy
Memory N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
* Pulsed mode is available in all U/S functions
906-2020-501 1-17
®
NOTE: If necessary for identification, place labels on

REMOTE CONTROL
the remote controls and units to distinguish one from
the other.
A wireless remote control is provided for operator input
(see Figure 1-14). The buttons on the remote control are
NOTE: If battery voltage becomes too low for the
arranged to approximate the respective controls on the
remote to function properly, a pop up message will
console. All controls are backlit by heat actuation; i.e.,
appear on the console display. In that case, replace
illumination in low ambient light is activated when the
with new batteries by following instructions in Section
sensor detects heat from the hand.
Four of this manual.
The remote control is wireless and can be used in one of
two ways: it can be held by hand, or it can be set in the CAUTION
sterile tray and operated through a Remote Control Do not sterilize the remote control as it will damage
Aseptic Transfer Package, allowing the scrub nurse to the unit.
use it in the sterile field. The circulating nurse could also
operate the remote in a non-sterile manner.
The arrow buttons are used to adjust mode parameters,

except for the Messages arrow buttons. The Messages
®
arrow buttons are used to toggle between various user
responses that appear in popup messages.
The round buttons in the middle of the remote control are MESSAGES
MESSAGES VAC/PRESS
used exclusively to access primary surgical functions.
The round buttons at the bottom of the remote control are
used to access global functions and memory, and to
activate the selection.
The Activate button is used to actuate the selection of a POWER PULSE / CPM
global function and/or a highlighted selection on a popup
message. The Activate button has a raised area around it
to make it stand out from the other buttons; this helps
ensure that a selection is not accidentally pressed.
The remote control operates on one-of-four channels (A,

B, C, or D), and is similar for both the Accurus® and
Legacy®. This feature allows four remote controls to be
used on four systems operating in the same area. To AUX
ensure proper remote control operation when two or more
systems are used in the same area, set each to a separate
channel. (Instructions to set the remote control and
Accurus® to another channel are written in Section Four MEMORY
of this manual.)
The Accurus® and its remote control are factory preset to ADJUST
channel D. The Accurus® remote control is intended for

use only with the Accurus® System.
ACTIVATE ®
Figure 1-14. Wireless Remote Control - Most of the

functions of the wireless remote control are the same as those
on the console.
1-18 906-2020-501
®
If a fault is detected during self-test diagnostics, a System

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SCREENS Fault Screen is displayed and the system becomes non-
operational. Otherwise, one of the following happens
The operating screens described in this section are after power-up initialization is completed:
displayed on the front panel color LCD display. The
colors and their intensities are designed for easy viewing • If no startup preferences are programmed into
in both light and dark environments. memory, the Procedure Selection Screen is displayed
(see Figure 1-16 and the explanation below),
Power Up Screen allowing the user to select either the posterior or
The power-up initialization cycle lasts approximately 60 anterior surgical domain.
seconds. After the first 10 seconds of this cycle, the
Power Up Screen is displayed while the system • If preferences have been programmed into memory,
completes initialization and self-test diagnostics (see the system advances to the mode/screen selected by
Figure 1-15). All operator inputs are locked out at this the programmer.
time.
Procedure Selection Screen
The Procedure Selection Screen is displayed after system
initialization or when the Exit key is pressed from either
the Posterior or Anterior Surgery Setup Screen, allowing
entry into either the posterior or anterior domain (see
®®
Figure 1-16). When a new domain is entered, all settings
are reset to their defaults.
Procedure Selection
Figure 1-15. Power Up Screen - After the first 10 seconds

of the Power-Up Initialization cycle the Power Up Screen is Anterior
displayed while the system completes initialization and self-test
diagnostics. No operator inputs are allowed at this time. Posterior
WARNING!
REL_X.XX
During initialization the drain pump is rotated to
its home position. Therefore, keep hands and
fingers clear of cassette well during power-on Figure 1-16. Procedure Selection Screen - The
initialization. After initialization, do not manually Procedure Selection Screen is displayed after system initializa-
turn hub roller. Finger pinch and/or improper tion or when the Exit key is pressed from either the Posterior or
cassette installation can occur. Anterior Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Anterior or
Posterior key on the touch screen quits this screen and brings
up either the posterior or anterior Surgery Setup Screen.
906-2020-501 1-19
®
Display Windows and their Functions

The LCD display and touch screen is divided into seven
windows, shown below in Figure 1-17. Descriptions of
the windows and their functions are written on the
following pages.
1. Modes Window
2. Global Functions Window
3. Title Window
4. Doctor Memories Window
5. Miscellaneous Window
6. Primary Display Window
7. Popup window
5. Miscellaneous Window
3. Title Window
Franklin, John Mem 1 00:00:00 Options
mmHg 0
FRAGMENTATION: Fixed
6. Primary Display Window
2. Global Functions Window
Vacuum mmHg
mmHg 0 ! System Error 150

Actual Max Limit
Ultrasonic power and
Diathermy are not available.
Error code 201 Pulse Rate
% volt
OK 8 pps 7. Popup Window
Setting
1
Illum1 Fixed Prop Moment
2
1. Modes Window
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
Figure 1-17. LCD Display and Touch Screen - The color display screen for the Accurus® displays modes of operation
and operating parameters, and also is used for operator input by pressing the touch keys on the screen. This
screen is the operator's main tool to input system commands. Operator input is also received from the remote
control and the footswitch.
1-20 906-2020-501
®
1. Modes Window 2. Global Functions Window

This window displays touch keys and their Global functions are available in all setup and
corresponding icons. There are two kinds of keys surgery screens, regardless of system status or
displayed in this window: Accessory keys and Mode footpedal position (see Figure 1-20). Functions are
keys, depending on whether the screen is displaying turned ON and OFF via their icon keys, and their
its Setup Screen or its Surgery Screen. The Mode parameter values are adjusted by pressing the global
keys are animated when selected. Figures 1-18 and function up/down adjustment buttons. When turned
1-19 show the two screens. ON, some global functions can be affected from the
footswitch.
Global LED Readouts

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
Global Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
mmHg 0
VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup
Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories

mmHg
Vac Vit Vac 0
Diathermy mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Extrude InnoVit Scissors
% volt Vacuum mmHg

Frag Accurus VFC
mmHg
0 100
1 VGFI - F/AX Max Limit
Actual
Illum1
Cut Rate
% volt
900 cpm
2
1 Setting
Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

Illum1 InnoVit Accurus
Figure 1-18. Accessory Selections in Modes Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
Window - This section of the display screen offers either

accessory selections or surgical mode selections in the modes
window. This illustration shows posterior accessory selections;
Figure 1-20. Global Functions Window - Global
the anterior accessory selections are similar.
functions are available at all times. In this illustration infusion
and both illuminators are turned on, indicated by the illuminated
icons and bright blue bases.
Global functions may be used in combination with

other global functions. Selecting or deselecting one
mmHg 0
VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
function does not affect the others (except Infusion
Vacuum mmHg and Fluid/Air Exchange; selecting one deselects the
mmHg
0 100
other).
Actual Max Limit
Cut Rate
% volt
900 cpm Listed below are the distinctions between global

1 Setting
function icons when they are turned ON and OFF,
Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
and what the ON/OFF conditions mean. Descriptions
2
of the global functions follow.
ICON TURNED ON ICON TURNED OFF

Figure 1-19. Surgical Mode Selections in Modes Icon is illuminated Icon is dimmed
Window - This illustration shows posterior surgical mode Base of icon bright blue Base of icon gray
selections in the modes window; the anterior mode selections Actuals are displayed Settings are displayed
are similar. The mode keys are animated when selected—in Up/Down keys adjust settings Up/Down keys adjust settings
this case the system is set in Vit mode for use with the InnoVit®
probe.
906-2020-501 1-21
®
• Infusion (posterior domain) adjust the fluid pressure, displayed in mmHg or

Infusion pressure is delivered through one of cmH2O. Pressing down on the footswitch's right
two methods: gravity or air pressure. vertical switch toggles between regular and alternate
mmHg Selection of infusion method is provided in fluid pressure.
the Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen.
• Continuous Irrigation (anterior domain)
When Gravity infusion is selected in the Infusion Continuous irrigation, independent of the footpedal,
Settings Screen, the infusion icon dims, the LED is turned ON/OFF by pressing either the global
display blanks, and the Accurus® does not provide irrigation icon or pressing sideways on the
infusion pressure; pressure is adjusted by raising or footswitch's right horizontal switch. Continuous
lowering the fluid bottle. irrigation is available in both gravity and Anterior
VGFI®.
When VGFI® (Vented Gas Forced Infusion) is
selected in the Infusion Settings Screen and activated
by pressing its global icon, the Accurus® delivers • Fluid Air Exchange (F/AX)
filtered, pressurized air through a tubing set into the F/AX provides filtered room air for fluid/air
infusion bottle, which in turn pressurizes fluid exchanges in the posterior domain only. The
through tubing to the eye (F/AX, if in use, is mmHg air is supplied through tubing to the eye from
deselected). The Up/Down arrow buttons are used to a front panel pneumatic connector.
adjust the fluid pressure, displayed in mmHg or
cmH2O. Pressing down on the footswitch's right When the F/AX function is selected, fluid infusion, if
vertical switch toggles between regular and alternate in use, is deselected. The Up/Down arrow buttons are
fluid pressure. used to adjust the pump pressure, displayed in mmHg
or cmH2O.
• Irrigation (anterior domain)
Irrigation pressure is delivered through one of two
methods: gravity or air pressure. Selection of • Diathermy
irrigation method is provided in the Cataract The Diathermy global function provides
Irrigation Settings Screen. In anterior surgeries the fixed diathermy capability through the use of
fluid is delivered to the eye via a handpiece % volt diathermy probes and handpieces. Diathermy
connected by tubing to the cassette. Irrigation ON/ output is available at all times, and is based
OFF control is maintained by the footpedal; on the percent of voltage output.
depressing the footpedal starts irrigation, and
releasing the pedal stops it. (Continuous irrigation is When the diathermy function is selected a popup
also available, described below.) window is displayed to remind the operator to use the
footswitch to control this function. This popup
When Gravity irrigation is selected in the Irrigation window can be removed by pressing the screen's
Settings Screen, the irrigation LED's dim, and Continue key or activating the diathermy function.
pressure is adjusted by raising or lowering the fluid
bottle (the Accurus® does not provide irrigation The diathermy function can be activated in all modes
pressure). by pressing the footswitch's left vertical switch.
Additionally, it can be activated in Extrude mode by
When AVGFI (Anterior Vented Gas Forced pressing the right horizontal switch. In Frag, VFC,
Irrigation) is selected in the Irrigation Settings and Scissors modes the footpedal must be released
Screen and activated by pressing its global icon, the before you can activate diathermy; in Extrude mode
Accurus® delivers filtered, pressurized air through a the footpedal is inconsequential.
tubing set into the infusion bottle, which in turn
pressurizes fluid through the cassette and handpiece Diathermy power is adjusted with the up/down arrow
to the eye. The Up/Down arrow buttons are used to buttons on the front panel, with the percentage of
diathermy voltage output displayed.
1-22 906-2020-501
®
• Illuminators (Illum1 & llum2) 3. Title Window

1 2 Two halogen bulbs in the front This window displays the current setup, surgery
panel illuminator drawer functions, and subfunctions.
Illum1 Illum2 provide light to two illuminator
receptacles. Fiber optic light Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
pipes can be plugged into the receptacles. mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit 0
Illuminators can be used individually or concurrently

Vacuum
because each illuminator has its own on/off and mmHg
0
mmHg
100
intensity controls. Light intensity for each illuminator Actual Max Limit
is shown in its LED display, and each is adjustable % volt

Cut Rate
900 cpm
using the Up/Down arrow buttons. 1 Setting
Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
In the event of a burnt bulb, the illuminator icon Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
is replaced by the Bulb Burned Out icon, and an

advisory popup window appears on the screen.
The user should then remove and plug the light Figure 1-21. Title Window - This window shows current
mode of operation.
pipe into the other illuminator receptacle, press OK,
and proceed.
This window is used to display the current selected
NOTE: Upon completion of the procedure it is
doctor name, memory number, and the doctor
recommended that the burnt bulb be replaced.
memory drop down arrow keys.
Two illuminator sources should always be
available. (See Section Five of this manual for
instructions to replace bulb.) Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
0
mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Vacuum mmHg
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
Cut Rate
% volt
900 cpm
1 Setting
Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
Figure 1-22. Doctor Memories Window - This window

shows current memory selections, including doctor and his
selected memory number.
906-2020-501 1-23
®
5. Miscellaneous Window 6. Primary Display Window

The Timer Display key, Footswitch icon, and The Primary Display window is used to select setup
Options key are all located in this window. These options in the Setup Screens, and to adjust operating
three features are described below. parameters in the Surgery Screens. The operating
parameters in the Vitrectomy Surgery Screen are
Franklin, John Mem 2 00:00:00 Options
shown below.
0
Vacuum mmHg
0
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
Vacuum mmHg
% volt
Cut Rate
900 cpm
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
1 Setting
Cut Rate
Illum1 % volt
InnoVit Accurus
900 cpm
2 1 Setting
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit Illum1

InnoVit Accurus

Figure 1-23. Miscellaneous Window - This window
contains three items: the Timer Display key, Footswitch icon,
and Options key.
Figure 1-24. Primary Display Window - This window is
used to set up and adjust operating parameters, and to view
• Timer Display Key
actuals.
The Timer Display key appears on the upper right
hand corner of the Surgery Screens and Setup 7. Popup Window
Screens whenever the timer is active (see Timer This window is used to indicate system errors,
under the Options Key, below). Pressing the Timer advisories, and other messages to the user. When a
Display key stops the timer and removes it from the popup window appears, only the keys inside the
screen. popup window and the Global Function keys not
related to the popup window are available. For a list
• Footswitch Icon of system messages turn to Section Five of this
When the footswitch is activated this icon changes manual.
color and, for footpedal activation, changes number
in its center to represent the amount of footpedal
Franklin, John
depression. When the footpedal is released, the icon Mem 2 Options
0
displays 0. Upon depression the footpedal icon mmHg
progressively displays 1, 2, and 3. Steps 1 to 2, and 2 Vacuum mmHg
to 3 are accompanied by a slight detent resistance as mmHg

0 100
Actual ! System Advisory Max Limit
the pedal is depressed. Cassette type does not Cut Rate

% volt match surgical mode. Please
insert the correct cassette. 900 cpm
OK
• Options Key 1 Setting
Illum1
Pressing the Options key brings up a menu of InnoVit Accurus
selections, offering the user a variety of helpful tools. 2
The selections are Quick Save, Memory, Volume, Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
Timer, and Metrics.

Figure 1-25. Popup Window - Information popups indicate
system messages, typically to confirm a critical operator
request or to provide status. The popup window disappears
when the action is completed, or when the operator presses a
popup key to acknowledge the message.
1-24 906-2020-501
®
LED illuminates next to its associated front panel

POSTERIOR SETUP AND SURGERY SCREENS
connector. Selecting a probe or handpiece with a
common connector deselects the other.
Upon pressing the Posterior domain key on the
Procedure Selection Screen, the system enters the
When entering a Surgery Screen from the Surgery Setup
VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen, shown below in
Screen, the mode of the currently tested handpiece is
Figure 1-26.
selected automatically. If more than one probe or
handpiece was tested, priority is given to the Vit mode.
0
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
mmHg
• Accessories
Either Diathermy, Scissors, VFC, or F/AX is selected by
mmHg
Vac Vit Vac Diathermy pressing its corresponding touch key. Selecting one
Extrude InnoVit Scissors
accessory automatically deselects any other accessory.
% volt Frag Accurus VFC
When an accessory is selected, an LED illuminates next
1 VGFI - F/AX
to its associated front panel connector. Only the last
Illum1
selected handpiece or accessory LED illuminates.
2

• Test
When the Test key is pressed, the selected
Figure 1-26. VItreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen - probes and handpieces are primed
Entering the VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen allows the sequentially, and a popup window
user to prepare the Accurus® system for surgery. Six compo- indicates that priming and testing are
nents are offered: two components—the handpiece and Test
accessory selections—are in the Primary Display Window; and active. The selected handpieces are tested
four components—Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup—are in the sequentially with the popup window
Modes Window. indicating when prime, test, or tune is currently active.
Only the popup window keys (Stop and Skip), global
On this screen the user can prepare the Accurus® system function Illuminator keys, and diathermy are operable
for surgery, then exit to another screen by pressing one of while the Test function is active.
the following keys on the touch screen:
If the Stop key is pressed during priming, the test
• Press Setup to enter Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings function is aborted. If Skip is pressed during priming,
Screen priming is skipped and handpiece testing/tuning begins.
• Press Surgery to enter Posterior Surgery Screens
• Press Exit to return to Procedure Selection Screen An invalid error tone sounds when pressing the Test key
(600DS only) with no probe or handpiece selected. An advisory popup
window appears when the Frag handpiece is selected but
The VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen can also be not connected, when no cassette is inserted, or when
entered by pressing the Exit key from the Vitreoretinal priming/tuning has failed.
Infusion Settings Screen or a Posterior Surgery Screen.
• Clean
Popup windows can appear over these screens to advise Pressing the Clean key transfers fluid from
the user of certain conditions. the cassette into the drain bag. When Clean
is pressed, a popup window indicates
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen cleaning is in progress. Only the Stop key
There are six Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen Clean in the popup window, and global function
components offered to prepare for surgery. Two Illuminator keys, are operable while the
components - the handpiece and accessory selections - are clean function is active. Pressing the Stop key during
in the Primary Display Window; and four components - cleaning aborts the function.
Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup - are in the Modes Window.
If fluid is not fully transferred to the drain bag, press the
• Select Handpiece for Prime / Test Clean key a second time. (There will always be some
Probes and handpieces are selected for priming or testing/ residual fluid left in the cassette due to surface tension.)
tuning by pressing their corresponding touch keys (see
Figure 1-26). When a probe or handpiece is selected, an
906-2020-501 1-25
®
• Surgery • Alternate Infusion Pressure

When the Surgery key is pressed, the The Alternate Infusion Pressure is adjusted using the
system exits the Surgery Setup Screen and touch arrow keys displayed next to the readout. Alternate
enters the selected Surgery Screen. If Infusion Pressure is applicable only when using VGFI®
Surgery prime/tune is not finished, a popup infusion; therefore, the arrow keys and the VGFI® key
reminder appears. are greyed out and unavailable if Gravity infusion is
selected. The regular and alternate pressures are toggled
by pressing the footswitch's right vertical switch.
•Setup
When the Setup key is pressed, the system When the alternate infusion pressure is active and the
exits the Surgery Setup Screen and enters infusion pressure is adjusted, the new setting will be
the VitreoRetinal Infusion Settings Screen. saved as the new alternate infusion pressure.
Setup
Posterior Surgery Screens
The Accurus® offers five surgery modes in the posterior
Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen domain—depicted as icons in the Modes Window at the
The Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen (see Figure bottom of the touch screen—and each surgery mode has
1-27) is entered by pressing the Setup key on the submodes (see Table 1-6). The active mode and submode
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Exit key keys are highlighted, and their names are displayed in the
closes this screen and returns to the Vitreoretinal Surgery Title Window.
Setup Screen.
Table 1-6. Posterior Domain Surgery Modes
Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings
mmHg
MODE SUBMODE 1 SUBMODE 2 SUBMODE 3
Infusion Type Alternate Infusion Pressure
VGFI
60 mmHg
mmHg
Gravity Vit InnoVit® Accurus® --
% volt Frag Fixed Prop Moment

1
Illum1 Scissor Prop Multi Calib

2
Illum2 Exit Extrude Low Medium High
VFC Inject Extract --

Figure 1-27. Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen -
On this screen the user can select the type of infusion desired.
The alternate infusion pressure is available, and can be
adjusted, only if VGFI is selected. To enter a surgery mode, press its associated icon key on
the touch screen. The previous surgery mode or submode
• Infusion Type is deactivated when a new mode or submode is selected,
The infusion method selected from this screen determines and front panel LED's illuminate to indicate which
how infusion pressure is provided for surgery. connectors are active. To enter a surgery submode, press
the key above its associated mode key. Pressing a mode
When VGFI® (Vented Gas Forced Infusion) is selected, key successively causes the system to cycle through the
infusion pressure is provided by applying air pressure available submodes, although the Scissor Calib submode
into the fluid bottle. An internal air pump creates is not included in the cycle.
pressurized air, and the VGFI® tubing set delivers it to
the bottle from a front panel connector. The air pressure NOTE: The footpedal must be released, and none of
setting is adjusted with the Infusion up/down buttons on the footswitches depressed, to enter or change a
the front panel, and the corresponding LED readout is surgery mode.
immediately to the left of the buttons.
When Gravity infusion is selected, infusion pressure is

dependent on the fluid bottle height.
1-26 906-2020-501
®
When a surgery mode is first entered after power up, the switch, and enabled by pressing the right horizontal
system enters its factory default settings, or if a doctor switch. (Pressing the Cut Rate key also turns cutting ON/
memory has been selected, the doctor's programmed OFF.)
values are used. If the defaults are then adjusted, re-entry
to that mode will display the new values. Turning system Accurus® - The Accurus® submode provides vacuum and
power OFF resets all values back to the factory default cutting to the Accurus® probe. This submode has the
settings, as does exiting the anterior or posterior domain. same basic characteristics as the InnoVit® submode with
the exception of the cutting rate range.
• Vit Mode
The Vitrectomy mode provides vitreous • Frag Mode
cutting and vacuum using a pneumatically The Fragmentation mode provides
powered cutting probe connected by tubing ultrasonic fragmentation and vacuum using
Vit to a pulsed air pressure source and a Alcon's Fragmatome® handpiece. The
vacuum port. Frag handpiece is connected to the Accurus®
console with an electric cable and vacuum
tubing.
0
0
Vacuum mmHg mmHg FRAGMENTATION: Fixed
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
Vacuum mmHg
% volt
Cut Rate
mmHg
0 150
900 cpm Actual Max Limit
1 Setting
U/S Power Pulse Rate
% volt
Illum1 InnoVit Accurus 60 % 8 pps
1 Setting Setting
2
Illum1 Fixed Prop Moment
Figure 1-28. Vit Mode Screen - This screen shows the

InnoVit® submode with VGFI® infusion and Illuminator 1 turned Figure 1-29. Fixed Fragmentation Screen - This screen
ON. The Accurus® submode only differs in that the Title Window shows the Fixed Fragmentation default settings. The Momen-
says VITREOUS PROBE: Accurus, and the Accurus key is tary Fragmentation screen looks the same as this, but the Title
highlighted instead of the InnoVit key. Window reads FRAGMENTATION: Momentary. The Propor-
tional Fragmentation screen looks like this, but the Title Window
The Vit mode is entered when the Vit key is pressed. reads FRAGMENTATION: Proportional, and an Actual box is
Two submodes are available, each with its own default located to the left of the U/S Power box.
cut rate and vacuum level. Values are adjusted using
touch arrow keys, even when the footpedal is depressed. Three submodes are available, each with its own default
U/S power and maximum vacuum limits. Values are
Vacuum is proportional to the footswitch treadle position. adjustable using touch arrow keys, regardless of
Cutting can be enabled/disabled using the footswitch footpedal position. U/S power is enabled and disabled by
Right/Left horizontal switches, and can be changed pressing the right/left horizontal footswitches (except in
regardless of footpedal position. When cutting is momentary mode), or by pressing the U/S Power touch
disabled, the Cut Rate Setting is grayed. Micro reflux is key. Micro reflux is available via the heelswitch.
available via the heel switch.
U/S Pulse controls are available in all three submodes,
Submode selection represents probe selection: and can be turned ON by pressing the Pulse Rate touch
key. The pulse rate can be adjusted using the touch arrow
InnoVit® - The InnoVit® submode provides cutting and keys, even with the footpedal depressed.
vacuum to the InnoVit® probe. Cutting is started, and
proportional vacuum is begun, when the footpedal is Fixed - When the Fixed Fragmentation submode is
pressed. As the footpedal is depressed the vacuum enabled, depressing the footpedal activates the preset U/S
increases, with the actual vacuum displayed in the Actual power and provides vacuum proportional to footpedal
box and its linear equivalent reflected in the bar. Cutting depression, up to the maximum limit.
is disabled by pressing the footswitch's left horizontal
906-2020-501 1-27
®
Proportional - Depressing the footpedal in Proportional keys must be pressed to activate pressure to the
Fragmentation submode increases vacuum up to its handpiece. If one pressure is adjusted to equal the other,
maximum limit, which is reached at half of full footpedal the pressures will automatically be adjusted so the closed
depression. From this detent point maximum vacuum is pressure is greater than the open pressure. Pressing the
maintained while proportional U/S power begins and Default key sets the pressures back to the factory
increases up to the U/S power maximum limit, reached at defaults.
full footpedal depression.
Momentary - The Momentary Fragmentation submode mmHg SCISSORS: Proportional 0
allows momentary activation of U/S power while Pressure psi
building vacuum. Depressing the footpedal provides mmHg

0.0 20.0
Actual
vacuum proportional to pedal position, up to the Max Limit
maximum limit. Fixed U/S power is provided when the % volt
footpedal is depressed and the right horizontal switch is 1
enabled. Illum1 Prop Multi Calib
• Scissors Mode Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
The Scissors mode provides cutting

capability using pneumatically powered Figure 1-30. Proportional Scissors Screen - Pressing
down on the footpedal in this mode provides proportional
scissors controlled by the footswitch. A control of the opening and closing of the scissor blades.
Scissor single use microscissors tip is screwed Pressing the Scissors key cycles back and forth between
onto an Alcon IOS handpiece, which is Proportional and Multiple cut submodes.
connected via tubing to an Accurus® front panel
connector. Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
0
mmHg SCISSORS: Multiple Cut
Three submodes are available: Proportional (Prop is Cut Rate
default), Multiple Cut (Multi), and Calibration (Calib). mmHg

250
Pressing the Scissors key, or the footswitch's left and Setting
right horizontal switches, cycles back and forth between % volt
Proportional and Multiple cut submodes. To enter the 1
Calibration submode the Calib key must be pressed, Illum1 Prop Multi Calib
allowing the user to calibrate the pneumatic pressure for 2
the open and closed positions. Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
Proportional - The Proportional submode (see Figure Figure 1-31. Multiple Cut Scissors Screen -
Depressing the footpedal in multiple cut mode activates the
1-30) provides proportional control of the opening and scissors at the preset Cut Rate. The Cut Rate Setting can be
closing of the scissor blades, dependent upon the amount adjusted while the footpedal is depressed.
of footpedal depression. The amount of scissors closure
is indicated in the Pressure window. When the footpedal
is fully depressed, the Max Limit is reached, and scissors 0

mmHg SCISSORS: Calibration
should be fully closed. Max Limit pressure is adjustable
with the up/down arrow keys. mmHg
Open Pressure
6.0 psi
Multiple Cut - In the Multiple Cut submode (see Figure % volt

Close Pressure
11.0 psi
1-31) depression of the footpedal activates the scissors at 1
Default
the preset Cut Rate. The cut rate is adjustable by pressing Illum1 Prop Multi Calib
the up/down arrow keys next to the Cut Rate Setting,
2
even when the footpedal is depressed. Single cuts are Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
possible by adjusting the cut rate to its minimum value.

Figure 1-32. Scissors Calibration Screen - To enter
Calibration - The Scissors Calibration submode (see the calibration submode the Calib key must be pressed. This
Figure 1-32) allows the user to adjust the scissors open screen shows the open and closed pressures for scissors
and closed air pressures with the up/down arrow keys, activation; pressing the arrow keys adjusts the pressures.
whether or not scissors are enabled (footpedal is not Pressing the Default key sets the pressures back to the factory
defaults.
required for calibration). The Open or Close Pressure
1-28 906-2020-501
®
• Extrude Mode • VFC Mode

This mode provides vacuum from a front The VFC mode provides pressure at the
panel connector through tubing to an front panel VFC connector for viscous
extrusion handpiece. Three submode fluid injection (i.e., silicone oil), or
Extrude vacuum levels are available: Low, VFC vacuum for fluid extraction, through
Medium, and High; with Medium as the tubing to a syringe. Pressure and vacuum
default setting. levels are adjustable via the arrow keys next to the Max
Limit display box.
Depressing the footpedal activates vacuum proportional
to pedal position. The preset maximum vacuum level, CAUTION
adjustable using the arrow keys, is reached at full treadle
depression, and pressing the heel switch activates pulsed Always use Alcon-supplied Viscous Fluid Injector
reflux. The preset maximum vacuum level can be Paks and follow all Directions for Use. Do not aspirate
adjusted with the footpedal in any position. fluids directly into the console; this will cause damage
to the console, increase risk of electrical shock, and
NOTE: Whenever a vacuum surge is detected, or the void all warranties.
cassette is being drained, or the system runs a VAC
check, the operator must remove his foot from the Inject - In this submode the injection pressure is provided
footswitch treadle for vacuum to be re-activated. proportional to the footpedal position. The Max Limit
pressure level is reached at full pedal depression.
0
mmHg EXTRUSION: Medium
WARNINGS!
mmHg
0
Vacuum mmHg
150
• Double check the cannula connected to the
Actual Max Limit syringe for a tight connection. It must not be
% volt
allowed to come loose.
1
• Adjust the Max Limit air pressure in accordance
Illum1 Medium
Low High
with the viscosity of fluids to be injected.
2
Excessively high settings may endanger the
patient.
Figure 1-33. Extrusion Screen - Three extrusion

submodes are offered: Low, Medium, and High. Full depression Extract - In this submode the vacuum for fluid extraction
of the footpedal is required to reach the preset maximum is provided proportional to the footpedal position. The
vacuum.
Max Limit vacuum is reached at full pedal depression.
0
mmHg EXTRUSION: Medium
Vacuum mmHg
mmHg
0 150
Actual Max Limit
% volt
Illum1 Low Medium High
Figure 1-34. VFC Injection Screen - The VFC injection

mode shown on this screen indicates the system is prepared to
deliver a maximum of 50 psi to the injection syringe with the
footpedal in the full down position. The screen for the extraction
mode looks similar to this, but the Pressure and psi labels are
Vacuum and mmHg, and the Max Limit is different.
906-2020-501 1-29
®
When entering a Surgery Screen from the Surgery Setup

ANTERIOR SETUP AND SURGERY SCREENS Screen, the mode of the currently tested handpiece is
selected automatically. If more than one probe or
Upon pressing the Anterior domain key on the Procedure handpiece was tested, priority is given to the U/S mode.
Selection Screen, the system enters the Cataract Surgery
Setup Screen, shown below in Figure 1-35. On this • Accessories
screen the user can prepare the Accurus® system for Either Diathermy or Anterior VGFI® is selected by
surgery, then exit to another screen by pressing one of the pressing its corresponding touch key. Selecting one
following keys on the touch screen: accessory automatically deselects the other accessory.
When an accessory is selected, an LED illuminates next
• Press Setup to enter Cataract Irrigation Settings to its associated front panel connector. Only the last
Screen selected LED illuminates.
• Press Surgery to enter Anterior Surgery Screens
• Press Exit to return to Procedure Selection Screen • Test
When the Test key is pressed, the selected
The Cataract Surgery Setup Screen can also be entered probe or handpiece is primed, and a popup
by pressing the Exit key from the Cataract Irrigation window indicates that priming and testing
Settings Screen or an Anterior Surgery Screen. Test are active. Only the popup window keys
(Stop and Skip), global function
Illuminator keys, and diathermy are operable while the
Test function is active.
0
mmHg Cataract Surgery Setup

If the Stop key is pressed during priming, the test
Phaco Diathermy function is aborted. If Skip is pressed during priming,
I/A AVGFI
priming is skipped and handpiece testing/tuning begins.
% volt Ant Vit
1
An invalid error tone sounds when pressing the Test key
Illum1
with no probe or handpiece selected. An advisory popup
2
window appears when the U/S handpiece is selected but
not connected, when no cassette is inserted, or when
priming/tuning has failed.
Figure 1-35. Cataract Surgery Setup Screen- Entering
the Cataract Surgery Setup Screen allows the user to prepare • Clean
the Accurus® system for surgery. Six components are offered: Pressing the Clean key transfers fluid from
two components—the handpiece and accessory selections— the cassette into the drain bag. When the
are in the Primary Display Window; and four components— Clean key is pressed, a popup window
Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup—are in the Modes Window. Clean indicates cleaning is in progress. Only the
Stop key in the popup window, and global
Cataract Surgery Setup Screen
function Illuminator keys, are operable while the clean
There are six Cataract Surgery Setup Screen components
function is active.
offered to prepare for surgery. Two components—the
handpiece and accessory selections—are in the Primary
Pressing the Stop key during cleaning aborts the clean
Display Window; and four components—Test, Clean,
function. If fluid is not fully transferred to the drain bag,
Surgery, and Setup—are in the Modes Window.
press the Clean key a second time.
• Select Handpiece for Prime / Test
• Surgery
Probes and handpieces are selected for priming or testing/
When the Surgery key is pressed, the
tuning by pressing their corresponding touch keys (see
system exits the Surgery Setup Screen and
Figure 1-35). When a probe or handpiece is selected, an
enters the selected Surgery Screen.
LED illuminates next to its associated front panel Surgery
connector. Selecting a probe or handpiece with a
common connector deselects the other.
1-30 906-2020-501
®
•Setup irrigation is selected. The regular and alternate pressures

When the Setup key is pressed, the system are toggled by pressing the footswitch's right vertical
exits the Surgery Setup Screen and enters switch.
the Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen
Setup (see Figure 1-36). When the alternate irrigation pressure is active and the
irrigation pressure is adjusted, the new setting will be
saved as the new alternate irrigation pressure.
Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen
The Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen (see Figure 1-36) Anterior Surgery Screens
is entered by pressing the Setup key on the Cataract The Accurus® offers three surgery modes in the anterior
Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Exit key closes this domain—depicted as icons in the Modes Window at the
screen and returns to the Cataract Surgery Setup Screen. bottom of the touch screen—and each surgery mode has
submodes (see Table 1-7). The active mode and submode
keys are highlighted, and their names are displayed in the
Cataract Irrigation Settings Title Window.
mmHg
Irrigation Type Alternate Irrigation Pressure
AVGFI
80 mmHg
To enter a surgery mode, press its associated icon key on
Gravity
the touch screen. The previous surgery mode or submode
is deactivated when a new mode or submode is selected,
% volt
and front panel LED's illuminate to indicate which
1 connectors are active. To enter a surgery submode, press
Illum1
the key above its associated mode key. Pressing a mode
2 key successively causes the system to cycle through the
Illum2 Exit available submodes.
NOTE: The footpedal must be released, and none of

Figure 1-36. Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen - On
this screen the user can select the type of irrigation desired.
the footswitches depressed, to enter or change a
The alternate irrigation pressure is available, and can be surgery mode.
adjusted, only if AVGFI is selected.
When a surgery mode is first entered after power up, the
• Irrigation Type system enters its factory default settings, or if a doctor
The irrigation method selected from this screen memory has been selected, the doctor's programmed
determines how irrigation pressure is provided for values are used. If the defaults are then adjusted, re-entry
surgery. to that mode will display the new values. Turning system
power OFF resets all values back to the factory default
When AVGFI (Anterior Vented Gas Forced Irrigation) is settings, as does exiting the anterior or posterior domain.
selected, irrigation pressure is provided by applying air
pressure into the fluid bottle. An internal air pump creates Table 1-7. Anterior Domain Surgery Modes
pressurized air, and the Anterior VGFI® tubing set
delivers it to the bottle from a front panel connector. The MODE SUBMODE 1 SUBMODE 2
air pressure setting is adjusted with the Irrigation up/
down buttons on the front panel, and the corresponding U/S Linear Fixed
LED readout is immediately to the left of the buttons.
I/A Max Min
When Gravity irrigation is selected, irrigation pressure is
dependent on the fluid bottle height. Vit Wet Dry
• Alternate Irrigation Pressure

The Alternate Irrigation Pressure is adjusted using the
touch arrow keys displayed next to the readout. Alternate
Irrigation Pressure is applicable only when using
Anterior VGFI® irrigation; therefore, the arrow keys and
the AVGFI key are greyed out and unavailable if Gravity
906-2020-501 1-31
®
• U/S Mode • I/A Mode

The U/S function provides vacuum and The I/A mode of operation provides
U/S power to the phaco handpiece. irrigation and vacuum for aspiration to the
Irrigation and aspiration lines must be I/A handpiece. The I/A function consists
U/S plugged into the phaco handpiece, and its I/A of two vacuum submodes: Maximum
electric cable plugged into the illuminated (Max, the factory default) and Minimum
front panel connector. (Min). Each submode has its own default vacuum level,
adjustable using touch arrow keys, even when the
The U/S mode is entered when the U/S key is pressed, footpedal is depressed.
and consists of two submodes: Linear and Fixed, with
Linear being the default. Each submode has its own Irrigation is provided when the footpedal is depressed,
default power level, vacuum level, pulse ON/OFF status, and linear vacuum is provided from detent one to full
and pulse rate. The default values are adjustable using footpedal depression, with the preset maximum at full
touch arrow keys, even when the footpedal is depressed. depression.
Pulse on/off control is available in all U/S submodes by
pressing the Pulse Rate touch key. Brown, Tim Mem 3 Options
0
mmHg I/A: Maximum
Linear - In U/S Linear submode, irrigation is provided
when the footpedal is depressed. Linear vacuum, up to Vacuum mmHg
0 400
the preset maximum, is provided from detent one to Actual Max Limit
detent two, and sustained from detent two to full % volt
footpedal depression. Linear U/S power is provided from 1
detent two to full footpedal depression, with the preset Illum1 Min Max
U/S Power Max Limit reached at full depression. 2
Illum2 U/S I/A Vit Exit
Fixed - In U/S Fixed submode, irrigation is provided

when the footpedal is depressed. Linear vacuum, up to
the preset maximum, is provided from detent one to Figure 1-38. I/A Max Mode Screen - Shown here is the I/
detent two, and sustained from detent two to full A Max mode display screen. This mode provides irrigation and
vacuum to the I/A handpiece.
footpedal depression. The preset U/S Power Setting is
reached immediately upon entry into footpedal detent
two, and is sustained to full depression.
Brown, Tim Mem 2 Options
0
mmHg ULTRASOUND: Linear
Vacuum mmHg
0 75
Actual Max Limit
U/S Power Pulse Rate

% volt
0 70 % 10 pps
1 Actual Max Limit Setting
Illum1 Fixed Linear
Figure 1-37. U/S Linear Mode Screen - Shown here is

the U/S Linear mode display screen with a display box labeled
Actual next to the U/S Power Max Limit box. The other
submode, U/S Fixed, does not contain a U/S power Actual box;
it is not needed because the U/S power setting turns on or off at
the preset maximum setting when the footpedal enters detent
two.
1-32 906-2020-501
®
• Vit Mode
OPTIONS SCREENS AND FUNCTIONS
The Anterior Vitrectomy function provides
vacuum and cutting capabilities using a
Option functions are available in all screens with the
pneumatically powered vitreous probe
Vit exception of the Doctor Summary screens, the Cataract
connected to a pulsed pressure source. Wet
Irrigation Settings screen, and the Vitreoretinal Infusion
Vit is the default mode, and is entered
Settings screen. A drop down menu is displayed when the
when the Vit key is first pressed. The preset vacuum and
Options key is pressed (see Figure 1-40). The Options
cut rate values are adjustable using touch arrow keys,
screens available are Quick Save, Memory, Volume,
even when the footpedal is depressed.
Timer, and Metrics; and can be accessed by pressing the
associated key.
Cutting can be enabled/disabled using the footswitch Options
Key
right/left horizontal switches, respectively, or by pressing
the Cut Rate Setting touch key. The footpedal does not Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
Quick Save
have to be released to change the enabled/disabled mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Memory
Drop
cutting status. Vacuum mmHg
Volume Down
Menu
Timer
mmHg
0 100 Metrics
Actual Max Limit
Wet - Pressing the footpedal into detent 1 initiates Cut Rate

% volt
bimanual or coaxial irrigation. Linear vacuum and 900 cpm
1 Setting
cutting, when enabled, is provided from detent two to full Illum1 InnoVit Accurus
footpedal depression, reaching the preset maximum

2
vacuum at full depression. Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
Dry - When cutting is enabled, pressing the footpedal

into detent 1 initiates cutting and linear vacuum, reaching Figure 1-40. Options Drop Down Menu - Pressing the
Options touch key, located in the upper right corner of the
the preset maximum vacuum at full depression. In this screen, activates a drop down menu offering five options
mode irrigation flow is inhibited. choices. Pressing one of the choices activates a screen or
window for the choice selected.
0
Quick Save
mmHg ANTERIOR VITRECTOMY: Wet
The Quick Save key allows the active system settings to
Vacuum mmHg be saved into a doctor memory. When the Quick Save
0 150
key is pressed a small selection window appears on the
Actual Max Limit
Cut Rate
screen (see Figure1-41). The doctor name and memory
% volt
250 cpm number to be written to can then be selected by pressing
1 Setting
the arrow keys next to the appropriate boxes.
Illum1 Wet Dry
2 Quick Save
Selection Window
0
Figure 1-39. Vit Mode Screen - Shown here is the Wet mmHg
QUICK SAVE
anterior vitrectomy mode display screen. Anterior vitrectomy
V Franklin, John Mem 5
has two submodes, Wet and Dry, which are selected above the mmHg
0 Save Cancel
Vit key. Actual mit
Cut Rate
% volt
600 cpm
1 Setting
Figure 1-41. Quick Save Popup Window - Pressing the

Quick Save key activates a small popup window. Doctor and
memory number to be written to are chosen on this window
before saving.
906-2020-501 1-33
®
When Save is pressed another window may appear The user can copy settings from one summary screen
asking for a Personal Identification Number (PIN, see (Retrieve From) and save them to another (Save To).
Memory and Summary Screens on next page) before the When changes are made to a summary screen, a popup
settings are written into the selected doctor memory (see appears when the Exit key is pressed, allowing the user to
Figure 1-42). If there is no PIN, a popup appears asking apply the settings to the active screen.
for confirmation of the new memory settings before they
are saved. Common Selection with
Drop Down Menu
RETRIEVE FROM
PIN Window Doctor Presets Common
Posterior Franklin, John
IRRIGATION/INFUSION UNIT
Anterior SAVE TO
mmHg
Common Brown, Tim Save
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
8 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
0
mmHg VITREOUS P Enter Doctor's PIN.
SOUND VOLUMES CASSETTE TO PEL
0 cm
Off
V Master Override Voice REMOTE CHANNEL
mmHg
0 1 2 3 D
DOCTOR
New
Actual mit STARTUP DOMAIN
4 5 6 Infusion Alarm Vacuum Edit
Select
7 8 9 Delete
% volt SOURCE PRESSURE
Diathermy U/S
pm Select PIN
Cancel 0 Enter
1
Error Auxiliary
Override
Current Defaults Exit

Invalid Key
2
Figure 1-43. Common Summary Screen - One Irriga-

tion/Infusion unit, one Display Brightness, and one set of Sound
Figure 1-42. PIN Popup Window - If the doctor memory -
Volumes is saved per doctor name. One Cassette to PEL,
settings are PIN protected, pressing the Save key in the Quick
Remote Channel, Startup Domain, and Source Pressure
Save window will activate this PIN number popup. Inputting the
selection is saved per system. Pressing the Common key at the
PIN code (shown as asterisks for privacy) and pressing the
top of this screen activates a drop down menu which allows the
Enter key saves the settings.
user to select Posterior or Anterior summary screens.
Memory and Summary Screens

• Anterior, Posterior, and Common Summary Screens
The Memory option allows the doctor to program, store,
When the Memory key is pressed from the Options
and retrieve surgical parameter settings into and out of
menu, a summary screen appears that corresponds to the
Summary Screens. Pressing the Memory key on the
current doctor, memory number, and domain (Anterior or
Options drop down menu activates a Summary Screen, of
Posterior). Pressing the summary drop down key at the
which there are three types: Common, Posterior, and
top of the screen allows switching to another summary
Anterior (see Figures 1-43, 1-44, and 1-45). Summary
screen: Anterior, Posterior, or Common.
screens are provided for up to 40 doctor names, each with
five storage locations for Anterior surgery settings, five
On the Common summary screen one Irrigation/Infusion
for Posterior surgery settings, and one for Common
unit, one Display Brightness, and one set of Sound
surgery settings.
Volumes is saved per doctor name. One Cassette to PEL,
Remote Channel, Startup Domain, and Source Pressure
The name of the currently active doctor name and
selection is saved per system.
memory number are displayed at the top of surgery
screens. Listings of other doctor names and memories
The selected parameter value on a summary screen is
can be viewed by pressing the drop down arrow keys at
adjustable by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys on the
the top of the screen. A name and memory number can
right side of the screen. Any value changed from what is
then be selected by pressing name/memory on the drop
currently stored in memory is displayed in blue.
down menus.
Pressing the Default key resets all values back to factory
A PIN (Personal Identification Number) is a four digit
default settings. Pressing the Current key updates
numeric code used to safeguard individual summary
summary screen values with current system settings.
screens. If a PIN is programmed during new doctor setup,
When Exit is pressed a popup appears asking if the new
it will be required when saving, editing, or deleting a
settings should be applied to the system.
doctor's memory settings. The operator is allowed to
modify, remove, and add a PIN, but the current PIN is
required to do it.
1-34 906-2020-501
®
Doctor memory summary screens allow the user to do the Anterior Selection
following: Doctor Presets Anterior RETRIEVE FROM

Franklin, John Mem1
U/S VACUUM U/S POWER
Fixed 75 mmHg 70 % SAVE TO
• Retrieve and Save Doctor Memory. Linear

10 pps
75 mmHg
Pulse Off
70 %
Brown, Tim Mem2 Save
IRRIGATION
• Create New Doctor Name. 10 pps Pulse Off
Type AVGFI
AVGFI 50 mmHg
• Edit Doctor Name. I/A
Minimum
VACUUM
30 mmHg Alternate 80 mmHg

DOCTOR
• Delete Doctor Name. Maximum 400 mmHg
DIATHERMY 44 %
New
Ant. Vit VACUUM CUT RATE
• Manage PIN Password Protection. Wet 150 mmHg 250 cpm
Illum 1
Illum 2
80 %
80 %
Edit
Dry 150 mmHg 250 cpm Delete

Posterior Selection TREADLE
VACUUM RISE TIME
PIN
Detent Normal
Default
Firmness Medium
Posterior RETRIEVE FROM
Doctor Presets
Franklin, John Mem1
VIT VACUUM CUT RATE
InnoVit 100 mmHg 900 cpm SAVE TO Current Defaults Exit
Brown, Tim Mem2 Save
Accurus 150 mmHg 600 cpm
FRAG VACUUM U/S POWER SCISSORS 250 cpm
Fixed 150 mmHg 50 % Open Press

Close Press
6.0 psi
20.0 psi
Figure 1-45. Anterior Summary Screen - Pressing the
8 pps Pulse Off
Proportional 80 mmHg 50 % INFUSION VGFI

RETRIEVE FROM selection, located at the top right corner of
DOCTOR
8 pps Pulse Off VGFI 22 mmHg New this screen, activates a drop down menu offering summary
Momentary 150 mmHg 50 % Alternate 60 mmHg
8 pps Pulse Off F/AX 35 mmHg

Edit screens with memory settings that can be retrieved. Pressing
EXTRUSION DIATHERMY 44 %
Delete
the SAVE TO selection activates another menu to save the
PIN
LOW
50 mmHg
MEDIUM
150 mmHg
HIGH
250 mmHg Illum 1 80 % settings under other names and memory numbers.
Illum 2 80 %
VFC INJECTION EXTRACTION
50 psi 500 mmHg
Current Defaults Exit • Edit Doctor Name
An existing doctor name can be changed by pressing the
Figure 1-44. Posterior Summary Screen - Summary Edit key on a summary screen (a PIN may be required).
screens are provided for up to 40 doctor names, each with five When the Edit key is pressed, the currently selected
storage locations for Posterior surgery settings, and five for doctor name is displayed on a keyboard, from which it
Anterior surgery settings.
can be changed and saved.
• Retrieve and Save Doctor Memory
• Delete Doctor Name
Doctor names and memories are displayed when pressing
A doctor name can be removed from the doctor list. If the
their corresponding drop down keys at the top of a
doctor name does not have PIN protection, a
summary screen. A doctor memory is retrieved when
confirmation popup is displayed before the doctor name
another doctor name or memory cell is selected in the
is deleted. If the doctor name is PIN protected, a popup
RETRIEVE FROM box. The retrieved memory
appears asking the user the enter the PIN before deleting
parameters are displayed in the summary screen, and are
the name.
saved by selecting a doctor and memory number in the
SAVE TO box, then pressing Save.
• Manage PIN Password Protection
When the PIN key on a summary screen is pressed, a
If the doctor memory is protected by a PIN, a popup asks
System Information popup with the following selections
for the PIN before the save operation is completed. If the
is displayed: Add, Remove, Modify, and Cancel.
doctor memory is not protected by a PIN, a confirmation
popup appears to confirm the save operation.
- The Add feature is used to add PIN protection to
an unprotected doctor name.
• Create New Doctor Name
- The Remove feature allows the user to delete
A new doctor name can be created by pressing the New
PIN protection from a doctor name.
key on a summary screen (duplicate doctor names are not
- Modify allows the user to change the existing
permitted). A keyboard appears allowing the user to type
PIN.
a new doctor name. A popup appears when the Enter key
- Cancel stops the procedure and returns to the
is pressed to allow the option to protect the settings with
summary screen.
a four digit numeric PIN. If the operator chooses to
protect the new doctor memory, a keypad appears,
allowing the user to type a PIN. The user is asked to enter
the PIN twice when it is first created.
NOTE: Doctor names are alphabetized in the doctors

list, so it is advisable to place the doctor's last name
first.
906-2020-501 1-35
®
When any of these keys is pressed, with the exception of

Franklin, John Options
Cancel, a keypad appears for entering a four digit PIN Mem 2
SOUND VOLUMES 0
mmHg Vitreoretina
(see Figure 1-46). The PIN must be entered twice when Off
Master Override Voice

Select Ha Accessories
the user wants to Modify or create a New PIN. A valid
mmHg
PIN must be entered to Remove a PIN. Vac Infusion Alarm Vacuum Diathermy
Extrude Scissors
Diathermy U/S
PIN Window % volt Frag VFC
Error Auxiliary VGFI - F/AX

1
Posterior RETRIEVE FROM Done
Doctor Presets
Franklin, John Mem1 Illum1
Invalid Key
VIT VACUUM CUT RATE
InnoVit 100 mmHg
Enter PIN for deletion. Mem2 Save 2
Accurus 150 mmHg

FRAG VACUUM 250 cpm
Fixed 150 mmHg 6.0 psi

1 2 3
8 pps 20.0 psi
Proportional 80 mmHg
8 pps
4 5 6
VGFI DOCTOR Figure 1-47. Sound Volumes Popup Window -
22 mmHg New
Momentary 150 mmHg
7 8 9
60 mmHg
Edit
Selecting Volume from the Options menu allows the operator to
8 pps Cancel 0 Enter 35 mmHg
Delete
adjust tone and voice volume levels.
EXTRUSION 44 %
LOW MEDIUM Override PIN
50 mmHg 150 mmHg Illum 1 80 %
250 mmHg
VFC INJECTION EXTRACTION

Illum 2 80 % Timer
50 psi 500 mmHg
Current Defaults Exit
Pressing the Timer key on the Options drop down menu
allows the operator to use a general purpose timer. When
the timer is active a timer display key appears in the
Figure 1-46. PIN Popup Window - Selecting the Remove upper right hand corner of the Surgery and Surgery Setup
option from the PIN popup (not shown) brings up this keypad
screens.
for entering a four digit PIN. The Add and Modify options have a
keypad like this, but they contain a different instruction in the
top box. When the Timer key is pressed, a timer keypad appears
(see Figure 1-48). If the Start key is pressed after a value
The Override key on the PIN popup window is available is entered (hh:mm:ss format), the keypad disappears and
to allow the user to bypass the PIN. When the Override the timer begins counting down from the programmed
key is pressed a popup appears prompting the user to time. An audible tone is emitted when the count down
insert the Alcon PC card, then press the Continue key to timer reaches zero. Pressing the Start key without
override the PIN. entering a timer value removes the keypad and the timer
begins counting up.
Timer Window
Volume
When Volume is pressed on the drop down Options Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
menu, a window appears allowing adjustment of the tone mmHg VITREOUS P Please enter timer value. 0
and voice volumes (see Figure 1-47). Audible volumes V

00:00:00
are also adjustable in in the memory's Common summary mmHg

0 1 2 3
Actual mit
4 5 6
screen. Volume feedback is provided for the tone being
% volt 7 8 9
adjusted. Clear 0 Start
pm
1
Cancel
Voice confirmation is provided when switching between
2
surgical modes, submodes, and when a doctor memory is Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
selected from the drop down memory popup.
The Infusion Alarm, Diathermy, Error, and Invalid Key Figure 1-48. Timer Keypad Popup Window - This
keypad is used to start timer functions. The timer can be set to
tones cannot be lowered below a minimum value. All
count up by pressing Start with 00:00:00 in the display, or to
other adjustable tones can be turned completely off. count down by inputting a timer value and pressing Start.
A Master Override volume control is provided for Pressing the Cancel key removes the popup from the
changing all the tone and voice volumes at once. If the screen without any timer activity. Pressing the Clear key
master override volume level is set below the minimum resets the keypad value to zero. If a new count down or
for a specific tone, that tone remains at its minimum count up timer is started when another is active, the new
value. When master override is disabled its settings are timer value replaces the active one.The timer is stopped
lost; the individual volume levels are restored and by pressing the timer display key at the top of a Surgery
adjusted individually. or Surgery Setup screen.
1-36 906-2020-501
®
Metrics
Pressing the Metrics key on the Options drop down menu SYSTEM STATUS SCREENS AND POPUPS
presents a variety of automatic measurements in one
popup window (see Figures 1-49 and 1-50). The Accurus There are four categories of system status conditions.
automatically measures surgical functions, and keeps the Each status condition is described on the display screen,
accumulated values until one of three things happens: and a dedicated color is assigned to each. The colors are
The Reset key on the Metrics window is pressed, the shown below in ranking of severity:
current surgical domain is exited, or system power is
SYSTEM STATUS COLOR
turned OFF. Additionally, in the anterior domain U/S
FAULTS RED
Time and U/S Avg. reset to zero when the U/S handpiece
ERRORS YELLOW
is tuned. Posterior
ADVISORIES GREEN
Metrics Window
SYSTEM INFORMATION BLUE
mmHg VITREOUS P Metrics

0 A system Fault condition is displayed across the whole
0:00:00
InnoVit Time
0 cpm
InnoVit Avg.
screen. Error, Advisory, and System Information
mmHg
0
V 0:00:00
Accurus Time
0 cpm
Accurus Avg.
conditions are displayed in popup windows.
Actual 0:00:00 0% mit
Frag Time Frag Avg.
% volt
0:00:00 0:00:00
VFC Inject Time VFC Extract Time
Faults
pm
1
0:00:00
Scissors Time
0:00:00
Elev. Inf. Time
System faults are the most severe system status
Reset Done conditions. The Accurus® must be shut down completely
2
when a system fault is detected, then turned ON.
NOTE: For troubleshooting purposes, record all

Figure 1-49. Posterior Metrics Popup Window -
information displayed on the fault screen before
Measurements of surgical functions are accumulated automati- recycling power. For a listing of fault conditions, see
cally by the Accurus®, and are available for display in this the Troubleshooting section of this manual.
Metrics popup. Anterior
Metrics Window Each fault is assigned a priority; i.e., if more than one
fault exists, the fault with the highest priority is displayed
0
first. When a fault is detected the system is put into a safe
mmHg ULTRASOUND Metrics
0:00:00 0% state, and power must be recycled to reset the system.
U/S Time U/S Avg.
Vac
0 0:00:00
Ant. Vit Time
0 cpm
Ant. Vit Avg.
Actual
Reset Done
% volt
0 70 % 10 pps
1 Actual Max Limit Setting
Illum1 Fixed Linear

SYSTEM
2 FAULT
Please Note System Fault 401

Figure 1-50. Anterior Metrics Popup Window - The Call Field Service
anterior Metrics popup contains different measurements from
the posterior window.
Figure 1-51. System Fault Screen - System faults require

that system power be recycled. To help troubleshooting, record
information displayed on the fault screen before recycling
power.
906-2020-501 1-37
®
Errors, Advisories, and System Information • Advisories

A popup window appears over the current display screen Advisories relay a message to the user, who can usually
to indicate system Error, Advisory, or System correct the condition by following the instructions printed
Information messages. The popup remains on the screen in the Advisory popup window (see Figure 1-53).
until the operator presses OK to acknowledge the
condition, or until the condition no longer exists. When the Accurus® detects an Advisory, an Advisory
tone is sounded and its popup window is displayed.
NOTE: For listings of popup messages, see the Functions related to the Advisory are not available. The
Troubleshooting section of this manual. popup is removed when the condition is corrected or
when the user presses the OK key.
When a popup window is active, only the popup window
keys, the illuminator global function keys, and the • System Information
cassette Eject button are available. In the anterior When a condition corresponding to System Information
domain, Irrigation ON/OFF is also available. is displayed, an associated message is printed in the
popup window (see Figure 1-54). System Information
• Errors messages usually confirm a critical operator request or
When an Error is detected an error tone is heard and, provide system status. The popup window is removed
simultaneously, an Error popup window is displayed (see when the requested action is completed, or when the
Figure 1-52). The popup window remains displayed until operator presses a touch key to acknowledge the
the operator acknowledges the Error condition (the Error message.
status remains until the system power is turned OFF/ON).
Global functions and mode functions related to the Error mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit 0
are put in a safe state; keys and icons are faded to

Vacuum mmHg
indicate unavailability. If the Error does not affect the mmHg
0 100
! System Advisory
current active functions, they will remain active. Actual
Cassette is not ready.

Max Limit
Please check cassette for

Cut Rate
% volt
proper installation.
900 cpm
OK
1 Setting

Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
0
mmHg Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
2
Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
mmHg
Vac
! System Error Diathermy
Extrude Ultrasonic power and Scissors
% volt Frag
Diathermy are not available.
Error code 201 VFC
Figure 1-53. System Advisory Popup Messages -
OK System Advisories can usually be corrected by following the
1 VGFI - F/AX
instructions printed in this popup window.
Illum1

0
mmHg Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup

Figure 1-52. System Error Popup Message - System
mmHg
Errors require user intervention to address popup messages. Vac
i System Information Diathermy
Affected system functions remain unavailable until the popup Extrude Prime was not successfully Scissors
performed. Press Test
message is resolved. % volt Frag to prime. VFC
Continue Test
1 VGFI - F/AX
Illum1
Figure 1-54. System Information Popup Messages -

The popup window with System Information messages usually
confirms a critical operator request or provides system status.
1-38 906-2020-501
®
Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece

HANDPIECES AND PROBES
The Intraocular Scissors Handpiece is used for cutting
vitreous and tissue. Pneumatic power to drive the scissors
Different handpieces and probes are required for each
is provided through tubing which is attached to the
operating mode of the Accurus®. Following is a
barbed shaft. Scissors tips come in a single use
representative selection of handpieces and probes with a
configuration, and are screwed into the IOS handpiece.
general description of each.
The scissors adjustment is used to increase or decrease
the opening of the scissors blades. Additionally, it can be
Vitrectomy Probes
used to manually close the scissors in the event of air
The InnoVit® probe is a high-speed, cross-action (or
pressure and/or electrical power failure.
radial) guillotine vitreous cutter with an ergonomically
designed probe handle. The Accurus® probe is an axial Scissors Tip IOS Handpiece
oscillating guillotine vitreous cutter. Both probes are are
designed for a single use and must be properly disposed
of when the surgery is completed.
Figure 1-58 Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece
Diathermy/Coagulation Handpieces
®
Figure 1-55. InnoVit Probe Single use Bipolar Coagulation Brushes are available in a
wide variety of configurations: straight, curved, 20-
gauge, 23-gauge, tapered, and widestroke. All single use
bipolar accessories are available with and without cables.
® Also available are reusable and single-use bipolar cables.
Bipolar Coagulation Forceps are lightweight and

ergonomically designed to reduce hand fatigue, as well as
Figure 1-56. Accurus® Probe
to provide precise control and safety. They are available
Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece in high-conductive non-stick alloy, titanium, or single-
The Accurus® Fragmatome® handpiece is configured to use configurations. They are also available with a wide
provide simultaneous vacuum and fragmentation, or variety of tip styles.
vacuum only, depending upon the console setup. The
®
handpiece has a stainless steel shell for improved

reliability and durability. Other than attaching and
removing the needle and aspiration line, no assembly or Figure 1-59. Single Use Bipolar Coagulation Brush
disassembly is required.
ALCON
Figure 1-57. Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece
Figure 1-60. 4 Inch Nadler Coadaptation Forceps
906-2020-501 1-39
®
Accurus® Phaco (U/S) Handpiece

PAKS
The ultrasonic (U/S) handpiece integrates irrigation,
aspiration, and emulsification into one tool. These three
Paks are sterilized single use packages of consumables.
functions of the U/S mode enable the surgeon to
simultaneously irrigate the anterior chamber, emulsify
• Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak - contains essential
the cataractous lens, and aspirate the lens material from
components for vitrectomy (see Figure 1-63):
the eye. The handpiece is used in conjunction with
tubing, an infusion sleeve, an ultrasonic decoupling
• Viscous Fluid Injection Pak - used in conjunction
sleeve (UDS), and ultrasonic tip.
with the VFC function of the Accurus®. It eases the
task of injecting viscous fluids into the eye. It
CAUTION contains:
Following autoclaving, ensure handpiece is at room - syringe
temperature. Never immerse handpiece in water or - cannula
other fluid to cool it as it will cause serious damage to - pneumatic tubing and ancillary components
the handpiece. Allow it to air cool.
• Pneumatic Scissors Tubing Pak - used to connect
IRRIGATION SLEEVE BUBBLE SUPPRESSION INSERT the pneumatic scissors to the console. It contains:
- a tube
®
- a connector
• Frag Accessory Pak - contains the Frag needle

and other components necessary for lensectomy.
Figure 1-61. Accurus® Phaco Handpiece
Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece
The Irrigation/Aspiration (I/A) handpiece, connected to
the Accurus with I/A tubing, is used to remove cortical
material via aspiration while maintaining chamber
pressure with irrigation.
IRRIGATION SLEEVE
A
Figure 1-62. Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece
1-40 906-2020-501
®
Instrument Directions
Drape V-Lance For Use
Stopcock
Cassette
with Drain
Bag
Accurus®
Probe with
Vacuum and
Actuation
Lines
20cc Utility Fiber Infusion Infusion Canula, Scleral Plugs,

Syringe Vacuum Optic Line with Cassette Plugs, Handpiece
Line Illuminator Spike Adapters
Probe
Figure 1-63. Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak
906-2020-501 1-41
®
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
1-42 906-2020-501
®
SECTION TWO
THEORY OF OPERATION
INTRODUCTION The Air/Fluid, Front Panel, LPA/Illuminator, and U/S-
Figure 2-1 illustrates the Accurus® system in block Diathermy modules contain their own microcontrollers
diagram form. Each block is covered in detail on the and software that acquire real-time data critical to
page indicated within the block. system operation (see Controller PCB Kernel on page
2-11). Each of these modules is a slave to the Host
The Host Module is the system master and is controlled Module.
by real-time, event driven, preemptive, and finite state
system software. Intermodule connections are made
through the Power/Signal Distribution PCB which is
mounted to the top of this module.
Pneumatic
Power
(90-120 psi) Line Input
(110/115/230 VAC)
Power
Cassette Port ID Supply
and Backlight (see page 2-2)
Cassette Vacuum Air/Fluid
Cassette Pinch/Hammer Module
kernal power
P.S. status
P.S. control
LPA pump power (115VAC)
(see page 2-13) System Lamp 1
Cassette Latch/Unload +12V illuminator power (+17V)
LPA/Illum
Cassette Pump Fan P.S. control Module Lamp 2
VFI (pressure/vacuum) (see page 2-24)
Scissors Drive kernal power kernal power
(proportional/pulsed) Low Pressure Air
kernal signal kernal signal
Vit-1,2 (GFX, VGFI)
Auto Stopcock
Drive (future)
LCD signal Host

Graphics Module
LCD power
LCD keyboard
(see page 2-4)
(diagnostics) U/S-diathermy power (+85V)
Diathermy
X,Y-Position kernal power kernal power U/S-Diath U/S-1 Drive

(touch screen) kernal signal kernal signal Module (frag/phaco)
Up/Down Arrows
remote serial (future) (see page 2-31) U/S-2 Drive
(pushbutton) (frag/phaco)
Eject (pushbutton) Sound

Front Panel
Module
(see page 2-37) Stand-By
IV Pole (future)
(Power Switch)
Footswitch (misc.) PCMCIA Interface (future)
"000" - "999" globals (5x)
RS-232/422 (future)
Cassette, Handpiece,
IR Remote and Misc. Indication
(future) (eject, asp, pneu, elec)
Figure 2-1
System Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-1
®
POWER SUPPLY
24 VDC to 12 VDC Supply
POWER SUPPLY A 100 watt, 24 VDC to 12 VDC converter (PS2) is used
to generate 12 VDC at 5.5 amps for the Accurus LCD
The Accurus® Power Supply consists of the AC Entry backlighting and relays. The noise specification for this
Module, a DC Power Supply, and the LPAS/Standby output is 120 mV peak-to-peak maximum at 25 MHz
Power PCB. bandwidth. The 24 VDC enters at E9 and E10.
The primary purpose of the LPAS/Standby Power PCB is 85 VDC Supply

to provide 115 VAC power output (J4) to the Low The 85 VDC for the system is created on the LPAS/
Pressure Air Source (LPAS). The LPAS pump AC line is Standby Power PCB by electrically adding in series the
protected by AC output fuse (F1). 57 VDC and the 28 VDC supplies from the DC Power
Supply. Diodes are placed across the 57 VDC and 28
The LPAS/Standby Power PCB provides 12 VDC VDC supplies to prevent start-up problems. Extra filter
standby power via the AC/DC Converter to re-activate capacitors (C8 and C9) are placed across the 85 VDC to
the DC Power Supply when it is in shutdown mode. It help provide the additional 12 amp spike current required
also provides all interconnections between the DC Power when activating diathermy and tuning of the ultrasonic
Supply and Accurus power cable assemblies. All DC handpiece.
Power Supply voltage outputs become inputs to the
LPAS/Standby Power PCB via terminal lugs soldered Power Fail
into the PCB. These power supply lines are routed to The PWRFAIL signal is an input from the DC Power
output connectors J1, J2, and J3. The DC/DC converter Supply which is pulled up to 5 VDC and routed to the
mounted on the PCB is used to convert the 24 VDC system via J2-24. This line will go low if the DC Power
output from the DC Power Supply to 12 VDC. This Supply detects an AC line failure.
voltage is delivered to the system via J1.
Five Volts Good
Supply Voltages The 5VGOOD signal is an input from the DC Power
115 VAC Nominal: This input voltage is supplied from Supply at J8-3 that is routed to the system via output
the toroidal transformer which is part of the AC Entry connector J2-12. It remains high as long as the 5 volts is
Module Assembly. good.
AC/DC Converter Five Volts Enable

The 115 VAC input to the LPAS/Standby Power PCB The 5VENABLE signal is from the DC Power Supply 5
connects directly to an Astrodyne MSMA-5002 power VDC output and fed back to the DC Power Supply to
supply which is used to provide a 12 VDC “keep alive” keep the 5 VDC permanently enabled.
power source when the DC Power Supply is shut down.
This output does not provide the 12 VDC to the Accurus Other DC Voltages
solenoids and relays. The 115 VAC also goes directly to The 5 V, +15 V, -15V, and 24V are inputs at E13, E2,
J4 through a 0.5A fuse to supply AC power for the low E3, and E9 respectively. They are routed directly to
pressure air source pump. output connector J2.
The PS_SHDN line (J2-11) comes from the Accurus

Standby switch on the front panel. When the Standby
switch is open, this line is high which turns on Ql and
keeps the PINHIBIT line to the DC Power Supply low.
When the Standby switch is closed, the PINHIBIT output
line goes high and the DC Power Supply is inhibited.
2-2 906-2020-501
®
POWER SUPPLY
LPAS/Standby
Power PCB
Toroid
AC Entry F1
Module Line
Voltage LPA Pump Power (115VAC)
Select
Main
Power AC/DC
Line Switch Converter
Filter
Line Input 12V
(110/115/230 VAC) PINHIBIT
Misc. Logic, P.S. Control (shutdown)
PWRFAIL Buffers, etc. P.S.Status (line, 5V out)
5V
+5V
±15V
DC Power +24V Kernal
Supply Power
(auto-ranging) DC/DC +12V

Converter
Illuminator Power (+17V)
+28V +
-28V + U/S-Diathermy
+57V Power (+85V)
-57V -
Figure 2-2
Power Supply Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-3
®
HOST COMPUTER
HOST COMPUTER
The Host Computer Module consists of the Host • Software (CPU BIOS and Video driver BIOS)
Computer and the serial Expansion PCB (future). The • Card Cage and ISA Backplane
Host Computer is a PC compatible computer system. It is • CPU PCB
the system command and monitoring center for the • LCD Controller PCB
Accurus Console. • PC Card Controller PCB
• Serial I/O PCB
The Host Computer is based on PC/AT architecture and • Special I/O PCB
supports a 16 bit EXM bus. The Host Computer has the • Sound PCB
following individual PCBs and cables: • Power/Signal Distribution PCB
Air/Fluid U/S Diathermy LPA/Illuminator Front Panel

Module #1 Module #2 Module #3 Module #4
Kernel Power
Kernel Signal
Kernel Power
Kernel Power
Kernel Power
Kernel Signal
Kernel Signal
Kernel Signal
Kernel Power Footswitch

Stand-by (power switch) (misc)
Power/Signal Distribution PCB
P.S. Status IV Pole
P.S. Control POST Code (future)
(00-FF)
PCMCIA Power
Kernel Power
System
P.S. Control
Footswitch
P.S. Status
+12V
SVREQ1:4
MODRX1:4
(+5V, +12V, ±15V, +24V)

MODTX1:4
Stand-by
XRST1:4
PDLUP
IVPole
Fan
Serial
Expansion RS-232/422
PCB (future) (future)
PC Card
PCMCIA
Drive Special I/O PCB Serial I/O
PCB
Keyboard
(diagnostics)
EXM Bus CPU PCB
Remote Serial
(future)
Disk/IDE Sound PCB LCD

Controller (tones, Controller LCD Signal
Mounted outside
PCB phrases) PCB
of Host Module
Figure 2-3
Host System Block Diagram
2-4 906-2020-501
®
HOST COMPUTER
POWER/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PCB The CPU BIOS allows the LCD display to show the
Power/Signal Distribution PCB (PSDB) is attached to the ALCON banner at power on before the operating system
top of the Host Computer and provides power and control is loaded. All normal PC messages displayed during the
signals to modules in the Accurus® Console. The PSDB boot process are suppressed.
accepts DC power from the system power supply and
distributes it to all modules through individual cables. All PCB addressing is controlled in CPU PCB firmware.
Signal distribution is accomplished by combining the Hardware setup locations are defined in firmware such
specific serial communication lines with the system’s that they can be revised with Alcon software upgrades.
status/control lines and distributing these signals to the
modules CPU PCB
The CPU PCB (EPC-26A) is a PC/AT compatible
The PSDB provides the following power and signal computer with 50 MHz Intel 486 DX2 on board. It has
interfaces: the following features:
1 PC/AT compatible keyboard interface, reset button
The system power supply output is connected to the and run LED
PSDB which distributes power to the Host Computer, the 2 One RS232 9-pin serial port (COM1) and one RJ45
individual modules, the footswitch, the power IV pole, serial port (COM2)
and the system fan. 3 Flashable Phoenix BIOS with ALCON configuration
4 Watchdog timer
RS422 serial communication signals (from the Host 5 512 Kbytes of battery backed-up SRAM
Computer’s Serial I/O PCBs) and reset & service request 6 4 Mbytes of DRAM expandable to 16 Mbytes
signals (from the Special I/O PCB) are combined with 7 4 MB flash memory for executing Accurus system
the footswitch PEDALUP signal and distributed to the software
modules and to the Serial Expansion PCB.
LCD Controller PCB
Footswitch interface signals are provided to/from the This PCB provides video signals to the color LCD
Footswitch and the Special I/O PCB. Display with 256 colors. The signals include all data and
control signals as well as the +5 volts and the +12 volts
Front power switch interface signals are distributed to the power.
power supply and the Special I/O PCB. Power Supply
logic monitoring signals are connected to/from the Power There is a specific power up sequence control circuit on
Supply and the Special I/O PCB. the PCB to ensure the +5 volts, +12 volts and the data/
control signals meet the LCD power up requirements.
In addition to the connections described above, the PCB
contains a test header, expansion headers, spare power Serial I/O PCB
and signal connectors, power supply indicator LED’s, There are two serial communication PCBs in the Host
and a two digit display indicating Host Computer BIOS Computer Module. Currently only one PCB is used while
POST codes. the other is for future expansion. The serial ports are
accessed via an 80-pin cable connected to the Power
Structure Signal Distribution PCB. A Serial I/O PCB provides 8
The PSDB mounts to the top of the Computer System communication channels. All serial channels conform to
card cage and is the distribution point of all power and the RS-422 specification.
control signals of the Accurus® system. It is the point
where all grounds are tied together. The PCB is designed Each port on the Serial PCB is an 16550 Universal
with a solid ground layer and +5v layer. Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) compatible,
and is controlled independently from the others. The data
Software transfer speed is set at 38.4K baud.
The CPU BIOS in the host computer allows the
Accurus® system to boot from the on board Flash IDE Controller PCB
memory or a PC Card. The system accepts removable storage media in the form
of a PC Card. The IDE Controller PCB provides disk
controller capability for the Accurus System. The
Accurus system supports booting from PC Flash Cards.
906-2020-501 2-5
®
HOST COMPUTER
All the controls to this PCB are from the Host computer
SPECIAL I/O PCB
(CPU PCB) via the EXM bus. All operations between the
CPU PCB and this Special I/O PCB are accessed by the
The Special I/O PCB provides the following functions:
I/O read and I/O write operation. The Special I/O PCB
generates IRQ signals to request interrupts from the CPU
• Footswitch Control
PCB.
• Power I.V. Pole Control Logic
• System Control Register
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• System Status Register
• Module Service Request Control
Address Decoding
• Module Reset Control
• Host Module Voltage Monitoring
The Special I/O PCB occupies 32 bytes in the CPU’s I/O
• Power Supply Monitoring
address space. It uses a flat address scheme where each
• Stand-by Power Control
device has its own distinct I/O address. The address
• Watchdog Timekeeper
decoding is all done by the Main PLD (U18).
• Interface to the Power/Signal Distribution PCB
Voltage Monitoring
The majority of the logic on the PCB is implemented in a
large, one-time Programmable Logic Device (PLD). The
The Special I/O PCB provides the voltage monitoring
watchdog circuit is implemented in a separate device
function for the entire Accurus® console. All system
independent of the main PLD. This device has the ability
power supply voltages are monitored by the Special I/O
to perform all the necessary logic and is not SRAM
PCB except the +85V, +17V and the 115VAC which go
based. All signals going to and from the Power Signal
directly to the specific module from the system power
Distribution PCB go through an 80-pin connector.
supply. The system software can read the values of all
monitored voltages and make operational decisions. The
The one critical signal, footpedal up, is implemented in
Special I/O PCB does not automatically notify the system
separate circuits (i.e. not in the PLD).
when these voltages deviate. Voltage monitoring of these
signals is the responsibility of the software.
Module Revision
Switches
SD0-SD7 Module Resets
Module Reset
Address Decoder
SA0-SA10,15
Module Service Module Service Request
Main PLD
Request
Buffer
Power Signal Distribution PCB
IOR* Voltages
ADC
IOW*
EXM BUS
ATRESET* Footswitch
Control
AEN
EXMID IV Pole
Control
System Power
Control
IOCHK*
Watchdog System Status
IRQ11 POST Code POST Code Display
Display
IRQ12 System Unlock
Control Function
IRQ15
Figure 2-4
Special I/O PCB Block Diagram
2-6 906-2020-501
®
HOST COMPUTER
Footswitch Control CIRCUIT DESIGNS

The Special I/O PCB controls the footswitch. It registers
the switch status from the footswitch, controls the torque PCB Configuration
motor for treadle detent, reads the revision of the Configuration of the Special I/O PCB is similar to all
footswitch, and registers the footswitch treadle position. RadiSys EXM products. It communicates to the CPU via
the EXM bus. An 80 pin header on the front panel of the
IV Pole Control (for future use) PCB connects the module signals to and from the Power
The Special I/O PCB supports the I2C bus to control the Signal Distribution PCB.
IV pole. It also provides a reset signal to the IV pole. The
communication to the IV pole is the I2C bus. The Module Reset
conversion between the EXM bus and the I2C bus is the There are 16 individual reset signals output from the
PLD and the I2C controller chip (U7). Special I/O PCB. These are available to control up to 16
modules. The reset signals are active low, and controlled
Lock/Unlock Function by the RESET Control Registers.
The Lock function on the Special I/O PCB is activated
upon a system reset. The Lock hardware prevents a NMI All modules will be placed in reset state in the event of
(non-maskable-interrupt) generated by the watchdog an NMI which is generated by the watchdog timer or
timer or the power supply status. It also holds system system power failure.
signals in a safe state until initialization is complete. The
Unlock function enables generation of a NMI and allows Interrupts
all system signals to function normally. The Lock and There are 16 interrupt service request lines input to the
Unlock logics are all embedded in the Main PLD. The Special I/O PCB from console modules via the Power
lock signal also goes to the watchdog PLD. Signal Distribution PCB. The 16 interrupt signals are
monitored and controlled by U9 and U10. All service
Watchdog Timer request signals are RC filtered to prevent inadvertent
The Watchdog Timer on the Special I/O PCB is used to trigger of IRQ due to noise glitch.
monitor the system for an unstable state in which case it
will shut down the system. Software must strobe the The Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI) signal is issued to the
Watchdog Timer at least every 200ms during normal CPU by way of IOCHK* in the event of a watchdog
operation. If software fails to do this, the watchdog timer timer interrupt, power good fails, or AC fault occurs. All
will expire and generate an NMI (non-maskable- module reset signals are activated in the event of a NMI.
interrupt). A NMI is not sent when LOCK is active.
ADC (Analog-to-Digital Converter)
The watchdog function is provided by the watchdog PLD The Special I/O PCB contains two 8-bit ADCs: the
(U19). The design of the watchdog PLD also considers Footswitch ADC (U17) and the System ADC (U16). The
the initialization of the console system and the validation analog input to the Footswitch ADC represents the
of the watchdog function during initial power up. footswitch revision. The analog inputs to the System
ADC are power supply voltage monitoring signals,
Module Verification footswitch solenoid feedback voltages, and DAC output
The Special I/O PCB uses two rotary switches for monitoring signal.
module revision control. The value of these two switches
is read by the system software and used to verify that the
software and hardware in the Accurus® system are
compatible.
POST Code Display

During console power up, the CPU BIOS sends out
Power On Self Test (POST) codes to address 80hex. The
Special I/O PCB provides decoding circuit for the POST
codes. It also provides drivers to display the POST
information on the Power Signal Distribution PCB.
906-2020-501 2-7
®
HOST COMPUTER
Footswitch Control The relay on the Special I/O PCB and the stand-by switch
All switch signals from the footswitch input are pulled up on the front panel of the Accurus system are in series
with a 1.0K resistor to +5 volt. If a switch signal is with each other. Both must be closed to shut down the
shorted to ground through a 1.0 K resistor, the footswitch system power supply. If either one is open the system
status register will not read that switch as being activated. power supply turns on. When the system power comes up
for the first time, SHDN_ACK* is activated and the relay
The Footswitch Position Counter is a 16-bit quadrature is in the de-energized position. If the standby switch is
counter implemented in U13. The two quadrature input open, the power supply will be on; if the standby switch
signals to the counter are generated by a Two Channel is closed, the power supply will not stay on. After the
Optical Encoder in the footswitch assembly. These two software command to energize the relay, SHDN_ACK*
signals are directly fed to the counter. The footswitch is floating. When the SHDN_REQ* signal is active,
reset signal will clear the content of the counter. which means the standby switch is closed, and is detected
through the status register, software can shut the system
A digital to analog converter (U12) is used to produce a down by activating the SHDN_ACK* signal.
voltage from 0 to 2.5 volts. The Special I/O PCB uses
this voltage to control the footswitch detent torque level. During power up:
1 If the standby switch is closed, the status of the
System Power Control system power supply is controlled by the relay.
The Power Signal Distribution PCB sends two power 2 If the relay is energized, the SHUTDOWN is high
supply status signals to the Special I/O PCB by way of impedance and the system power supply will remain
the front connector. The PWR_GOOD signal indicates ON.
that the system power supply is in the operating range. 3 If the relay is not energized, the SHUTDOWN is tied
The ACFAULT* signal indicates that the AC input to the to ground and the system power supply will remain
system power supply is faulty. If either of these signals OFF.
indicate a problem, an NMI signal is sent to the CPU and 4 If the standby switch is open, the system power
all module reset signals become active. supply will remain ON.
IV Pole Control
Standby The IV pole is controlled by the Special I/O PCB via the
Relay Power I2C bus. There is a separate reset line to the IV pole, and
Energized Shut Down Ack* Switch
(Special I/O an IV pole service request signal from the IV pole.
Board)
POST Code Display

De-Energized
Power Supply
The Special I/O PCB monitors the EXM bus for Power
Shut Down On Self Test (POST) diagnostic codes. These diagnostic
(to Power Supply)
codes are displayed on two single-digit LED displays on
+5V
the Power/Signal Distribution PCB. When the system
Shut Down request
(Special I/O Board) fails to boot, the 2-digit display will show which section
of the BIOS failed. The Special I/O PCB also provides
the LED_BLANK signal to the LEDs. When this signal
is activated, the LEDs will be blank. The LEDs are
Figure 2-5 directly driven by the main PLD.
System Power Control on Special I/O PCB
2-8 906-2020-501
®
HOST COMPUTER
The Sound PCB has 3 watts amplified audio output, and

SOUND PCB is capable of driving an 8 ohm speaker. The console
speaker is located at the lower front panel. A speaker
NOTE: Voice confirmation is not applicable to all status monitor bit is provided to the Host software. A
models. voice phrase buffer allows the software to load several
The Sound PCB (EXM-40) is a custom Voice and Tone phrases into a first-in-first-out (FIFO) memory allowing
Generator designed for the Accurus® system to provide phrases to be built and executed without the attention of
simultaneous voice and tone capability. the Host software.
The Sound PCB is configured in and compatible with the Doctor's Memory Settings (400VSE and 600DS only)
Radisys EXM bus. The Sound PCB has an 8 bit bus The doctor’s memory settings are stored on the CPU and
width. All control signals are received from the CPU are backed up on the Sound PCB. While the system is
PCB via the EXM bus. There are 4 megabytes of flash booting up, it looks to the CPU for doctor’s memory
memory serving as the voice confirmation memory on settings. If the CPU does not contain the settings, the
the Sound PCB. The system software can program and system looks at the back up location on the Sound PCB.
re-program the contents of the voice memory. All If there are doctor’s memory settings on the Sound PCB,
operations between the CPU PCB and the Sound PCB are the system will write them to the CPU. This way the
accessed by memory reads and writes and I/O read and settings are always stored in two locations.
write operations. The Sound PCB occupies 16 bytes of
the CPU I/O space and 4 MB CPU memory address
space. All address decoding is done through the PLD
(U19).
Address Bus
Memory for Flash Memory
Flash Memory Control
Prerecorded Voice Voltage
Control
Data
Address
Speaker
Address Bus Control Control and
EXM Bus
OKI Voice
FIFO Monitoring
Data Synthesizer
Address
Data Bus Decoder
(PLD)
Voice Control
Control Bus Volume Control
System
Tone Control Data Volume Control Volume Power
(attenuation) Amplifier
Voice
Yamaha
Data Series Tone
Tone
Generator
DAC +
Figure 2-6
Sound PCB Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-9
®
HOST COMPUTER
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS Tone Generation

Tone Generation on the EXM-40 is controlled by a
I/O Address Decoding Yamaha YM3812. The YM3812 is capable of
The EXM-40 occupies 16 bytes in the CPU I/O address simultaneously producing 9 sounds, or 6 melody and 5
space, as well as 4 megabytes in the CPU memory rhythm sounds. The output of this chip is digital and is
address space. sent to the YM3014 Digital to Analog Converter.
EXM Bus Interface Volume Control

All EXM bus address lines are buffered before they are The volume of the mixed voice and tone output signal is
used on the PCB. This is done to keep the signals isolated controlled by the voltage output of a Digital To Analog
from the EXM bus and to keep the signals relatively Converter (DAC).
clean.
Unlock Function
Speech Synthesis The Lock hardware on the EXM-40 is activated upon a
Speech Synthesis on the EXM-40 is controlled by an system reset. The Lock hardware prevents any sound
OKI Semiconductor MSM6376. This is a 4-bit ADPCM output until the Host System software fully initializes the
speech synthesizer. The different phrases of voice are FM tone generator, Voice Synthesizer, and volume
pre-recorded, digitized, and stored in the onboard flash. control registers.
The OKI chip can support up to 111 different phrases,
and has up to 2 megabytes of memory. It can also
generate 7 different beep tones. The Host Computer
System software can request a particular phrase or beep
to be executed. Once the OKI chip receives the request, it
accesses the appropriate memory and executes the
corresponding sound.
2-10 906-2020-501
®
CONTROLLER PCB KERNEL
which is combined. Green SMT LEDs are provided for

visual indication of these signals. As some Controller
PCBs do not utilize all supply voltages, some of the
The Accurus® Controller PCB Kernel consists primarily
detectors/LEDs may be absent.
of the Intel® 80C196KC20 8/16-bit microcontroller and a
collection of 8-bit data bus peripheral devices. Together,
To support the supply voltage window detectors and
these form the core resources required for execution of
other analog functions (such as ADC, DAC, etc.), various
module software and support the common functionality
reference voltages have been developed. In general,
required of the Accurus® modules. These functions
Controller PCBs have at least two independently
include the following:
generated precision references, REF500 and REF100
(5.00 and 10.00V). Other references are generally derived
• Watchdog and related circuitry to disable critical
from one of these sources using op-amps and 1%
hardware on code failure.
resistors (or better). REF500 and REF100 are generated
• Numerous digital inputs and outputs (with read-back),
by separate devices to assist in redundancy checking.
as required.
Both devices are supplied from the analog +15V supply.
• 8 x 8-bit D/A-converted outputs (range 0-5 or 0-10V).
A drop in this supply will be detected by either the +15V
• 8 x 10-bit A/D-converted inputs (range 0-5V).
window detector or comparison between the two
• Monitor/indicator/fault detector to ensure proper supply
references.
voltages.
• Provision for “downloadable” code (future).
Memory and I/O Mapping
• Provision for non-volatile storage of module specific
Consistent with Intel® architecture, I/O is memory-
calibration, data, etc.
mapped in the Kernel. The 16-bit address bus of the
• Flexible, programmable logic (for memory and I/O
80C196KC will access up to 64kB address space, which
mapping also).
currently is partitioned as 54kB EPROM (code, constant
• 38.4 K baud, RS-422 dual-simplex serial
data, etc.), 8KB RAM (variable data, stack, etc.), 1KB
communication to host.
EEPROM (non-volatile data, serial number, calibration,
• Hardwired module-host signal set: PDLUP, XRST,
etc.), 512 bytes of internal microcontroller RAM, and
SVREQ.
512 bytes of I/O.
• Numerous edge/level/priority-selectable interrupts.
The LTC691 microcontroller supervisory IC contains a
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5V supply monitor, which issues an MRST when this
Figure 2-7 shows a block diagram of the Accurus®
supply falls below 4.65V. To cover for the tolerance of
Controller PCB Kernel. In general, circuitry shown is
this device, voltage drops in the module power cable, and
common to all four Accurus® Controller PCBs. Any
variability in the system power supply, the 5V supply is
“kernel” circuitry or components not on all four PCBs
nominally set to 5.10V.
has been omitted here and will be discussed in the
respective Controller PCB theory of operation.
Other Kernel Features
Exceptions to this are discussed at the end of this section.
Some devices and circuits associated with the kernel may
not be required by all four Controller PCBs, or may not
80C196KC Microcontroller
perform one of the “functions” identified in Figure 2-7.
An Intel® 80C196KC20 20Mhz general purpose 8/16-bit
Examples include: kernel power and signal cable
microcontroller (uC) forms the basis of the Kernel.
connector physical properties, wire gauges and pinout,
use of sockets for various ICs, and override jumpers.
Supply Monitors and Reference Voltages
To ensure proper voltage levels are present on the
Controller PCB, various “window” detector circuitry has
been applied to the +15V, -15V, +12V, and +24V
supplies. In general, each supply is monitored for
compliance within +/-10% of nominal, and status is
provided to the microcontroller for each individual
supply with the exception of +15V and -15V status,
906-2020-501 2-11
®
INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Input and Output Signal Protection

Although the signal cable between host and module does
Input Signal Filtering not pass outside the Accurus® console, all signals in this
Signals PDLUP and XRST have been filtered to prevent cable have been protected against ESD and over/under
inadvertent response to “glitches” picked up in the signal voltage (0V/5V). To reduce EMI, each signal has also
cable between host and module. been shorted to ground through a 1000pF capacitor,
placed nearest the signal connector on the Controller
PCB.
PDLUP Filter and PDLUPF (a/r)

Override ZRSTnF
XRSTn
AD0:7
SVREQn
A8:15 A0:15 PIO PGMEN
1,2,3
AD0:7 LRST
Address AO:7
5VOK
ALE Latch (green)
Interrupts
(a/r) KEYDTA
Module Watchdog
RD Revision KEYCLK and 5V WDOG
(to all blocks (00-99) (red)
WR on data bus) WDSTB Monitor
ENFLG PIO WDPOR
0 MRST Status
V150K (green)
SRST
V120K
20MHz V240K Status
UCRST (green)
UCRST
150K
80C196KC (green)
Supply 1kB
Micro- +15V 12VOK EEPROM
controller Monitors
-15V (green)
and
+12V Reference 24VOK
+24V Voltages (green) 8kB
RAM
REF500 REF500
(5.00V) (5.00V)
10-bit A/D
Inputs, 0-5V 48kB
+24V Flash PRGV(12V)
(a/r) Flash
PGMEN Vpp Gen
M13:17 64kB
WAIT
A0:15 EPROM
PGSEL0:3
Address
FLSHEN Decoder ROM, RAM enables
PIO enables
other I/0 enables
MODTXn RS-422
MODRXn Buffer
Figure 2-7
Controller Kernel Block Diagram
2-12 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Receiver Mechanism Assembly

AIR/FLUID MODULE
The Receiver Mechanism (RM) Assembly consists of a
bezel, air cylinders, latch, pinchers and hammers, roller
The Air/Fluid Module (AFM) generates all high-pressure
pump motor with hub, and RM PCB. Together, these
based pneumatic signals for the Accurus® console, and
components provide the sense and control interface to the
consists of three printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies
cassette. The latch pulls the cassette into the mechanism
and four major mechanical subassemblies, three of which
and holds it in place against the forces exerted by the
contain pneumatic manifolds. Together, these
pinchers and hammers, and with the vacuum grommet
components perform all the functions necessary to
forms the vacuum seal. The roller pump is driven by a
support the generation of proportional vacuum,
stepper motor, which runs at two speeds/torques and in
proportional pressure, pulsed pressure, cassette sensing,
either direction as required to pump or load/unload the
and cassette manipulation as required to control flow,
pump tubing.
generate continuous and pulsed reflux, and move fluid
from the cassette vacuum chamber to the waste bag. A
The Receiver Mechanism PCB interfaces the electrical
brief description of each of the seven AFM components
signals of the Air/Fluid Controller PCB to optical and
follows.
mechanical effects on the RM Assembly, including:
sensing motor home position, sensing extended/retracted
Air/Fluid Controller PCB
position of the irrigation and continuous reflux pinchers,
The Air/Fluid Controller (AFC) PCB contains most of
sensing cassette fluid level, sensing cassette ID tabs, and
the AFM electronics. This includes 80C196KC
providing cassette vacuum chamber backlighting and
microcontroller (µC) kernel, supply voltage switches and
aspiration port indication. For improved noise immunity,
monitors, valve and motor drive, proportional vacuum
all signals in the AFC/RM interface cable are at 0-5V
and pressure analog control, timers and logic for pulsed
logic level.
pressure control, drivers for IR LEDs used for cassette
fluid level sense and cassette ID, and all A/D and D/A
converters as required to support all analog-digital
interfacing requirements.
Pneumatic
Power
Air Source
(90-120psi) Assembly
main valve ctl
85psi supply
Cassette Pinch/Hammer
Cassette Latch/Unload
VFI (pressure/vacuum)
Mfld and RM
Receiver
Scissors Drive Pneumatic VFI (pressure/vacuum) Pressure/Vacuum Valve Mechanism Cassette Pump
(pulsed/proportional) Connector proportional scissors Manifold cylinder drive

Assembly
Cassette Vacuum
Vit-1,2 Drive Assembly 57psi supply Assembly cassette vacuum Cassette, Port ID,
and Backlight
CID/LS LED drive
port ID LED drive

RMV1/7 sense
pulsed valve ctl
bklt LED drive

mfld valve ctl
RM valve ctl
motor home
xdcr signals
motor drive
ref voltages
CID sense
LS sense
Pulsed
PV drive
RMREF
Valve
Status
Kernel Signal
Kernel Power
5VOK Reset Watchdog General

12VOK Status Module Revision
15VOK (00-99: future)
24VOK
Figure 2-8
Air/Fluid Module Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-13
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Air Source Manifold Assembly Pneumatic Connector Assembly

The Air Source Manifold Assembly interfaces the The Pneumatic Connector Assembly consists of an
customer air source to the AFM, which is the only aluminum manifold and all other components needed for
module using the high pressure air. The Low Pressure Air the pulsed pressure source (PPS) used to drive the
Source is the only other pneumatic module, and it uses an vitrectomy probes and scissors handpiece. Six pneumatic
electric air pump to generate room air at 7 psi. At the connections are presented to the user at the face of this
input to the Air Source Manifold Assembly, a standard assembly: two for vit probe, one for scissors, one for
hospital type pneumatic connector provides for viscous fluid inject/extract, one for low pressure air for
connection of nominal 90-120 psi compressed air or Vented Gas Forced Infusion "VGFI®" or gas/fluid
nitrogen. An initial pop-off valve protects the regulator exchange (GFX), and one spare (provisional - for
from excessive supply pressure, then a second pop-off automatic stopcock). The primary purpose of the
valve protects against exceeding the rating of the main manifold is to provide a volume of 57 psi regulated air
shutoff valve, which is controlled by the AFC to gate the very near the solenoid valves used for generating pulsed
AFM main air supply ON/OFF. pressure drive.
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

The Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (PVM) Assembly Wherever possible, this section describes the operation of
consists of a laminated plastic manifold and all other AFM hardware and software by the function that is
components necessary to provide proportional vacuum evident to the user rather than by component, physical, or
for aspiration and viscous fluid extraction, and logical location, etc. Some features are either common to
proportional pressure for scissors drive and viscous fluid many functions or are best described separately.
injection. Four solenoid valves are located on this
manifold to direct air flow as required in support of the SIGNAL NAMES
functions indicated. A single proportional valve (PV) is The following signal names are used within this section.
used to provide continuous proportional vacuum or The meaning of the signal (abbreviated) name and a brief
pressure control (but not both simultaneously). Pressure description of how the signal is used follows:
regulators provide 57 psi for proportional scissors and MODnTX - RS-422 Transmit Pair, from module "n" to host
pulsed pressure supply and 30 psi for normally-retracted MODnRX - RS-422 Receive Pair, from host to module "n"
Receiver Mechanism pincher drive. SVREQn - Service Request, from module "n" to host
PDLUP - Footpedal up
The Transducer PCB is mounted to this manifold. To XRSTn - External Reset, from host to module "n"
facilitate manufacture and service, this manifold WDOG - Watchdog
disconnects from its pneumatic interfaces by way of LRST- Latch Reset
quick-release pressure fittings and two header “bars”,
which use O-rings to interface to the manifold and barb POWER-UP INITIALIZATION
fittings to interface to the remainder of the AFM. Three When the Accurus® console is first powered up, a series
blue pneumatic test point pressure fittings allow checks of checks are executed at both host and module level
on the 30, 57, and 85 psi supplies, and reseal before any visible activity takes place in the AFM.
automatically when the (6mm) test tubing is removed. Although some of the actions are common to all modules,
this section primarily focuses on what occurs between
The Transducer PCB contains two vacuum and four host and AFM during the approximately 60-second
pressure transducers and their amplifiers. The resulting initialization sequence.
high-level analog signals allow the AFC to sense four
pneumatic signals in the Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
Assembly: 55 psi and 85 psi regulated supplies,
proportional vacuum, and proportional pressure (the
latter two are sensed redundantly). To eliminate as much
tubing and wiring as possible, the transducers are located
on the PCB, which is directly mounted to the manifold,
with spacers and O-rings used as required to establish the
necessary seals.
2-14 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Accurus® 80C196KC Kernel Signal Set (PLD), the AFC attempts to strobe the WDOG and write
Communication and control from the host to each to secondary PIOs and confirms no success, then inserts
Accurus® module is accomplished via the standardized the proper 14-bit serial watchdog key and a strobe resets
set of Accurus® 80C196KC Kernel signals, which are: the WDOG, LRST is cleared, and secondary PIOs can be
MODnTX - RS-422 pair by which the module serially written. One particular secondary PIO output is
communicates with the host SVREQ2, which is set high at this time.
MODnRX - the complementary RS-422 pair for
communication from host to module Finally, an independent timer is set in the µC and one last
SVREQn - used by the module to indicate a request to strobe is issued to the watchdog PLD, after which the µC
communicate with the host awaits reset by the WDOG. If the WDOG expires before
PDLUP - a real-time and overriding hardwired indication 60 ms or after 70 ms, a flag is set to indicate WDOG test
that the user has requested zero proportional signal failure. Normally, the WDOG expires after 65 ms and
XRSTn - allows the host to reset the module asserts LRST, which in turn clears all secondary PIO
outputs, including SVREQ2. The high-low transition of
Module External Reset During Host Self-Test SVREQ flags an AFM service request to the host.
Consistent with the standard Accurus® Kernel signal set, During this time, LRST locks out a majority of the AFM
each module is assigned a unique XRSTn signal that hardware, but the µC is still able to perform some
allows the host to reset the module and prepare it for internal functions, including the WDOG check and
activation via a properly executed initialization sequence. communication with the host. Only XRST2 can stop the
When a module detects it has experienced a serious fault µC from executing code.
condition, it will lock up in a safe state that can only be
reset via power-on reset (POR) or an XRSTn from the Responding to this service request, the host polls the
host. Likewise, should the host detect an erroneous module for status, to which the module responds with its
condition in the module that has not been otherwise "module ID", along with the status word to indicate the
detected, it can assert the respective XRSTn located on state of various signals within the AFM and the success
the Special I/O PCB octal latch, to individually reset that or failure of the various self-test items, including the
module. Finally, should the host experience a reset, this WDOG time-out test. At this time, the host accounts for
same latch is cleared, which resets all modules each of the four required Accurus® modules. Note that it
simultaneously. is via this approach that the host is able to "find" a
module, independent of which signal connection is made
When the console is first powered up, power is applied to at the host Signal/Power Distribution PCB.
the AFM, but the signal XRST2 holds the AFM in the
reset state until the host has completed its power-up self- Host Watchdog Test and Module "Resume Init"
tests. During this time, the green 12OK, 15OK, and Once all four modules have "reported in", the host tests
24OK LEDs located on the AFC are lit solid, indicating its own watchdog by allowing it to expire. The host
these voltages are all within the required range. A recovers from the subsequent watchdog reset with a flag
flashing green 5OK LED and solidly lit red WDOG LED set to indicate the circumstances of the reset. In this
indicate that the watchdog timer has expired. WDOG is second pass through initialization, the host does not
one of several signals that assert LRST, which resets all repeat its own self-test. Once again, the host releases all
secondary peripheral input/output latches in PIO1-PIO3. XRSTs, and the AFM and other modules repeat their
Primary output latches, located in PIO0, are reset only by initialization and WDOG time-out sequence. In
XRST2 and not LRST. PIO0 does not control any responding to the subsequent SVREQ2 this time, the host
energy-producing outputs, and is used to control the issues a "resume init" command, which instructs the
analog multiplexer, WDOG strobe, status LED, and other AFM to resume its initialization, this time executing into
devices needed early in AFC PCB initialization. routines that cause visible activity (e.g., positioning the
roller hub, retracting the RM cylinders and pinchers,
First Release of XRST, Module Watchdog Test, and etc.).
Module ID
When the host has successfully completed its self-test, it Proportional Valve (PV) "Knee" Voltage Check
writes to the XRST latch to release all modules from the Also during initialization, the PV "knee" voltage is
reset state. Each module then proceeds with its own self- determined by issuing a 10 psi proportional scissors
test, including: ROM checksum, RAM, A/D and D/A setpoint into the blocked scissors output. This is effected
converter checks, reference voltage measurements, etc. by turning pulsed scissors control valve PPV4 fully ON
Before arming the watchdog programmable logic device while Pneumatic Connector manifold main valve PPV1 is
906-2020-501 2-15
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
OFF (refer to pneumatic schematic diagram). The vacuum must exceed 95% of the vacuum check level
purpose of this check is to establish the level of "bias" after 2 seconds. Figure 2-9 shows these various levels vs.
that is applied to the PV to improve the step response elevation.
from zero setpoint. This check is performed whether a
cassette is inserted or not.
800
CASSETTE LOAD AND VACUUM CHECK Atmospheric Limit
Once initialization and knee check are completed, the 700

Max Vac Level
Vac Chk Level
module is ready to accept a cassette - if one has not Minimum to Pass
600
previously been inserted. The roller hub is rotated as
required to position the drain pump tubing hook at the 2 500
o'clock position or to locate the drain pump tubing into
Max Vac (mmHg)

the hook when the cassette is inserted. If a cassette is not 400
already inserted, the latch is lifted and all pinchers and

300
hammers are retracted.
200
Cassette Insertion and Identification
Cassette insertion is detected optically, via intrusion of 100
the cassette ID tabs into the sensing slot on the RM. 0

When the cassette is approximately 0.1 inch from full 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
insertion, the tabs are detected by the RM PCB. With Elevation (ft)
some "debounce" and delays applied, the latch drops to

Figure 2-9
draw in and hold the cassette in position. The cassette
Vacuum vs. Elevation
type is identified by the pattern of the 1-3 tabs present
(posterior, anterior, single-use, re-use, etc.). At the high At sea level, atmospheric pressure is typically 760
torque setting and 40 RPM, the pump is turned one mmHg, although pressure at this or any other elevation
revolution clockwise to load the tubing onto the roller typically will vary by up to +/- 20 mmHg, depending on
hub. weather conditions. Continuing at sea level, the
maximum vacuum would be 600 mmHg and vacuum
Pump-Down of Fluid and Vacuum Check check would be done at 550 mmHg, with 522 mmHg
The pump then continues in the clockwise direction but minimum required to pass. Similarly at 4000 feet,
at 100 RPM and normal torque. Once fluid is detected at atmospheric of 660 mmHg yields 520 mmHg max vac
any of the four level sensing positions, a cassette vacuum and 470 vac check, with 446 mmHg to pass.
check is initiated. If no air/fluid transitions are detected
within 20 seconds, the cassette is considered empty - the CASSETTE TUBING MANIPULATION
drain pump times out, and vacuum check is initiated. Both posterior and anterior cassettes have an arrangement
This approach ensures against a full cassette getting of fluidic tubing leading from the irrigation and/or
vacuum-checked, which would cause ingestion of fluid aspiration ports to the vacuum chamber. This tubing is
into the vacuum generator. made of relatively soft silicone, and by applying various
forces, it is possible to control fluid flow to gate
The primary purpose of the vacuum check is to test for aspiration, irrigation, or to generate reflux pulses. To
air leaks in the cassette, in its tubing, or in the latch achieve the level of force needed to pinch off this tubing
grommet seal to the cassette. Leaks can create bubbles in while also satisfying the need to apply seven such forces
the cassette or impact performance by limiting maximum in a relatively limited space, air cylinder actuation was
vacuum or slowing response time. A secondary benefit the logical choice.
of the vacuum check is to flag problems of the module
itself, such as blocked passageways or leaks in manifolds, Use of 25/85 psi, Normally Extended/Retracted
tubing, gaskets, etc. The "safe state" must be ensured in the absence of
pressurized air, either due to loss of wall air supply or
Vacuum check level depends on geographical elevation, following main air shutoff as a result of a fault condition
and is established at 50 mmHg below the maximum detected by the AFM. To this end, two basic types of air
vacuum attainable by the AFM, which is defined as 140 cylinders were used: normally extended and normally
mmHg below local atmospheric pressure but no more retracted. The normally retracted cylinders were selected
than 600 mmHg. To pass vacuum check, the actual with as small a diameter as practical to ease packaging.
2-16 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
With only frictional forces resisting cylinder plunger ROLLER HUB PUMP AND TUBING LOAD/
retraction, a fairly light return spring could be applied. UNLOAD
As a result, a relatively low actuation pressure could The stepper motor is capable of rotating the roller hub at
likewise be used to extend the normally retracted one of two speeds, at one of two power or torque settings,
cylinders, this was established at 25 psi. The normally and in either direction. With cassette loaded, two of the
extended cylinders have considerably stronger springs in four hub rollers make contact with the cassette drain
order to apply the required force in the absence of air pump tubing at all times. The transfer of fluid between
pressure, and even with their larger diameters and thus, rollers in this tubing results in a flow of approximately
large cross-sectional area of the internal piston, a much 0.5 cc/rev, or 50 cc/min flow rate at pump speed of 100
higher pressure was required, in this case 85 psi. RPM. The hub has a double-featured "hook" shape
which together with the "tubing unloader" pneumatic
Single-Acting vs. Double-Acting plunger combine to both load and unload the cassette
With the exception of the cassette latch, all RM air drain pump tubing. The motor makes complete
cylinders are single-acting, i.e., air is applied to only one revolutions when in the pump mode. With 200 step/rev
side of the piston, and spring force exclusively drives the and a motor "home" position sensor, the idle position and
plunger the other way. any other angular position is accurately achieved.
Pulsed Reflux
A nearly identical "stack" of three plungers has been Higher Torque with 24V Overdrive
allocated to each of the two aspiration ports. With proper The torque when loading is nearly four times that during
sequencing, these top and bottom pinchers and hammer pumping, which is necessary to overcome additional
in the middle can generate small fluid surges in a primed resistive force accompanying the stretch of silicone drain
aspiration line, ending with the abrupt discharge of a pump tubing on and off the roller hub.
uniform volume of "reflux" fluid at the vit probe tip.
Although the control signal timing varies due to differing Idling with Only One Phase
actuation delays of normally extended vs. normally The stepper motor has two center-tapped windings, and
retracted upper pinchers, the sequence of plunger in normal pump operation half of each winding is
movement is essentially the same. energized with 12V in various combinations of polarities
and in a four-step sequence as appropriate to achieve
Continuous Reflux (anterior only) rotation in either direction. When driven with 12V, each
Similar to irrigation ON/OFF by the upper-left pincher, motor winding draws 0.68A for a total power dissipation
continuous reflux is the gating ON/OFF of the continuous of approximately 16W, nearly independent of speed or
reflux pincher, which is the vertically oriented pincher load.
just to the right of the cassette latch. Prior to activating
continuous reflux, the top-right pincher is extended and Motor Home Positioning
others in the stack are retracted. The continuous reflux With each rotation, a magnet embedded into the
pincher is retracted to open the path to the BSS+ bottle periphery of the roller hub passes a Hall-effect sensor
and the lower pincher is extended to block flow into the located on the RM PCB, which communicates the event
cassette vacuum chamber. Similar to pulsed reflux for via an interrupt to the µC. The magnet material is
anterior, a “flush” is effected on the cassette tubing Neodymium, which is very strong. The sensor can detect
segment into the cassette prior to extending the lower the magnet from up to 0.5 inch away, and is unaffected
pincher and retracting the upper, to ensure no infusion of by passing through the aluminum RM bezel. The
air. interrupt is dynamically programmed to detect both rising
and falling edges of the home position sense signal, to
signal the approach and recession of the roller hub to the
"home" position. By splitting the number of steps
between these two events, the precise position where the
magnet is in exact alignment with the sensor is
determined. An advantage to this centering approach is
that positioning is not affected by variations in the
strength and sensitivity of the magnet and sensor. From
"home" position, "load" and "unload" positions are
reached by the appropriate number of motor steps, per
RM geometries.
906-2020-501 2-17
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
PROPORTIONAL VACUUM GENERATION PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE GENERATION

Proportional pressure is generated by the PVM by routing A proportional pressure source (PrPS) is provided to
85 psi regulated air through the PV then into the manifold drive either the scissors or VFI handpiece, and in many
mounted venturi. The vacuum from the venturi is routed ways is very similar to the proportional vacuum
past dual-redundant vacuum transducers then out the generator. However, some significant differences exist
PVM and to the Receiver Mechanism for connection to between pressure and vacuum, as well as between
the cassette. The transducers are located as near to the scissors and VFI.
PVM output as possible and are arranged symmetrically
to ensure readings are not skewed due to passageway PULSED PRESSURE GENERATION
pressure drops during the relatively high flows occurring The pulsed pressure source (PPS) is used to drive the
on rapid vacuum step changes. The PV is a 2-way valve, Accurus® and InnoVit® vitrectomy probes, and the
and acts as the energy source when the venturi is to scissors handpiece in multicut mode. Although these all
create or increase vacuum. When vacuum is to be have different drive pulse requirements, they are all
reduced, the means to dissipate excess vacuum is via the accommodated by the AFM using just one 57 psi supply
venturi exhaust. pressure and variable timing. The PPS outputs are
located on the Pneumatic Connector Assembly (PCA),
Vacuum Transducers and Thermal Drift Cancellation and all three use the same type of solenoid valve for
Absolute transducers with stainless steel sensing surfaces pulsed pressure generation.
are used to sense vacuum.
Vacuum Safety Check Valve

A check valve is located near the transducers which is
generally blocking, but when pressure is applied to the
vacuum path it becomes forward biased much like a
diode in an electrical circuit. In this way, the check valve
protects against fault conditions that might otherwise
allow positive pressure to build in the vacuum generator
(e.g., due to blocked venturi exhaust).
2-18 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Interrupts
AIR/FLUID CONTROLLER PCB The most notable dual-edge interrupt signal is MTHM,
which by +/- edges indicates when the pump motor is
This PCB interfaces electrical signals between the host entering and leaving the home position “dwell” angle
computer, the Receiver Mechanism and Transducer (approximately 20 degrees of motor rotation). By setting
PCBs, and various solenoid valves on the Receiver up for edge triggering first in one direction then the other,
Mechanism Assembly. When complete with the proper the precise center of the dwell angle can be determined
Air/Fluid module code, the following basic functions are with little if any effect from magnet strength or radial
performed by the Air/Fluid Controller PCB: positioning, or from sensitivity of the Hall-effect sensor.
• Communicate command and status between host and Extension of Address/Data Bus
Air/Fluid Module. Address/data bus and read/write control signal routing
• Drive cassette port indication and backlight LEDs. outside of the Kernel is generally avoided to control
• Drive cassette fluid level LEDs and interpret sensor noise, both for susceptibility and emissions. However,
feedback. some bus-interfacing devices beyond the Kernel set have
• Drive cassette ID LEDs and interpret sensor feedback. been utilized in this design, including the 82C54 16-bit
• Control and actuate latch, pinch, hammer, and tubing programmable timers used for pulsed pressure timing and
unloader air cylinders. the 12-bit DAC used for pressure and vacuum setpoint.
• Monitor two selected air cylinder position sensor These devices and the associated signal routing has been
feedback signals (anterior). kept close to the Kernel with additional I/O address
• Control position and provide drive to pump motor. decoding provided as required.
• Interpret signals SP85/SP55 for 85/57psi regulated-
supply pressure status. Kernel A/D Converter
• Configure air/fluid manifold for vacuum/pressure at The A/D Converter is operated in the 10-bit conversion
cassette/scissors/VFI outputs. mode. The Air/Fluid software sets the ADC configuration
• Control proportional pressure, apply safety checks, and register for 1.3µs sample time and 11.2µs conversion
provide status. time. Each ADC “read” actually consists of four separate
• Control proportional vacuum, apply safety checks, and conversions occurring immediately after each other,
provide status. which are then averaged. ADC reads are typically
• Select/control pulsed pressure drive of scissors or executed once every 50ms, and action may be taken
InnoVit/Accurus probes. based on a single read or after a succession of four reads,
to provide some digital filtering of transient faults (e.g.,
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION due to EMC, surge loads, overshoots, etc.).
The block diagram does not distinguish between signals
that interface to circuitry or components off the PCB vs. Eight 0-5V analog inputs are supported by the Kernel
those signals which remain internal. microcontroller ADC and internal analog mux. As
indicated in Figure 2-10, these signals are: proportional
In general, the discussion of logic signals intentionally valve drive voltage sense PVDRS; Receiver Mechanism
excludes mention of sense (i.e., whether active-high or PCB derived voltages REF05B, REF12B, and REF25B;
active-low). Rather, signals are referred to as “asserted” local reference voltage REF250; and 57/85psi pressure
(active, true) or “de-asserted” (inactive, false). However, regulator output sense signals SP55/SP85. Many of these
in areas where sense is part of the discussion, signals have been connected solely for possible use in future
which are active-low are designated by an asterisk, as diagnostic code.
“SIGNAL*.”
Accurus® Controller PCB Kernel

This section describes the Air/Fluid Controller design
only in the areas where it differs or supplements the
features contained in the Kernel as previously described.
906-2020-501 2-19
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
+12V
+24V Supply VMOT
VMT12 Voltage PV12V BKLT BKLT*
VMT24 Switches VSOL P1IND Misc. P1IND*
VSOLEN P2IND LED Drive P2IND*
LTX0:3 LTX0:3*
RMV1S BKLT
RMV7S P1IND
VLVOK P2IND VMOT Stepper
MT0:3*
LSRX0:3 LTX0:3 MT0:3 Motor Drive
CIDRX0:2 VMT12
VMT24
VSOLEN
VACDET MT0:3 VSOL
MTHM MFV1:5 RMV1:9 Solenoid RMV1:9*
RMV1:9 MFV1:5 Valve Drive MFV1:5*
ZERO Controller PPV1:4 PPV1:4*
PPVMSK and
PPQ3 PCB REF011
VCVMSK Fault
Kernel PRVMSK VCVMSK
MOD2RX PRVMSK Detection
PPVMSK VLVOK
MOD2TX PPVMSK
MCTS0:1
PDLUP MCTEN
DACD8:11
XRST2
PDLOVR
SVREQ2 15.6KHZ
MCTS0:1 PPV2:4
REF100 MCTEN Pulsed (one each)
PVDRS REF500 LRST Pressure
REF05B PPVD2:4
REF12B CTR0:1 Valve PPV2:4
REF25B DAC0:1 CTR0:1
REF250
Control
RD RD
SP55 WR WR
SP85 A0:1 A0:1
AD0:7 PPQ3
PRV2
PRV1 Analog DACDTA, DACCLK,
MXSEL0:2 DACLD, DACCL
VACDTL
VAC2 Mux and
WR
VAC1 Scaler DACD8:11
DAC0:1 VPSET
VPSET (10V-5V) "Trim-DAC" VAGC Vacuum
REF10B PVSUP
(8-bit, 4x5V PVLIM
PVDSEL
and VACDTL
and 4x10V) RMREF PVLIM Pressure VACDET
VAGC Control
VAC1 PVDR
PRV2 PVDRS
Reference REF250
REF125 PDLUPF
Voltages REF011 PDLOVR ZERO
Figure 2-10
Air/Fluid Controller PCB Block Diagram
2-20 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
drive signals LTX0:2 are driven one at a time to avoid

RECEIVER MECHANISM PCB crosstalk, and are shared with fluid level sense to reduce
interface signal count.
This PCB interfaces electrical signals between the
Controller PCB and the electromechanical and optical Fluid Level Sensing
components located on the Receiver Mechanism. Aside Signals LSRX0:3 indicate one of four distinct levels in
from the roller pump motor these components are the cassette fluid chamber by applying the physical
primarily performing sense and indication. The basic property of total internal reflection, which occurs when
functions performed by the Receiver Mechanism PCB light strikes the fluid/air interface from below and at an
are as follows: angle from normal in excess of the critical angle of
approximately 50 degrees. At the BSS+ level indicated in
- Sense cassette tabs. the inset, light from LTX1 is interrupted by the fluid/air
- Sense cassette chamber fluid level. interface, while the other light passes through and is
- Detect pump motor at “home” position. detected by LSRX0, LSRX2, and LSRX3.
- Provide cassette backlight illumination.
- Route stepper motor drive signals. Each level sensor is capable of detecting fluid over some
- Provide aspiration port indication. vertical range. There is no assurance against sensor
- Detect pincher actuation. signals overlapping nor is there necessarily coverage over
the full range of fluid level in the cassette chamber. This
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION is due to the wide range of conditions that may be present
Figure 2-11 shows a block diagram of the Accurus® in the chamber, including fluid splashing and high or low
Receiver Mechanism PCB circuitry. This circuitry is meniscus effects. Module software algorithms resolve
essentially comprised of five basic blocks: backlight and this by applying filters and detecting level sense signal
port ID indication, motor home position sensing, cassette transitions. As with cassette ID, LTX0:3 are driven one at
ID sensing, fluid level sensing, and pincher position a time to avoid crosstalk.
sensing (for anterior). Inset boxes show optics in
schematic form. Routing of signals to the stepper motor Pincher Position Sensing
is not shown since no active circuitry is involved in this For anterior, the two select Receiver Mechanism pinchers
function. RMV1 and RMV7 are monitored for proper actuation.
An opaque “flag” is attached to the shafts of RMV1 and
Backlight and Port Indication RMV7 pinchers, and a standard photo-interrupter (slotted
The backlight consists of a single 0.4 inch square green LED/phototransistor pair) detects the motion of this flag.
LED element positioned to light outward from the A delay of approximately 100ms exists between
cassette fluid chamber area. Each aspiration port activation of one of these pinchers and the eventual
indication (left or right) is provided by a single “T-1” actuation detection. Module software continually checks
round green LED positioned just below and in line with for pincher state at appropriate intervals, and applies the
the cassette chamber terminus of each aspiration path. appropriate delay following pincher state transitions.
Simple ON/OFF control is provided.
Motor Home Position Sensing Cassette ID Tabs

To determine position of the pump stepper motor and Mechanical alignment of cassette tabs to the Receiver
provide for run-time diagnostics, a magnet has been Mechanism PCB is not critical. The tab is typically
embedded in the pump hub and a digital hall-effect sensed when approximately 50% of the beam is
sensor is located on the PCB. Once any predetermined deflected, which is essentially when the tab edge is in
position is known, other positions may be established by line with IR path centerline. The tab must be sensed
counting steps. Variations in hall-effect sensitivity and before the cassette is fully inserted, but not before the
magnet strength are rendered insignificant by a dwell- cassette is within reach of the latch.
midpoint calculation performed by the module software.
Cassette ID Tab Sensing

Signals CIDRX0:2 convey the presence of the three clear
cassette ID tabs. Up to seven cassette ID types may be
assigned using the 3-bit binary code of these tabs (at least
one tab must be present to detect cassette insertion). LED
906-2020-501 2-21
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
BKLT* Backlight
LED Motor
Backlight Pinchers
and Roller Hub Home
and MTHM*
Port ID Port 1 Magnet Position
P1IND* Sensors
Indication LED Sensing
Port 2
P2IND*
LED
Pincher RMV1S
Position RMREF
RMREF Sensing RMV7S
LTX0* LSRX0
LTX0* CIDRX0 Fluid
Cassette LTX1* LSRX1
Level
LTX1* ID CIDRX1 LTX2* LSRX2
Sensing
Sensing
LTX2* CIDRX2 LTX3* LSRX3
TAB1 LSRX3
LTX0* CIDRX0 LSRX2
Cassette LTX3*
Cassette
TAB2 LSRX1 Chamber
Tabs LTX1* CIDRX1
LSRX0
LTX2*
BSS+ LTX1*
TAB3
LTX2* CIDRX2 LTX0*
Figure 2-11
Receiver Mechanism PCB Block Diagram
2-22 906-2020-501
®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Dual-Redundant Vacuum Monitor

TRANSDUCER PCB
Signals VAC1 and VAC2 are generated from a 15psi
pressure (vacuum) transducer and amplifier circuit. Two
This PCB interfaces pneumatic and electrical signals
identical circuits are used for bridge excitation and output
between the controller PCB and the pressure-vacuum
signal amplification/offset, resulting in independent dual
manifold. The pressure-vacuum manifold contains the
redundancy (only supply and reference voltages are
pneumatic components needed for operation of the
common). Although VAC1 is “primary” and VAC2
vacuum generator, proportional pressure, and pulsed
“secondary”, the same vacuum signal is sensed by each
pressure functions in the Accurus® (regulators, solenoid
transducer.
and proportional valves, pressure transducers, etc.). The
following basic functions are performed:
Typically, at sea level and no vacuum generated, VAC1
and VAC2 are near 2.40V. From this “zero vac” level,
- Route solenoid and proportional valve drive signals.
these signals are scaled at 1.00V/100mmHg, for a level
- Provide dual-redundant vacuum level monitoring.
of approximately 8.40V at 600mmHg (max vac).
- Provide dual-redundant proportional valve output
Although the presence of positive pressure is abnormal,
monitoring.
measurement of up to approximately 4psi (200mmHg)
- Provide monitoring of 57psi and 85psi pressure
provides for adequate fault detection.
regulator outputs.
Pressure Monitors
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Pressure level monitoring is divided into two types:
Figure 2-12 shows a block diagram of the Transducer
source and proportional. Signals SP55 and SP85 reflect
PCB circuitry, which is essentially comprised of three
the level of the two regulated source pressures of
basic blocks: reference voltage generators, dual-
approximately 57psi and 85psi (respectively).
redundant vacuum monitor, and pressure monitors.
Proportional pressure level (for VFI and scissors) is
Routing of various valve drive signals through the PCB
reflected in signals PRV1 and PRV2, which are not
does not show up in the block diagram since no active
located identically in the Air/Fluid manifold pneumatic
circuitry is involved in this function.
circuit; PRV1 is “secondary” and at the proportional
valve output, and PRV2 is “primary” and nearer the
Reference Voltage Generators
console port (PRV1/PRV2 typically differ by less than
The reference voltage generators buffer the input
1psi).
reference voltage signals REF100 (10.0V) and REF250
(2.50V) to form REF10B and REF25B, respectively.
All four pressure signals are based on the same 100psi
Two additional reference voltage signals REF12B
transducer. Identical circuitry is used for bridge
(1.25V) and REF05B (0.49V) are generated for proper
excitation and output amplification except for scaling,
transducer bridge excitation and output signal offset. The
which for PRV1 and PRV2 is 1.00V/10psi, for SP55 is
input references are low-pass filtered to reduce any noise.
1.00V/20psi, and for SP85 is 1.00V/30psi. A 0.5V offset
All references are sourced by a voltage follower op-amp
covers for 0.1V zero pressure offset and allows detection
for additional current drive, and fed back to the controller
of a failed transducer, typically revealed by an amplifier
PCB for check.
output swing to a supply “rail”.
primary 85psi SP85

vacuum VAC1
Dual- Reference REF10B (10.0V) 57psi Pressure SP55
REF100
REF10B Redundant (10.0V) Voltage REF25B (2.50V) REF12B Monitors
Vacuum Generators REF05B
REF25B REF250 REF12B (1.25V)
Monitor
(2.50V) PRV1
prv1
secondary REF05B (0.49V)
VAC2 prv2 PRV2
vacuum
Figure 2-12
Transducer PCB Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-23
®
LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE
During normal operation, the Directional Solenoid

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE switches the chamber pressure to the inlet of the
Proportional Valve. The excessive pressure is vented to
The Low Pressure Air/Illuminator (LPA/Illum) Module atmosphere and the controlled output air passes through
mainly consists of three major sections: The LPA/Illum the Output Solenoid and fed to the output of the
Controller PCB, The Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) manifold.
Manifold assembly, and the Illuminator subframe with
Universal Optic Plate. The LPA/Illum Controller PCB In case of any abnormality during operation, the default
relays information between the Host and the Illuminator state of the manifold sets the Directional Solenoid to the
and LPAS outputs. The Controller also monitors and input of the mechanical regulator, and the output pressure
controls the activities of the LPAS manifold and the is fixed at 30 mmHg.
Illuminator subframe.
Manifold
LPAS MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY The manifold is a clear multilayer plastic manifold with
The LPAS Manifold Assembly generates low pressure air four chambers which are linked together by a small
from room air. There are two outputs from this manifold opening. The total volume of all four chambers is
assembly which can operate simultaneously. approximately 25 inch3. The chambers are pressure air
1) The LPAS (Low Pressure Air Source) output is reservoirs and small openings act as filters for air ripple
used for GFI or FA/X. This output from the generated by the air pump.
manifold is well regulated pressure with high flow
capability and is controlled by the LPA/Illum The manifold also provides air channels for pneumatic
Controller PCB. component interconnection.
2) The ASC (Automatic Stop Cock (not available in
all models)) output drives the ACS to change the
setting of the stopcock. This output supplies the
stopcock with 3.5 PSI at 1 lpm flow rate.
Low Pressure
LPAS Manifold Air (GFX, VGFI)
Auto Stopcock
Assembly Drive (future)
xducer signals
mfld valve ctl
pump drive
PV drive
Module Revision
Pump Mfld Valve
(00:99; future) Enable Enable (3x)
LPA Pump
Power OK
LPA Pump Power Drawer
(110VAC)
Shutdown Thermal
Illuminator LPA/Illuminator
Power (17V) Controller PCB Drawer/Thermal Sense Illuminator Lamp 1
Illuminator Lamp Drive Subframe
Power OK Assembly Lamp 2
Lamp 1,2
Kernel Power
Enable
Kernal Signal
5VOK Reset Watchdog General

12VOK Status
15VOK
24VOK
Figure 2-13
LPA/Illuminator Module Block Diagram
2-24 906-2020-501
®
Air Pump These solenoids are energized and de-energized in

The air pump used in the manifold assembly is a AC different combinations to set the output to a different
piston pump. The air pump generates very low acoustic configuration. When the ASC solenoid is energized, the
noise and high flow capability. There is an input filter pressured air is connected to the ASC output port on the
built in the air pump. The air pump is capable of manifold. When the Output solenoid is energized, the
outputting 7 psi at a no flow condition. The output of the output of the LPAS port is connected to the output port of
air pump goes through a silicon tube and into the first the proportional valve. LPAS output pressure is
chamber of the manifold. controlled by the controller PCB. When the Output
solenoid is de-energized, the output of the LPAS port is
Bleed Off Valve connected to the output of the mechanical regulator. If
The mechanical bleed off valve sets the maximum air the Directional solenoid is energized, the air from the
pressure in the manifold to 3.5 ± 0.5 PSI. Any pressure pressured chamber goes to the input of the proportional
applied to the chamber greater than this valve's valve. When the Directional solenoid is de-energized, the
specifications is bled off to atmosphere. This provides a pressured air from the chamber goes to the input of the
safety guard for the LPAS output and the ASC output. mechanical regulator.
The input to the bleed off valve is from the same
chamber that is connected to the air pump. The output of Proportional Valve
the bleed off valve is to atmosphere. The proportional valve controls the output pressure level.
This is a single stage servo valve. The electromechanical
Mechanical Regulator transducer is proportional to its input current, which
A preset mechanical regulator is used as a back up means the output pressure is proportional to its input
pressure regulator to the proportional valve. In case there control current. The characteristic of the transfer function
is a power failure or controller failure, the mechanical of this proportional valve is very linear, and has relatively
regulator will set the LPAS output of the manifold small hysteresis. The vent port of the proportional valve
assembly to 30 mmHg, and capable of supplying 25 cc/ is directed to atmosphere.
min flow. The pressure setting of the regulator is factory
preset. Mufflers
The purpose of the mufflers is to reduce acoustic noise
The input of the mechanical regulator is from the default generated by the bleed off valve and the vent port of the
output port of the directional solenoid. When the proportional valve.
directional solenoid is in the de-energized condition, the
air to the mechanical regulator is from the manifold air Check Valve
chamber. The output of the regulator goes through a A one way check valve is placed between the output of
check valve and to the LPAS output port. the mechanical regulator and the output of the LPAS
port. During normal operation, the output of the LPAS
Solenoids port is connected to the output of the proportional valve,
There are three identical 3-way solenoids mounted on top and is also connected to the output of the mechanical
of the manifold: the Directional Solenoid, Output regulator. The check valve is used to prevent pressure
Solenoid and the Automatic Stopcock Solenoid. They are leak through the mechanical regulator.
24VDC, 2 watt, three way (center, side and top)
solenoids. When the solenoid is energized, the center and
side ports are connected; when the solenoid is de-
energized, the top and the sides are connected. These
solenoids have a relatively large air pathway which
minimizes the pressure loss due to flow.
906-2020-501 2-25
®
The drawer sense signal comes from a normally open

ILLUMINATOR SUBFRAME/
switch located on the Illuminator subframe. When the
UNIVERSAL OPTIC PLATE
Universal Optic Plate is pulled out, the sensor switch
closes and triggers the circuit on the Controller PCB to
The Illuminator is part of the console frame. It has a fan
set the DRWOUT to active state.
to cool the heat caused by the illuminator lights, a
thermal sensor, and a drawer sensor. If the temperature in
The on/off temperature sensor is also located on the
the subframe raised above 180°F, the thermal sensor is
Illuminator subframe. When the subframe temperature is
activated to inform the console host of the information.
less than 180°F, the sensor is in the open state. When the
The drawer sensor informs the module controller to turn
temperature is above 180°F, the switch closes and sends
off the voltage to the illuminator lights when the drawer
the OVTEMP signal.
is pulled out. The connector in the subframe has a self
latching and blind-mate feature; when the Universal
Both the DRWOUT and OVTEMP signal are fed to the
Optic Plate is inserted, the connector automatically
microcontroller to monitor the status.
latches on.
Thermal Sensor
Due to the high power of the illuminator lights, they
The thermal sensor is located near the middle section of
generate large amount of heat. There is a designated fan
the subframe. This is a ON/OFF thermal switch. When
for the illuminator subframe. Anytime the light is turned
the temperature in the illuminator subframe rises above
on, the fan will be on. The fan directs the air directly to
180°F, the contact of the switch is connected. The
the outside of the console frame.
hysteresis of the thermal switch is approximately ±30°F.
Power Connector
Since the operation of the illuminator fan is not detected,
The power connector used in the illuminator subframe is
the module Controller PCB is relaying the thermal sensor
a blind-mate connector. It can withstand high
status to determine the operation state of the illuminator
temperature, and has very low contact resistance. Two
fan. If the thermal sensor is activated (closed), the
contacts are used for each light output voltage to further
module controller thinks the illuminator fan is not
reduce the power loss on the contact resistance.
operating properly.
Drawer Sensor
Fan
The drawer sensor is a push button switch which is
The fan in the illuminator subframe drives air through the
normally closed. One important feature of the switch is
subframe when the light bulbs are turned on. The air
that the travel of the switch arm is long enough so that
inlets are located on both sides of the subframe. The
when the Universal Optic Plate drawer is pushed into the
output of the fan is connected to a duct which is
subframe, the switch contact will open after the power
connected to the back of the Accurus console. The fan is
connector is properly connected. The switch contact
driven by the module Controller PCB.
should be closed before the power connector is
disconnected to pull out the Optic Plate drawer.
Due to the high temperature in the illuminator subframe,
the fan is turned on whenever one or both lamps are
turned on. The fan is off if no lamp is turned on.
2-26 906-2020-501
®
Ground Construction
LPA/ILLUMINATOR CONTROLLER PCB
There are two different ground planes on the LPA/
Illuminator Controller PCB. One is for the 17 volts lamp
The main function of the LPA/Illum Controller PCB is to
supply voltage return. The other ground is for all other
control the Low Pressure Air Source output pressure and
voltages to return.
to control the Illuminator output light intensity. It
conveys information from the Host Computer and
A 0 ohm resistor connects these two grounds to provide a
controls the servo and LPAS (Low Pressure Air Source)
common reference point.
manifold components to achieve the host commanded
output pressure. It also receives information from the
Precision Voltage Reference.
host computer to control the two PWMs (Pulse Width
Some parts of the Controller circuit need precision
Modulators) which regulate the output voltage to the
voltage reference, particularly the following circuits:
illuminator lights.
80C196KC ADC:
The Kernel is the circuity common to all Controller PCBs
+5V reference
and is described earlier in section.
DAC8800 DAC (two needed):
+2.62V reference and +5V reference
The Low Pressure Air Controller circuit mainly consists
Supply to transducers:
of a pressure sensing circuit, servo control circuit (PID),
+10V reference
solenoids driver and monitoring circuit, pump control and
Reference for +17V monitoring:
monitoring circuit, and other safety monitoring and
+2.5V reference
supporting circuitry.
DC offset for the Instrumentation Amplifiers:
+0.667V reference
The Illuminator Controller Circuit consists of the lamp
Error detection circuit for LPAS servo controller:
voltage selecting circuit, PWM circuit, lamp power driver
+4.00V reference and +2.5V reference
circuit, lamp monitoring circuit, and fan/thermal sensor
circuit.
All precision voltages are generated from the +15V
power supply. The total tolerance of all the precision
DC Voltage Filtering and Test Points
voltages is 2% ± 5 mV of the set point.
Each DC voltage from the Host module is filtered with a
10µF (35V) tantalum and 0.1µF (50V) ceramic capacitor.
All precision voltages are buffered by an LT1014 general
All of these capacitors are placed next to the connector.
purpose op-amp for the purpose of isolation and driving
capability.
Following is a list of all test points and their function:
Reference Designator Function 115VAC Circuit and Control
TP1 +12 volts voltage The 115VAC is supplied from the Accurus System
TP2 +24 volts voltage Power Supply. It is the secondary output of a transformer
TP3 +5 volts voltage which has a large inductance. The load of the 115VAC is
TP4 -15 volts voltage the Pressure/Vacuum Air Pump (MEDO) which also has
TP5 +15 volts voltage a large inductance.
TP6 17 volt ground
TP7 +17 volts voltage
TP8 ground
TP9 lamp2 current
TP10 lamp1 current
TP11 lamp2 set point
TP12 lamp1 set point
TP13 pressure 2 reading
TP14 pressure 1 reading
TP15 ground
TP16 pressure set point
TP17 servo error voltage
TP18 ground
906-2020-501 2-27
®
LEDs Common Communication Interface (J1)

The LEDs on the LPA/Illum Controller PCB give visual The signal on the common communication interface
feedback of the PCB operating status. They can be includes TX±, RX±, PDLUP*, SVREQ*, and XRST*.
mainly divided into two groups: voltage indicator and
signal status. The following list defines the LEDs and Watchdog Circuit
their represented signals: This PCB uses a LT691 watchdog IC. The main function
of this IC is to monitor the software activities and +5V.
DS1 To indicate +12 volts is alive
DS2 To indicate +24 volts is alive Programmable Interface Adapter (PIA)
DS3 To indicate +5 volts is alive Two PIAs are used on this PCB (PIA#1 and PIA#2).
+5V is above 4.65 volts. PIA#1 is the master PIA and configured as follows: Port
DS4 To indicate -15 volts is alive A is output, Port B is output, and Port C is input. During
DS5 To indicate +15 volts is alive power up, MRST generated by the Logic PLD holds
DS6 To indicate +17 volts is alive PIA#1 in the reset mode. When this IC is in the reset
+17 volts is within +15 to +19 volts mode, it inhibits WDSTB1 (watchdog strobe) and
DS7 WDOG indicator activates SRST* (software reset) signal.
Red when WDOG is active
DS8 Latched reset The WDSTB1, SRST*, EXP1_RST, EXP2_RST, and
Red when LRST is active ERR_RST signals are pulled down. During reset or
DS9 Operation status LED power up, these signals are set at a known state.
Blinks at 1Hz rate for normal operation
DS10 ASC solenoid Following is a list of the signal names and their
Voltage supplied to the ASC solenoid connector functions:
DS11 Output solenoid Voltage supplied to the
output solenoid connector PIA#1:
DS12 Directional solenoid Signal Name Input/Output Function
Voltage supplied to the directional WDSTB1 Output to Logic PLD.
solenoid connector STLED Output to Drive Status LED.
DS13 Illuminator Drawer Status CLRFLT Output to Logic PLD.
Red when drawer is out SRST* Output to Logic PLD.
DS14 Red Illuminator Temperature Status when EXP1_RST Output to reset Excessive
temperature exceeds 170°F Pressure 1 bit.
DS15 Lamp 1 enable EXP2_RST Output to reset Excessive
DS16 Lamp 2 enable Pressure 2 bit.
DS17 Air pump enable ERR_RST Output to reset Excessive
DS18 115VAC is alive Servo Error bit.
115VAC is applied to the PCB. KEYCLK Output to Logic PLD.
Clock signal for serial key.
Voltage Monitoring Circuits KEYDATA Output to Logic PLD.
The +15V, -15V, +24V, and +12V LEDs only indicate Data signal for serial key.
the existence of the voltage, not the voltage tolerance. ANA-SEL0 Output to Analog MUX.
Currently, these voltage tolerances are monitored on the Selects one of the four inputs.
Host module. ANA-SEL1 Output to Analog MUX.
Selects one of the four inputs.
+5 volts is monitored by the watchdog IC. +17 volts is +15VOK* Input from +15V monitoring circuit.
monitored by a voltage comparing circuit. If the +17 +24VOK* Input from +24V monitoring circuit.
volts is less than +15 volts or more than +19 volts, the V17LOK Input from +17V monitoring circuit.
V17OK signal is deactivated and fed back to the 115VACOK Input from 115VAC monitoring
microcontroller. If the 115VAC signal is less than 100 circuit.
volts, the 115VACOK signal is deactivated and fed back FAULT Input from Logic PLD; +15/-15
to the microcontroller. volts fault.
WDPOR* Input from Logic PLD.
Watchdog power on reset is activated.
2-28 906-2020-501
®
WDRST Input from Logic PLD. EXCES_PRE1*Input from pressure monitoring circuit.
Watchdog reset is activated. Pressure sensed by transducer #1 is
KEYOK Input from Logic PLD. higher than 165 mmHg.
Serial key input to PLD is correct. EXCES_PRE2*Input from pressure monitoring circuit.
Pressure sensed by transducer #2 is
PIA#2 is configured as follows: PortA is output, PortB is higher than 165 mmHg.
output, the lower 4 bits of PortC is input, and higher 4 EXCEX_ERR* Input from servo error monitoring
bits of PortC is output. circuit. Servo error voltage is greater
than 0.25 volts.
The PUMP_EN*, OUTPUT_EN, ASC_EN, DIRC_EN, PGMEM Output to the Flash memory program
LMP1ENA, LMP2ENA, DACCL*, ENFLG*, PGMEM, voltage.
and SVREQ* signals are pulled down through a 2.2k SVREQ* Output to host module to request
resistor. During reset or power up, these signals are set at attention from host.
a known state.
LOW PRESSURE AIR CONTROLLER
PIA#2:
Signal NameInput/Output Function Solenoid Drivers
Pump_en* Output to pump control circuit to There are three identical solenoid drivers on this PCB.
turn on the air pump. Each of the driver is intended to drive a 24VDC, 2 watt
Output-en Output to Output Solenoid driver. solenoid. The control signal is from PIA #2. The TTL
Set the LPAS output pressure to the logic signal controls the gate of the power FET to enable
controlled output port. +24 volts to be applied to the solenoid connector. The
ASC-en Output to ASC solenoid driver. diode connected from the drain of the FET to +24 volts is
Set the ASC port to 3.5±0.5 PSI to release the voltage peak generated by the coil in the
pressure. solenoid when the coil is being energized/de-energized.
DIRC-en Output to Directional solenoid driver.
Set the output of the pressure chamber to All three gates of the FETs are also connected to the
the input of the proportional valve. WDPOR* signal. If the WDPOR* is activated at any
LMP1ENA Output to the lamp control circuit to time, all three solenoids are de-energized, which is their
enable lamp #1. default position. Under this situation the ASC solenoid
LMP2ENA Output to the lamp control circuit to will not let air pass the ASC port, the output of the LPAS
enable lamp #2. is from the mechanical regulator which is set at 30
DACCL* Output to serial DAC. Clears all mmHg @ 20 cc/min flow rate, and the directional
DAC settings. solenoid directs air from the pressured chamber to the
ENFLG* Output to microcontroller. (Enable flag) input of the mechanical regulator.
If the PIA#2 get reset from the LRST
signal, this ENFLG* signal will indicate DAC
to the microcontroller of the status. The 8 bit DAC8800 is used as the Digital-to-Analog
OUT-FDBK* Input from the OUTPUT solenoid driver Converter which is controlled by the microcontroller. For
circuit. the pressure setting, the reference is at +5 volts. For the
ASC-FDBK* Input from the ASC solenoid driver lamp setting , the reference is at +2.62 volts.
circuit.
DIRC-FDBK* Input from the directional solenoid Pressure Transducer and Instrumentation Amplifier
driver circuit. Two independent pressure transducers and
LMP1OPN Input from the lamp open monitoring instrumentation amplifiers are used to create redundancy
circuit. Lamp #1 is open. for pressure monitoring and controlling. The transducers
LMP2OPN Input from the lamp open monitoring are temperature compensated and calibrated silicon
circuit. Lamp #2 is open. pressure sensors. The transducers are powered by the +10
OVTEMP Input from the illuminator subframe volts reference voltage. The full scale output of the
temperature monitoring circuit. Over sensor is 40 mV for 375 mmHg (0.1066 mv/mmHg). The
temperature condition exists. differential voltage output from the transducer is sent to
DRWOUT Input from the illuminator subframe the input of the instrumentation amplifier. The gain of the
drawer in/out detection circuit. Drawer amplifier is set at 227.24. The voltage/pressure ratio at
out condition exists. the output of the instrumentation amplifier is 24.2 mV/
906-2020-501 2-29
®
mmHg. Due to the initial output offset of the pressure PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)
transducer, 0.667 volts is added to the output of the The lamp used in the illuminator requires slow turn on/
instrumentation amplifier. When the transducer's output off. The lamp set point signal is filtered by an RC circuit
is 0 volts, the output of the instrumentation amplifier to ensure a slow turn on for the lamp. The PWM chip
would be 0.667 volts. (SG3527ADW) provides this soft start feature.
ILLUMINATOR CONTROLLER The shutdown signal to the PWM chip is a logic

There are two identical circuits for illuminator control. combination of the lamp enable, lamp default, and drawer
Each circuit controls one of the two light bulbs. The out signal. The lamp is shut down when the drawer out
following description applies to both circuits. signal is activated.
Illuminator Set Point Control Switching circuit

During normal operation, the lamp intensity is controlled Two power FETs are used as power switches. The gate of
by the microcontroller. LMP1SET signal from the 8 bit the FETs are controlled by the output of the PWM chip.
DAC. 0 volts sets the lamp to the lowest intensity and The zener diode prevents VGS from going beyond 12
2.62 volts sets the lamp to the highest intensity. There is volts.
a default voltage setting provided to the Illuminator
Controller in case a fault condition occurs. The default Inductors L1 and L2, and capacitors C19 and C20 store
voltage is set at 2.14 volts which will set the lamp to energy when the switching FETs are turned on. When the
approximately 80% of maximum intensity. The default FETs are off, the inductors and capacitors release the
lamp set point voltage is derived from the VREF signal stored energy to the lamp. This LC circuit also filters the
from the output of the PWM IC. This signal is generated ripples of the switching voltage.
from +17 volts. Both lamp set point voltages are sent to
the inputs of a MUX. If a fault condition exists Diode CR7 releases the negative-going voltage generated
(LMPDFLT* activated), the output of the MUX is the by the coil inductor.
default setting point; otherwise, the microcontroller set
point is used. Current Sensing
The lamp current information is fed back to the
The lamp supply voltage is the output of the PWM microcontroller for monitoring purposes. The current of
controlled switching DC-DC Buck type converter. The the lamp is converted to voltage and the voltage turns on/
microcontroller controls the input set point of the PWM off a FET. The FET is turned on when the lamp is turned
and the output voltage of the switching circuit follows the on. A ferrite material is used in between the current
set point change. sensing voltage and the input of the op-amp for noise
isolation.
The ratio of the set point voltage to the output voltage is
1 volt set point voltage sends an output of 5.26 volts to
the lamp.
2-30 906-2020-501
®
U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
ground plane which is common to all DC supply voltages.

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE The backplane is entirely passive and makes power
available to the cooling fan for the U/S Driver PCB.
The U/S-Diathermy module interfaces electrical signals
between the Host module and U/S handpieces and Cooling Fan
diathermy probes through the handpiece connector panel. The U/S-Diathermy module has a cooling fan which is
The basic functions performed by the U/S-Diathermy operated on +12V DC. This fan is mounted on the card
module are as follows: cage closest to the U/S Driver PCB heatsinks to provide
direct air flow to the heat-dissipating components of the
• Monitors incoming DC power. power amplifier circuitry. The fan is on as long as +12V
• Receives software commands from and sends status to is available on the Backplane PCB.
the Host module.
• Generates electrical energy to drive U/S handpieces Handpiece Connector Cable Assembly
and diathermy probes. Cable W-43 provides electrical connections for U/S
• Measures handpiece ID resistor value. handpiece output power, handpiece ID, and calibration
• Calibrates U/S handpiece power during tuning. data reading. It also provides connection for the
• Detects U/S handpiece ground fault. diathermy output power. Each handpiece cable assembly
• Monitors handpiece output feedback signals. is bundled together and routed from the U/S-Diathermy
card cage to the lower front panel assembly.
Figure 2-14 is the block diagram of the Accurus® U/S-
Diathermy Module which is essentially comprised of five High voltage signals are physically separated from the
basic blocks: U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB, U/S Driver low voltage signals with their own jacketed cable. The
PCB, Erbe Coag PCB (Diathermy PCB), Phaco Backplane redundant chassis grounding is maintained to the panel
PCB, and Handpiece Connector Panel cable assembly. connector through the connector case as well as an
internal pin connection to a chassis grounding lug.
Phaco Backplane PCB
The Backplane PCB provides the intra-module The two banana-jack type connectors on the connector
communication link and DC power distribution to the panel are connected to the Coagulation PCB. The two
U/S Driver and Erbe Coagulation PCBs. It has a single wires are wrapped around the ferrite core nearest to the
banana jacks to reduce EMI, and then heatshrinked to
meet IEC601 safety requirements.
ENABLE, PU, PD
STATUS
ACH5:6 Diathermy
REV3 Diathermy
PCB
U/S-Diathermy
Kernel Power Watchdog
Controller PCB
Kernel Signal
Reset
BA0:3
Module Revision
BRD, BWR
(00:99; future)
BDEN1
U/S Driver U/S 1 Drive
General 5VOK (frag/phaco)
Status 12VOK TEST, DISABLE, FPUP
PCB
15VOK U/S 2 Drive
FRQ
Fan 24VOK (frag/phaco)
ACH1:4
REV2
U/S Diathermy U/S Diathermy Power (85V)

Power (85V)
Figure 2-14
U/S-Diathermy Module Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-31
®
checked individually, but the monitor outputs are

U/S-DIATHERMY CONTROLLER PCB combined and only one status signal (V15OK*) is
generated. The supply monitor status is fed back to the
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB controls the U/S microcontroller for each supply.
Driver PCB and the Erbe Coagulation PCB via the
Backplane PCB. All power adjustment and control The 5V supply is monitored by the watchdog timer IC
functions for the ultrasonic handpieces and the diathermy (LTC691) for a low 5V condition. When +5V supply
probes are communicated to the U/S Driver and Erbe drops below 4.65V, the watchdog timer generates a reset
Coagulation PCBs through the Controller PCB. The signal.
common DC power and communication signal cables are
connected to the backplane PCB. It is the central point of Green LEDs are used to provide visual indication of
all communication within the U/S-Diathermy module. these voltage OK signals. These LEDs are placed on the
Two way communication is achieved by RS422 serial top side of the Controller PCB for easy identification.
communication link. The LED assignment for each voltage OK signals is as
follows:
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB is essentially
comprised of the 80C196KC20 kernel, supply voltage DS1 +5V OK
monitors and reference voltage, watchdog timer and 5V DS2 +12V OK
monitor, line decoders, programmable input/output DS3 ±15V OK
devices, buffers, analog mux, and filters for incoming DS4 +24V OK
signals to the controller.
Signal Interface Connector
Controller PCB Kernel The U/S-Diathermy module interfaces with the Host
The Controller kernel circuitry is the common circuitry of module through connector J2 via cable W-5. All signals
the four Accurus® Controller PCB designs. For detailed going through connector J2 are ESD protected by U8 for
information on the kernel, refer to Controller PCB Kernel overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. To reduce EMI,
theory of operation discussed previously. each signal is bypassed to ground through a 0.001µF
capacitor placed near the signal connector on the
Input DC Power Connector Controller PCB.
DC power connector J1 receives system common DC
voltages from the Host Power/Signal Distribution PCB Input signals PDLUP* and XRST4* are filtered by
via cable W-6. These DC voltages are distributed from 10Kohm resistors and 0.1µF capacitors to prevent
the Controller PCB to the Backplane PCB via edge inadvertent response to glitches which can be picked up
connector P1 and then to the U/S Driver and Coagulation in the signal cable.
PCBs. Test points for each of the DC voltages are located
at the top side of the Controller PCB close to connector Jumper JP1 is used for simulating the External Reset
J1. Following is the description of these test points: (XRST4*) signal when the signal cable is not connected
to connector J2. With the jumper plug on, the signal at
TP1,TP7 GND (Common Ground) U9-13 is logic high and the reset is not asserted. With the
TP2 +15 Volt jumper plug off, the signal is logic low and the reset is
TP3 -15 Volt asserted.
TP4 +5 Volt
TP5 +12 Volt Jumper JP2 is used to simulate the Pedal Up (PDLUP*)
TP6 +24 Volt signal when the signal cable is not connected to
connector J2. With the jumper plug on, the signal at U9-1
+85V DC power is supplied directly to the Backplane is logic high and the pedal up signal is not detected. With
PCB from the system power supply; the Controller PCB the jumper plug off, the signal is logic low and the pedal
has no access to this voltage. up signal is detected.
Supply Voltage Monitor Jumpers are provided for testing and simulation purposes
Each DC supply voltage is monitored at the input stage only. Jumper plugs should be removed after use and
for presence and compliance within ±10% of the nominal should not be used during normal operation.
values. Window detection circuitry is provided for ±15V,
+12V, and +24V supplies. +15V and -15V supplies are
2-32 906-2020-501
®
Reference Voltage Onboard Frequency Counter

There is one precision voltage reference IC(AD586) on The U/S-Diathermy module has the ability to measure the
the Controller PCB which generates 5V reference. The frequency of the applied handpiece signal. The FRQ
5V reference is used for the input voltage window signal is a square wave of the exact handpiece frequency
detection circuitry, revision resistor reading, and that is generated on the U/S Driver PCB. The Controller
microcontroller's ADC reference input. This reference is then measures frequency by counting the number of
also used for generating a 2.5V reference which is used gated pulses (GFRQ) that exist over a known period of
for +12V and +24V supply voltage monitor circuitry. time. This length of time is controlled by the
FRQGATE* signal.
The AD586 is supplied from the analog +15V supply.
Both 5V reference and 2.5V reference voltages are The ability of the Controller PCB to measure the
buffered by LM324 OP-Amp for isolation and driving frequency of the handpiece signal allows for automatic
capabilities. calibration of the voltage controlled oscillator on the U/S
Driver PCB.
Buffered Address, Data, and Offboard Enable
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB is capable of Ultrasound Test and Disable
accessing four separate PCBs. This access is being made Both the TEST* and DISABLE signals are generated
by U30, a 3-to-8 line decoder (74HC138) which is through Port A of the Programmable I/O, U22 on the
enabled by IO2*. When IO2* is high, every output will Controller PCB. These signals are used by the U/S Driver
be high. When IO2* is low, one of four Board Enable PCB to control the U/S handpiece operation.
lines (BDEN1*-BDEN4*) will be selected according to
the address bits (A4-A6). These enable lines are TEST* is an active low signal and used to override the
connected via connector P1 to the appropriate PCB. FPUP (Foot Pedal Up) signal on the U/S Driver PCB.
Currently, the U/S Driver PCB is selected through The DISABLE signal disables the U/S handpiece output
BDEN1* line. power when applied.
Within each PCB, the U/S-Diathermy Controller can read Diathermy Control and Status Read
or write data to 16 different devices. Once the PCB is Control of the Erbe Coagulation PCB is accomplished
accessed through a Board Enable line, the particular with the active low signals: POWER UP (PU*), POWER
device to be communicated with on that PCB is selected DOWN (PD*), and ENABLE (ENABLE*). These
via four Buffered Address lines (BA0-BA3). These control lines are generated from Port A of U22 (PIO) and
address lines are buffered by U28 (74HCT244) and sent sent to the Coagulation PCB via the Backplane PCB.
to the appropriate PCB via connector P1.
The STATUS* signal is generated on the Coagulation
All intra-module data is transferred via the 8-bit Buffered PCB and is read through Port C of U23 (PIO) on the
Data bus (BD0-BD7). This data bus is buffered by U29 Controller PCB. This active low signal is a fault
(74HCT245) and sent to the appropriate PCB. The indication from the IEC601 compliance check circuitry
direction control of this bidirectional bus interface is on the Coagulation PCB.
accomplished by the OFFBDRD* signal which is
generated from the Address Decoder PLD. When Analog Channel Input
OFFBDRD* is low, U29 receives data from an external The analog feedback signals generated from the U/S
PCB. When OFFBDRD* is high, U29 sends data to an Driver and Coagulation PCBs are fed back to the
external PCB. Controller PCB via the Backplane PCB. These signals
are ESD protected by U26 for overvoltage and
Buffered Read and Write undervoltage conditions. They are also filtered by the
Read and write control of the selected device on the resistor network R64 and capacitor network C62 to
accessed PCB is accomplished by the Buffered Read suppress any noise that may be coupled with the signals.
(BRD*) and Buffered Write (BWR*) lines. These lines
are active low and driven by U28 (74HCT244).
906-2020-501 2-33
®
Each handpiece has a certain calibration configuration

U/S-DRIVER PCB
necessary for proper stroke at 100% power. This
calibration is accomplished by three fusible links wired
The U/S Driver PCB performs all electrical processes
within the handpiece connector. Each configuration
necessary to drive a variety of U/S handpieces. Two
provides a low-level digital signal (PROG0, PROG1,
interdependent control loops are used to control the
PROG2, and PGND) recognition to the U/S Driver for
stroke of the U/S handpiece. These are the voltage
increase or decrease of nominal handpiece voltage. These
control loop and the frequency control loop. The voltage
signals provide the percentage variation (-15% to +20%)
control loop monitors and maintains the appropriate
of nominal handpiece drive voltage necessary for
handpiece drive voltage. The frequency control loop
calibrated stroke. The digital signals (PROG0, PROG1,
maintains a continuous tuning of the handpiece to
PROG2) are read through octal buffer U6.
compensate for handpiece loading and drift. These
control loops are only partially contained within the U/S
The low level handpiece input signals are isolated
Driver PCB. The U/S Driver PCB contains circuitry to
through a relay for protection from the high handpiece
detect fault conditions, disable power output, and
voltage. These digital signals are isolated whenever the
communicate the fault to the Controller PCB.
footpedal is depressed for handpiece activation.
Handpiece ID Resistors, Calibration & Input
Dual Digital To Analog Converter
Isolation
During the tuning process, the module determines the
Prior to tuning an ultrasonic handpiece the module must
correct operational frequency and control set point for the
identify which type of handpiece is connected and its
handpiece operation. The frequency is set by two analog
voltage calibration. The U/S-Diathermy module reads
control lines COARSE and FINE. These analog signals
each U/S handpiece port any time the footpedal is in the
are setup by the dual digital-to-analog converter U17.
“up” position. The “up” position is determined by the
The frequency is initially set by the COARSE signal then
FootPedal UP (FPUP) signal which is generated by a
during real time operation all frequency adjustments
microswitch located in the footswitch.
made for load and temperature compensation are done by
the FINE signal. The FINE signal is where control loop
Each ultrasonic handpiece has low level logic and analog
servoing takes place. Although the signal is dynamic in
signals embedded in the handpiece Lemo connector for
nature, it should be a DC level from 2 to 5 volts. The
the purpose of handpiece ID recognition and output
FINE signal is available at testpoint TP6.
power calibration. Recognition of the handpiece is
determined by the value of a resistor inside the Lemo
Voltage Controlled Oscillator and Scale Amp
connector. The value of the resistor informs the module
The COARSE and FINE signals are applied to the
which handpiece is present. The resistor forms a voltage
function generator IC U11 which has been configured as
divider with a 5.11 Kohm resistor on the U/S Driver PCB
a voltage-to-frequency counter. Frequency of the
and is connected between the Buffered 10V Reference
generated sinusoidal waveform is proportional to these
(B10VREF) and the Calibration Resistance (CALR)
signals. The function generator creates a sinusoidal
lines. The reading of the handpiece resistance is done by
voltage with an amplitude of approximately 1.5 Vrms
measuring the voltage across 5.11 Kohm resistors. This is
and a frequency with a minimum span of 25 to 65K Hz.
done with U5, U4, and U9. U5 provides input buffering,
This voltage is then passed through scale amplifier U10
then one of the three signals is selected through analog
with a gain of 2 to create an offset sinusoidal signal of
multiplexor #1 (U4) and finally scaled by U9 with a scale
approximately 3.0 Vrms.
factor of 0.482. The scaled voltage is measured by the U/
S-Diathermy Controller PCB on Analog Channel 3
Multiplying Digital to Analog Converter
(ACH3).
All handpiece voltage adjustments occur through the 12
bit multiplying digital-to-analog converter U1. The
The module has predetermined handpiece parameters
multiplying DAC takes the voltage (USSIG) present at
within its memory such as nominal handpiece voltage
the VREF pin of U1 and multiplies it by the ratio n/4096.
and tuning frequency range. Therefore, once the
The variable n is the 12 bit data written to the multiplying
handpiece type is known, the above parameters are also
DAC from the data bus.
known.
2-34 906-2020-501
®
Analog Switch and Zero Crossing Detector The feedback voltage is measured at the primary side of the
U/S power is enabled by analog switch U2. This switch is transformer and is related to the actual handpiece voltage by
controlled by the ZEN signal which is created by the zero the turns ratio of the transformer. This primary voltage is
crossing detector. scaled to appropriate levels and then passed to rms/dc
converter U29. The output of the rms/dc converter is
The zero crossing detector is comprised of U13 and U19. available at TP2.
U13 generates a TTL compatible square wave from USSIG.
U19 creates the ZEN signal by clocking the enable signal The handpiece current is detected by resistor R6 present in
present at TP5 with the above square wave. Also at this the primary side of the transformer. This current is related to
point, the square wave is buffered by U16 to create the FRQ the actual handpiece current by the transformer turns ratio.
signal used in frequency measurements done by the The voltage across R6 is scaled by U27 operated in a
Controller PCB. differential mode to provide input to the rms/dc converter
U28. The output of the rms/dc converter is available at TP4.
U/S Enable Logic, Relay Select, and Relay Drivers
The U/S enable logic is created by U16 and U18. The Analog Feedback Signals
U/S enable signal present at TP5 is a logical function of the The U/S-Diathermy module has the ability to read various
following signals: TEST*, FPUP, USEN, and DISABLE. In analog signals to provide the means of calibration and real
addition to the above enable logic, U/S power can only be time diagnostics. These signals are present at multiplexor #2
enabled when there is no ground fault condition. (U3) which is selected by the MUX2* signal. These signals
include 10VREF, COARSE, FINE, scaled VBIAS (Power
The USEN and K1-K7 (Relay Enable) signals are created Amp Voltage Bias), scaled +85V, FCOMP (Filtered
by 8 bit latch U7. The USEN and K1-K7 signals are Compliance), and HPV9T(Handpiece Voltage x Nine
generated by U/S-Diathermy module software to select the Tenths). The multiplexor output is scaled by U9 with a scale
U/S port and enable U/S power. The relays signals are factor of 0.482. The scaled voltage is measured by the U/S-
buffered by U8 prior to activating each of the relays. Diathermy Controller PCB on Analog Channel 4 (ACH4).
Power Amplifier At system power up the U/S-Diathermy module software

The power amplifier can provide approximately 45 watts of performs a power up test by measuring 10VREF, VBIAS
power over a frequency range of 25 to 65 KHz. The and +85V for appropriate levels. It also checks the
amplifier consists of a voltage gain stage (Q4 and Q3) functionality of the dual DAC by measuring the COARSE
operating in a class A darlington configuration. The second and FINE voltages.
stage is the power gain stage (Q1 and Q2) operating in a
class B emitter follower configuration. Ground Fault Detection
The ground fault circuitry detects the condition of a broken
Step Up Transformer, Voltage & Output Select Relay earth ground connection between the handpiece and chassis
The step up transformer has a two tap primary turn ratio to ground. A ground fault can only exist when both the
raise the AC power amplifier output voltage from 23 Vrms SHIELD and GND connections are broken. If this occurs
to a maximum of approximately 340 to 390 Vrms applied to then a voltage across the stray capacitance between the now
the handpiece from the high voltage tap. The primary tap is floating handpiece shell and chassis ground is measured.
selected by relay K5. This voltage GFAULT is indicated at the return side of the
transformer. GFAULT is scaled down by the R/C network
Following the transformer are two relays which steer the and compared to a 5V dc reference voltage. GFAULT must
high voltage (USA, USB) signals to the appropriate U/S exceed approximately 38.5 Vrms for a fault to occur.
port.
Handpiece Voltage and Current Feedback

The module utilizes two interdependent control loops for
maintaining real time tuning of the handpiece. The
information necessary for these control loops is contained
within the handpiece voltage and current.
906-2020-501 2-35
®
Oscillator and One-shot

COAGULATION PCB IC8 and the associated passive components comprise a
free running oscillator. R31, TP2 (potentiometer), and
The Erbe Coagulation PCB generates the electrical C17 determine the frequency of the oscillator. The output
signals necessary to drive different types of diathermy of the oscillator goes to a one-shot. IC9 converts the 50%
handpieces. This PCB contains safety circuitry to detect a duty cycle oscillator output to a single with a short pulse
fault condition and communicate the fault to the U/S- width of 327ns. IC10 is a dual power MOSFET driver
Diathermy Controller PCB. that inverts the one-shot output to generate positive
pulses to the output switching transistor Q4.
Level Converter and Up/Down Counter
IC1 converts +5V inputs to +15V outputs and serves as a Watchdog Timer and Overvoltage Protection
linear receiver for the three control signals (PD, PU, One half of IC9 (one-shot) is utilized in the watchdog
COAGEN*) from the U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB. timer circuitry. Unless retriggered by the COAGEN*
The Power Up Counter Control {PU) and Power Down signal every 300 ms, IC9 will time out and reset the DAC
Counter Control (PD) signals control the directional preventing any power being sent to the diathermy
count of the cascaded 4 bit counters to either increase or handpiece. It also resets the other half of IC9 which
decrease the output power. prevents IC10 from generating positive pulses to Q4.
This will eventually shut down the PWM (IC7).
IC3 and IC4 are programmable 4 bit up/down counters
cascaded to create a single 8 bit binary counter. The Comparator IC6 is used to monitor the power supply
program inputs to these IC’s are connected to GND so voltage to ensure that it does not exceed a set limit of 60
that the counter always starts out at 0 count when reset. volts maximum. If U-PS exceeds 60 volts, the
PU and PD are gated through IC2 and then connected to comparator output will turn off transistor Q3, which in
IC3 which controls the lower four bits. The carry over turn will shut down the PWM and open relay RLY1
bits of IC3 are used to control the count up or down of preventing any power being sent to the diathermy
IC4 which controls the upper four bits. handpiece. A status signal is sent to the U/S-Diathermy
Controller to continuously monitor the state of this
Digital to Analog Converter circuitry. For normal operation, the comparator is set by
The binary outputs of the up/down counter become the CAUTEN. When the comparator is set, it will turn on
input data for the 8-bit digital-to-analog converter IC5. Q3, which in turn will close RLY1.
Each single binary bit increase at the input equals
approximately 0.02 volts increase at the output. The Peak Detector
LDAC*, WR*, and CS* controls are tied low so that any The peak voltage at primary side of the transformer is
change on the input is immediately registered on the generated from the peak detection circuitry which is
output voltage. The output from the DAC is used as a comprised of IC13 and IC12. This signal is used by the
voltage input to the pulse width modulator. microcontroller ADC for diathermy output integrity
monitoring. The UPRIM signal represents the primary side
The COAGPWR (Coagulation Output) is an analog voltage of the transformer converted to a DC voltage and is
feedback signal that is measured by the U/S-Diathermy between 1.11 to 3.62 volts with the 75 ohm ±1% load over
Controller PCB for verification of the set voltage. the range of 30% to 100% power setting. If UPRIM exceeds
4.3 volts (which is equivalent to 47.3 Vrms across the 75
Pulse Width Modulator ohm load), the system generates an error message and shuts
IC7 is a hybrid Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) that down diathermy handpiece operation.
generates a fixed frequency output with a variable pulse
width (duty cycle). The output of this circuit U-CON is Switching Regulator
enabled only if the watchdog timer is adequately Q1, Q2, and the associated discrete components function
retriggered and the +85V supply does not exceed its rated as a switching regulator supplying the required voltage
voltage tolerance limit. relative to the requested output energy. The output of the
PWM (U-CON) is utilized to turn on Q2 and Q1. The
Part of the power supply voltage U-PS is fed back to the power supply signal U-PS is fed back to the PWM. U-
PWM to adjust the duty cycle of the output voltage control CON is then generated with the negative going edge
U-CON at a point coincident with the sawtooth waveform based on the summed value of U-PS and U-DAC. The
from the R14/C41 time constant. The current feedback voltage generated from the +85V supply is sent to the
signal I-PS is used to limit the peak current of Q4. primary side of the transformer T1.
2-36 906-2020-501
®
FRONT PANEL MODULE
• Monitors the up/down arrow keys and reporting key

FRONT PANEL MODULE
codes.
• Monitors the touch screen and reports the X,Y
The Accurus® Front Panel Module interfaces between the
coordinates of point of touch.
Host module and the color Graphics LCD. The module
• Monitors remote control serial bit stream and reports
also receives control information from the user via the
remote key codes.
touch screen, up/down arrow keys, and an infrared
• Illuminates the handpiece/probe in-use indicator
remote control. The Front Panel module consists of the
LEDs.
following major sections: Front Panel Controller PCB,
7-Segment Display PCB, Keypad LED PCB (202-1511-
Figure 2-15 shows a block diagram of the Front Panel
501 only), Handpiece LED PCB, Touch Screen, and
module. The Front Panel Controller receives DC power
Graphics LCD. NOTE: There are two different Front
from the Host Power/Signal Distribution PCB through
Panel Modules used on the Accurus®: PN 202-1329-
the system common power cable. The communication
501(old version) and PN 202-1511-501 (new version).
between the Controller and Host module is done through
Functionally the two modules operate the same and
the system common signal cable. All system level
the following theory covers both except where noted
commands and data are transferred through the RS422
otherwise.
serial communication link. Once a command is received
from the Host, the Controller performs the appropriate
The following basic functions are performed by the
actions to generate control signals for the 7-Segment
module:
Display PCB, Handpiece LED PCB, and other associated
hardware.
• Maintains communication with the host module.
• Provides the front panel color graphics display.
• Displays the LPAS, Diathermy, and Illuminator
setting information.
Eject
Backlight Cassette
Aspiration
Eject (pushbutton) Port (2x)
Keypad LED PCB

Handpiece
(FP Module 202-1511-501 only) "000" - "999" globals (5x) LED PCB Pneumatic
Connection (6x)
Up/Down Arrows Electrical

(pushbutton) Connection (6x)
7-Segment
7-Segment Drive
LED PCB
Up/Down Status
LED Drive
IR Remote
Eject
IR Remote
Touch X,Y Analog Reset

X,Y Position Front Panel
Screen
Controller PCB Service Request
Inverter (FP Module General Status

Kernel Power 202-1511-501 only)
Remote Serial
Kernel Signal
(future)
Module Revision Backlight

(00:99; future) Power
LCD Power
Graphics
LCD Signal LCD
Figure 2-15
Front Panel Module Block Diagram
906-2020-501 2-37
®
FRONT PANEL MODULE
Membrane Key Interface

FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER PCB The up/down arrow keys are arranged in a 4-row by 3-
column matrix. The task of scanning the keys is
The Front Panel Controller PCB consists primarily of the performed by software through the Port B of PIO #1
Kernel circuitry, Touch Screen Interface, Handpiece LED (U14) and PIO #2 (U11). At a rate (multiples of 10 msec)
Driver, 7-segment Display Driver, and LCD Power defined by the Host, the 80C196KC (U20) scans the
Supply. It resides on the back side of the LCD screen and keys. Scanning is performed by setting all column lines
provides cable interfaces to other front panel module high first, and then scrolling a logic zero through the
PCBs and assemblies. columns. After each scroll the signals at ROW1, ROW2,
ROW3, and ROW4 are read and stored away.
Status LEDs are provided for detecting incoming DC
voltages and displaying software activities. The Upon completion of one scan, software analyzes the
Controller provides the LCD power to the Graphics LCD stored row data (5 x 2 = 10 bits). If all bits are high and
which receives the LCD video signal directly from host the keys are untouched, then the task exists. In order to
LCD Driver PCB (EXM-23). It receives X/Y position detect a valid touch, only one out of 10 bits is allowed to
data from the Touch Screen, and up/down status and IR be low. When a valid key is detected, its associated key
remote signal from the 7-segment Display PCB. code is stored.
The Controller generates 7-segment drive signals to the The keys are scanned again in 10 msec. If the same key is
7-segment Display PCB to display the parametric values found to be depressed, its code value is placed into a
of the global functions. It also sends LED drive signals to transmit buffer in the proper format to be transmitted to
the Handpiece LED PCB to indicate the probe/handpiece the Host.
connector in-use. The cassette eject signal is sent to the
Controller via the LED PCB. DC to AC Inverter
U37 is the DC to AC inverter device. Its input terminal is
Controller PCB Kernel hardwired to +12V DC and the outputs are connected to
The Controller kernel circuitry is the common circuitry of the Graphics LCD screen through connector J8 to drive
the four Accurus® Controller PCB designs. For detailed two hot cathode fluorescent tubes.
information on the kernel, refer to Controller PCB Kernel
theory of operation discussed previously. 7-Segment Display Drive
The common segment data lines (SEGA-SEGG, SEGDP)
Touch Screen Interface are MOSFET driven signals of the corresponding SA-SG,
To read the X/Y coordinates of a point of touch, the X SDP logic signals generated from Port A of PIO #1
screen is first biased with BIASX and GNDX signals by (U14). These signals are transmitted to the 7-Segment
switching X+ to VCC (+5V) and X- to GND. With the X Display PCB along with other control signals via
screen biased, the Y screen is floated to become a pickup connector J3.
contact at any position over the entire screen. When the
screens are touched, a voltage divider is created to raise BA0, BA1, BA2, BAD0, BRST* are all buffered by the
the potential of the floating screen to a certain voltage. non-inverting buffer U12 for signal driving capability
This voltage is sent through a low pass filter to the and sent to the 7-Segment Display PCB. DRV3CS* and
80C196KC's internal Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) DRV4CS* signals are generated by the address decoder
which yields the X coordinate (XCH). To read the Y PLD U19.
coordinate (YCH), the operation repeats itself by biasing
the Y screen with BIASY and GNDY signals and Handpiece LED Control
floating the X screen. The handpiece LED enable signals HPLED1-HPLED12,
CASLED1, and CASLED2 are generated by 8-bit
The task of biasing and floating the X/Y screens is addressable latches U30 and U29. These LED control
controlled by software through the 82C55 Programmable signals are sent to the Handpiece LED PCB via connector
I/O, U14. The software accomplishes this task by J7. The CASS_SW status signal from the Handpiece
alternatively turning a pair of dual (N- and P- Channel) LED PCB is read through Port C (Bit 7) of the PIO #2.
MOSFETs (U3 and U4) on and off at appropriate times.
The signal interface between the Front Panel Controller

and the touch screen is done through connector J1.
2-38 906-2020-501
®
FRONT PANEL MODULE
Voltage Detection and Monitor U14 (82C55) on the Controller PCB. This data is then fed
The input voltage monitor circuitry is provided for +24V into high current driver circuit on the Controller PCB and
and +12V supplies. R8 and R5 develop a voltage divider sent to the 7-segment Display PCB via cable W-26. The
for +24V and the scaled voltage is fed back to the ADC segment data is then presented to the LEDs through
input of the 80C196KC for monitoring. Likewise, R7 and current limiting resistors R1-R8.
R6 develop a voltage divider for +12V and the scaled
voltage is fed back to the ADC input of the 80C196KC Since the LEDs share common data lines, only one LED
for monitoring. These two supply voltages are also can be enabled at a given time. Each numeric LED is
visually monitored by DS3 (+24VOK) and DS4 addressable by DRV <0: 15> signals which are generated
(+12VOK). through the 8-bit addressable latch (U1, U2). The Front
Panel module allows for ON, OFF , DIM, and BRIGHT
The 5V supply is monitored by the watchdog timer IC control of each numeric display through these "DRV"
(LTC691) for low 5V condition. When the +5V supply signals. To toggle between dim (normal) and bright mode
drops below 4.65V, the watchdog timer generates a reset of the numeric displays, the BRIGHT signal generated
signal and causes the Misc. Logic PLD to issue a RST from the controller is used. When BRIGHT is low,
signal. PGND (PG1-PG4) connections to U1 & U2 are floating
and the numeric displays are dim. When BRIGHT is
LCD Inverter PCB high, PGNDs are connected to GND and the numeric
The LCD Inverter connects directly to the Front Panel displays are bright.
Controller PCB and provides power to the LCD
Backlight tubes. Backlight LEDs
The 7-segment Display PCB contains 10 green LEDs for
the purpose of backlighting the up/down arrow keys. Five
SEVEN SEGMENT DISPLAY PCB sets of up/down arrow keys are provided on the Upper
Front Elastomer Keypad which is placed between the
The 7-Segment Display PCB interfaces with the Front Display Upper Panel and the Switch Layer Touch Screen.
Panel Controller PCB and is used to display the Each set of up/down arrow keys are used for either
parametric values of the global functions of the increasing or decreasing the respective power setting
Accurus®. This PCB contains the numeric LED displays, indicated on the numeric displays. The LEDs illuminate
backlight LEDs, and infrared receiver for remote control. through the transparent touch screen panel with
NOTE: For 202-1511-501 Front Panel Modules, the membrane switches and remain on as long as +5V is
backlight LEDs are located on the Keypad LED PCB. present on the PCB.
Numeric LEDs The intensity of the backlighting LEDs are set by the
There are 15 numeric LED (Light Emitting Diode) current limiting resistor network RN1. Using a resistor
displays on the PCB. All numeric displays are green 7- network allows easy replacement of the current limiting
segment LEDs with right decimal point and are arranged resistors if the brightness of all LEDs needs changing at
into five separate banks. Each bank consists of three the same time.
numeric LEDs. Following is the LED assignment for
each bank: Remote Control Receiver
The infrared (IR) receiver circuitry for detecting infrared
DS1, DS2, DS3 Gas Forced Infusion Setting signals from the remote control is provided on the
DS4, DS5, DS6 Fluid/Air Exchange Setting 7-segment Display PCB. U3 is an IR light detector
DS7, DS8, DS9 Diathermy Power Setting photocell device and receives the infrared rays through its
DS10, DS11, DS12 Illuminator #1 Intensity Setting photo-diode and performs all the necessary amplification,
DS13, DS14, DS15 Illuminator #2 Intensity Setting filtering, and pulse detecting internally. This device
outputs a TTL compatible signal representing the envelop
The numeric display data is transmitted by the Host to of the infrared signal.
the Front Panel Controller which performs ASCII to 7-
segment conversion and then displays the data. All
numeric LEDs are time-multiplexed on common segment
data lines. The segment data is sent through Port A of
906-2020-501 2-39
®
FRONT PANEL MODULE
Interface Connector and Test Points When the switch is depressed, the CASS_SW signal is
20-pin PCB connector J1 is installed on the solder side of sent back to the Front Panel Controller PCB so that the
the 7-segment Display PCB and provides a +5V power Host module can take an appropriate action with the Air/
connection and signal interface from the Front Panel Fluid module.
Controller to this PCB via cable W-26.
Interface Connector
There are two test points available on the PCB. TP1 is 20-pin PCB connector J1 is installed on the solder side of
assigned for +5V measurement, and TP2 is for GND the Handpiece LED PCB and provides +5V power
connection. connection and signal interface from the Front Panel
Controller PCB to this PCB via cable W-27.
HANDPIECE LED PCB
SWITCH LAYER TOUCH SCREEN
The Handpiece LED PCB interfaces with the Front Panel
Controller PCB. The PCB is used to indicate the in-use The touch screen is a 4-wire Analog Resistive Touch
status of the probes and handpieces. The PCB contains Screen (ARTS). It consists of two thin sheets of plastic
the handpiece indicator LEDs and cassette eject switch. (X and Y screens), each with a special coating of
transparent resistive material on one side. The sheets are
Handpiece Indicator LEDs sandwiched together with the resistive coating in
There are twelve green LEDs for the purpose of between, but restrained from touching each other by a
identifying the active handpieces and probes in-use and matrix of small clear spacers. Static protection is made on
two LEDs for the cassette usage status. All fourteen all four places of the ARTS through the grounding strap
LEDs are individually controlled by HPLED1-HPLED12 to chassis.
and CASLED1, CASLED2 signals received from the
front panel controller PCB. These LEDs are physically The X and Y signals from ARTS are sent to the Front
positioned to match with the cut-outs in the lower front Panel Controller PCB individually and digitized to
panel gasket. provide a resolution of 1024 points each. The Front Panel
module can scan the ARTS at programmable rate of 1 to
The intensity of the backlighting LEDs are set by the 10 Hz. The Front Panel module processes the user inputs
current limiting resistor network R1. Using a resistor and reports the X/Y coordinates of the point of touch to
network allows easy replacement of the current limiting the Host module via the serial communication.
resistors if the brightness of the LEDs needs to be
changed all at the same time. There is a 2-by-5 membrane switch matrix residing on
the touch screen assembly. The module can scan all
Cassette Eject Switch switches at a programmable rate of 1 to 10 Hz through
The cassette eject switch which is used on the Handpiece ROW1-ROW5 and CLMN1-CLMN2 signals and report
LED PCB is a momentary switch with normally open the key codes to the Host module via the serial
contacts. The switch contains a green backlight LED communication link.
which is also current-limited by resistor R1. The switch
LED remains on as long as +5V power is available on the
PCB.
2-40 906-2020-501
®
SECTION THREE
PARTS LOCATION AND DISASSEMBLY
GENERAL INFORMATION The following procedures provide instructions on

disassembling the Accurus®. Refer to Figures 3-1 through
This section is written to instruct the service engineer on 3-5 throughout these procedures for reference to console
how to locate, gain access to, and remove various skins components.
and subassemblies from the Accurus®. In addition to
written instructions, several drawings and photos are TOOLS, SPARES, TEST SUPPLIES, AND
included to aid in disassembly. If further detail is required HARDWARE
than shown in this section, refer to the engineering
assembly drawings located in Section Seven. Refer to Tables 5-1 through 5-4 in Section Five for tools,
spares, test supplies, and hardware.
Replacement of the items removed in this section is
accomplished by performing the steps in reverse order
unless noted otherwise. When reconnecting cables, refer
to the interconnection diagram in Section Six.
Diathermy PCB U/S Diathermy Module

U/S Driver PCB
U/S Diathermy Controller PCB Power/Signal Distribution PCB
Upper Upper level tilts back to

Front allow access to Lower
Panel level. For an overhead
layout view of the Upper
and Lower levels, refer
to Figures 3-2 and 3-3.
Host Module
Power Supply
Lower Front Panel
Illuminator
Figure 3-1
Accurus® Parts Location Diagram of Front Panel and Upper Level
906-2020-501 3-1
®
U/S Diathermy Host

Module Module
PCMCIA
Drive
U/S Diathermy Controller PCB
Diathermy PCB
U/S Driver PCB
Power/Signal Distribution PCB
Front Panel Controller PCB

7-Segment Keypad
Display PCB LED PCB LCD & Touchscreen
on 202-1511-501 only
Figure 3-2
Upper Level Layout of Accurus® System
Main Air
Source
System Fan
Power
Supply
LPA/Illuminator Controller PCB
Transducer Air
PCB Pump
Illuminator
Interface
Bracket
Pressure/ LPAS Assembly
Vacuum Manifold
Manifold
Illuminator
Rcvr Mech PCB
Receiver
Mechanism Pneumatic
Assembly Connector
Handpiece
Manifold
Connector
Asembly
Figure 3-3
Lower Level Layout of Accurus® System
3-2 906-2020-501
906-2020-501
®
LEGEND ELECTRICAL TEST POINTS PNEUMATIC TEST POINTS
RG = Regulator TP1 = +15V TP8 = MT1* TP1 = see STP
J = Electrical Jack TP2 = -15V TP9 = MT6* TP2 = see STP
T = Tube TP3 = GND TP10 = MT5* TP3 = see STP
L = Solenoid TP4 = MT3* TP11 = 10V
MT = Transducer TP5 = 2.5V TP12 = 1.25V
RO = Restrictive Orifice TP6 = MT4* TP13 = MT2*
PV = Proportional Valve
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly with Tranducer PCB
*(refer to Transducer schematic

TP7 = 0.49V (940-0202-004) for transducer outputs)
24V
Solenoid
TP = Test Point
Valves STP = Service Test Procedure
T11 L2
L19 RG3 24V PV1
J16
J1 30psi Pressure
Solenoid
Regulator
T12 Valve
L18 (TP2)
J2
L3 J4
T3
L13 24V
J17
TP13
Receiver J3 Proportional
Solenoid
Figure 3-4
Mechanism Valve Valve

(Refer to T9
L12 RG2
assy drawing J9
57psi Pressure MT4 MT3 J3
in Section 7 T8 Regulator pressure pressure
for connections L11
J8 (TP3) xdcr xdcr
to Receiver MT6 MT2
Mechanism) pressure L5
T10 vac xdcr
U9 xdcr 24V
T2 TP12 Solenoid
TP10 TP9
T7 TP11 Valve
L16 J7 TP2 U5 U4 TP8 MT1 R02 R07 T1
pressure from RG1 (TP1)
U1 U2 xdcr
T6 TP7 TP6 MT5 located on
L14 TP4 Main Air
J6 vac xdcr
TP5 U3 TP3 Source
T5
L17 J2 J19 Muffler TP1
J5
TP1
T4 Muffler
L15 Transducer PCB TP2
J4
L4
24V
Pressure/Vacuum Solenoid
Valve
Manifold
Venturi Pump TP3 T15 T13 T14
to Pneumatic
Connector Assy
VFI
Scissors
to Receiver Mechanism
Cassette Vacuum Seal
3-3
®
LPAS Manifold R1
24V
30mmHg 24V
Solenoid
Pressure Solenoid
Valve
Regulator Valve T17
L2 L3 To Pneumatic
T22 T23 T16 Connector
Assembly
T24
RV1 PV1
Relief Single Stage
Valve PUMP Servo Valve Muffler
24V
Solenoid
Valve
Muffler T21
L1
To Transducers
MT1 and MT2 on
LPA/Illuminator
Controller PCB
Ambient Air Inlet
Figure 3-5
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
®
The Accurus contains electrostatic discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Always use care and wear a wrist
strap when working with or near these devices.
Prior to removal of any system component, turn off

system power using rear panel switch.
1 Removal of Top Cover

1.1 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing Top
Cover to rear of chassis.
1.2 Slide Top Cover back and up to remove from
system.
2 Removal of Illuminator Assembly Figure 3-6

Captive Screws Securing Front
2.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1. of Upper Level to Chassis
2.2 Loosen two captive screws (see Figure 3-6)

securing front of upper level to chassis. Tilt
upper level back until it rests in back position.
3-4 906-2020-501
®
2.3 Remove two 2mm hex screws securing 3 Removal of Lower Front Panel
illuminator cover to chassis (see Figure 3-7).
3.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
3.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back
position.
3.3 Eject Illuminator drawer and leave it in the
extended position (do not remove).
Replacement: Be sure to slip grommet over
Illuminator drawer.
3.4 Loosen five captive screws securing Lower FP to
chassis. The fifth screw is located on upper middle
of Lower Front Panel and is accessed from inside
lower level (see Figure 3-9). Place Lower FP on
table top.
Figure 3-7 Front Panel
Screws Securing Illuminator Cover to Chassis
2.4 Loosen but do not remove nylon screw on

Illuminator Assembly (see Figure 3-8). When
tightened, this screw prevents Illuminator
Assembly from being pulled completely out of
system.
Fifth Screw
Figure 3-9
Nylon Fifth Captive Screw Securing Lower
Screw Front Panel to Chassis
3.5 Disconnect A11P1 from Standby Switch PCB.

3.6 Loosen four captive screws securing U/S
Handpiece Connector Panel to Lower Front
Panel and remove Front Panel.
Figure 3-8
Nylon Screw Restraining Illuminator Assembly NOTE: To lay Front Panel flat in front of the
system without removing remaining cables,
2.5 While holding front of Illuminator Assembly, rotate it 180 degrees.
press Illuminator Release button on rear panel.
The assembly will spring forward as it is freed
from latch mechanism.
2.6 Carefully pull Illuminator Assembly from
system. Angle the assembly slightly as it exits the
system.
906-2020-501 3-5
®
4 Removal of Pneumatic Connector Assembly 6.4 Disconnect A8P4 through A8P7.

NOTE: Be careful not to drop screws securing
4.1 Remove Lower FP per step 3.
connector A8P4. They are not captive screws.
4.2 Disconnect A3P7 from Air/Fluid Controller PCB.
6.5 Disconnect cable W22 from LCD Controller
4.3 Disconnect white luer fitting connecting green PCB A22 (in Host Module) and route through
tubing from T2 on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold to hole in bottom of upper level. The other end of
T2 on Pneumatic Connector Assembly. W22 is hardwired to LCD A13.
4.4 Disconnect white luer fitting connecting clear 6.6 Loosen four captive screws securing Upper Front
tubing from Receiver Mechanism to VAC Panel to chassis. Remove Upper Front Panel.
connection on side header of Pressure/Vacuum
Manifold.
7 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB
4.5 Loosen two flathead screws securing side header
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold, and pull side
header away from manifold. Note: Be sure that 7.1 Remove Upper Front Panel per step 6.
O-rings for side header remain in manifold. If
an O-ring sticks to side header, remove and 7.2 Disconnect A8P8 from FP Controller PCB.
place in manifold prior to replacement. 7.3 Disconnect A8P3 from FP Controller PCB.
4.6 Disconnect clear tubing from T16 and T17 on 7.4 Disconnect ribbon cable connectors P1 and P2
LPAS manifold. Replacement: T16 connects to from FP Controller PCB.
T16 on Pneumatic Connector Assembly, and T17
connects to Pneumatic Connector Assembly. 7.5 Remove four nuts and standoff securing FP
Controller PCB to upper FP (see Figure 3-10).
4.7 Loosen three 3mm hex screws securing Remove FP Controller PCB.
Pneumatic Connector Assembly to chassis. Pull
assembly partially out of chassis then slide black
grommet on cable W28 out of its position in 8 Removal of LCD Backlight
chassis. Remove assembly from system. (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)
8.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 7.
5 Removal of Handpiece LED PCB 8.2 Using a small screwdriver pull back on tabs
5.1 Remove Lower FP per step 3. securing backlight cover to backlight assembly
(see Figure 3-11). The metal cover will spring up
5.2 Disconnect A10P1 from Handpiece LED PCB. as it releases.
5.3 Remove five 2.5mm hex screws securing PCB 8.3 Slide backlight cover out to remove from
Lower FP skin. backlight assembly. Replacement: Ensure that
white side of backlight cover faces bulb when
replacing.
6 Removal of Upper Front Panel
(202-1329-501) 8.4 Remove bulb connectors from retainer. Disconnect
connector from bulb that is being replaced.
8.5 Remove rubber retainer that secures bulb.
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis. 8.6 Carefully remove bulb (with connectors) from
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the reclined assembly.
position (approximately 90°).
6.3 Remove 7mm nut securing ground strap to
chassis.
3-6 906-2020-501
®
Figure 3-10
Exploded View of 202-1329-501 Front Panel Assembly
Backlight Cover
Tabs securing
backlight covers
(two on each side).
Bulb Connectors
Cable ties for W22 (2) Bulb
Backlight cover slides out.
Rubber Retainer holding bulb in place.
Figure 3-11
View of Front Panel Assembly with Controller PCB Removed
9 Removal of LCD 9.3 Remove two 2.5mm screws and washers

(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) securing W22 cable to upper front panel.
9.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 7. 9.4 Carefully disconnect W22 from LCD assembly
9.2 Remove four standoffs, starwashers, and braces 9.5 Remove LCD from upper FP
securing LCD to assembly (see Figure 3-10).
906-2020-501 3-7
®
10 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB 12 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1511-501)

10.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis. Tilt upper level back until it rests in the reclined
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back position (approximately 90°).
position.
12.3 Remove 7mm nut securing ground strap to
10.3 Disconnect A8J3. chassis.
10.4 Remove four 2.5mm hex screws securing 12.4 Disconnect A8P4 through A8P7.
7 Segment Display PCB to upper FP skin (see NOTE: Be careful not to drop screws securing
Figure 3-12). connector A8P4. They are not captive screws.
12.5 Disconnect cable W49 at CN2 on LCD.
12.6 Loosen four captive screws securing Upper Front
Panel to chassis. Remove Upper Front Panel.
13 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for

202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
Figure 3-12
Removing the 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-
501 Upper Front Panel)
Figure 3-13
11 Removal of Touch Screen Front Panel Controller PCB (for
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
11.1 Remove LCD (per step 9) and 7 Segment

Display PCB (per step 10). 13.1 Remove Upper Front Panel per step 12.
11.2 Remove four standoffs and two 2.5mm hex 13.2 Disconnect A8P8 from FP Controller PCB.
screws securing Touch Screen to Upper FP skin. 13.3 Disconnect A8P3 from FP Controller PCB.
13.4 Disconnect ribbon cable connectors P1 and P2
from FP Controller PCB.
13.5 Disconnect LCD backlight connectors from CN2
and CN3 on LCD Inverter.
13.6 Carefully pull PCB from standoffs. Pull from one
standoff at a time starting with those located near
the edge of the PCB.
3-8 906-2020-501
®
14 Removal of LCD, Touch Screen, and Keypad

14.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 13.
14.2 Remove six nuts and washers securing LCD and
bracket to assembly (see Figure 3-14). Remove
LCD and bracket from Upper FP. The Touch
Screen and Keypad can also be removed from the
Upper FP at this time.
14.3 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing LCD to
bracket. Remove LCD from bracket.
15 Removal of LCD Backlight

15.1 Remove LCD per step 14.
15.2 Slide backlight out of LCD (see Figure 3-15).
Figure 3-15
Location of LCD Backlights
Figure 3-14
Exploded View of 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel
906-2020-501 3-9
®
16 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB 18 Removal of Receiver Mechanism Assembly

18.1 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3.
18.2 Remove hitch pin securing cassette release lever
16.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of to latch release coupler on Receiver Mechanism
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis. Assembly.
position. 18.3 Disconnect A3P3 and A3P5 through A3P7 from
Air/Fluid Controller PCB.
16.3 Disconnect A8J3.
18.4 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting tubing
16.4 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing from Receiver Mechanism Assembly to Side
7 Segment Display PCB to upper FP skin (see Header on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (see
Figure 3-16). Figure 3-17 for location of Side Header).
18.5 Loosen two captive screws securing End Header
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (see Figure 3-17).
Side Header Captive Screws
Figure 3-16
Removing 7 Segment Display PCB End Header Captive Screws
Figure 3-17
17 Removal of Power Supply Captive Screws Securing End Header to
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
17.1 Unplug power cord from rear panel.
17.2 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3. 18.6 Remove two 3mm hex screws securing bottom of
Receiver Mechanism Assembly to chassis (see
17.3 Remove flexible air duct hose connecting Figure 3-18).
illuminator fan to rear panel.
17.4 Disconnect A16P1 through A16P4 from Power
Supply.
17.5 Loosen captive screw securing front of Power
Supply.
17.6 Remove four 2.5mm hex screws securing Power
Supply to rear panel.
17.7 Pull Power Supply out through front of system to
remove.
3-10 906-2020-501
®
20.4 Cut tie wraps as necessary to separate Pressure/

Vacuum Manifold cables from other cable
assemblies.
20.5 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting tubing
from Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly (T2)
Top Screw
to Pneumatic Connector Manifold (T2).
20.6 Loosen two captive screws securing side header
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold and pull header
away from manifold (see Figure 3-17).
20.7 Disconnect A3P1, A3P2, and A3P4 from Air/
Fluid Controller PCB.
20.8 Loosen two 3/32 inch hex screws securing Air/
Fluid Controller PCB to chassis. Carefully pull
PCB up to remove from system.
Bottom 20.9 Loosen two 3mm hex screws securing Pressure/
Screws
Vacuum Manifold Assembly to chassis (see
Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19).
Screws Securing Receiver Mechanism
Assembly to Chassis
18.7 Remove 2.5mm hex screw securing top of

Receiver Mechanism Assembly to chassis.
18.8 Carefully pull Receiver Mechanism Assembly
out through front of system to remove.
19 Removal of Cassette Release Lever

19.2 Remove hitch pin securing Cassette Release
Lever to latch release coupler on Receiver
Manifold
Mechanism Assembly.
Screws
19.3 On rear panel, rotate release lever 90° to gain
access to screws securing Cassette Release Lever
to rear panel.
19.4 Remove two 2mm hex screws securing Cassette White
Muffler
Release Lever to rear panel.
19.5 Pull Cassette Release Lever out through rear of
system to remove.
20 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold

Assembly (see step 21 for alternate method)
20.1 Remove Cassette Release lever per step 19. Figure 3-19
Screws Securing Pressure/Vacuum
202 Remove Receiver Mechanism per step 18. Manifold Assembly to Chassis
20.3 Disconnect tubing from water filter on Main Air
Source Assembly. Pull back on red fitting to 20.10 Grasp large white muffler and carefully guide
release tubing. Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly up and out
of system.
906-2020-501 3-11
®
21 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Solenoid Connections on Main Air Source

Assembly Without Removing Receiver Receiver Mechanism Assembly
Mechanism
21.1 Remove Cassette Release lever per step 19.
21.2 Disconnect green tubing from water filter on
Main Air Source Assembly. Pull back on red
fitting to release tubing.
21.3 Cut tie wraps as necessary to separate Pressure/
Vacuum Manifold cables from other cable
assemblies.
21.4 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting green
tubing from Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
Assembly (T2) to Pneumatic Connector
Manifold (T2). Low Pressure Pump
21.5 Loosen two captive screws securing side header Figure 3-20
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold and pull header Interference Points Encountered When Removing
away from manifold. Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly from Chassis
21.6 Disconnect A3P1, A3P2, and A3P4 from Air/
Fluid Controller PCB.
21.7 Loosen two 3/32 inch hex screws securing Air/
Fluid Controller PCB to chassis. Carefully pull
PCB up to remove from system.
21.8 Loosen two 3mm hex screws securing Pressure/
Vacuum Manifold Assembly to chassis.
21.9 Grasp large white muffler and carefully guide
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly up and out
of system as shown in Figures 3-20 through 3-22.
NOTE: Figure 3-20 shows the main
interference points when removing the
manifold. Figure 3-21
Grasp Proportional Valve and Lift Rear Manifold Up
While Pushing Low Pressure Pump Back
Figure 3-22
Remove Manifold from System as Shown.
3-12 906-2020-501
®
22 Removal of Transducer PCB 23 Removal of Main Air Source Assembly

22.1 Remove Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly 23.1 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3.
per step 20 or 21.
23.2 Remove Pressure/Vacuum Manifold per step 20
22.2 Disconnect A7P1, A7P3, and A7P4 from or 21.
Transducer PCB; and M2P16 and M2P17 from
solenoids L2 and L3. 23.3 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing Main Air
Source Assembly to rear panel.
22.3 Remove seven 2.5mm hex screws securing
Transducer PCB to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold 23.4 Remove Main Air Source Assembly from
Assembly. system.
CAUTION 24 Removal of Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS)

Do not touch exposed transducers (MT5 and MT6) as Assembly
this will affect their function and accuracy.
O-rings and spacers are not captive to PCB; slowly 24.2 Disconnect A14J1 through A14J10 from LPA/
remove PCB to avoid displacement of O-rings and Illuminator Controller PCB.
spacers.
24.3 Disconnect tubing from T16 and T17 on LPAS.
22.4 Carefully pull Transducer PCB up to remove.
24.4 Disconnect tubing from MT1 and MT2 on LPAS/
Replacement: Ensure that O-rings and spacers
Illuminator Controller PCB.
are properly positioned in manifold when
replacing Transducer PCB (see Figure 3-23). 24.5 Loosen two 3/32 inch screws securing LPA/
CAUTION: Do not touch exposed
Illuminator Controller PCB to chassis. Lift PCB
transducers MT5 & MT6. up and out of system.
O-rings (4) 24.6 Loosen three 3mm hex screws securing LPAS to
chassis.
Spacers (4)
24.7 Lift LPAS out of system.
Transducer
PCB
Figure 3-23
Bottom of Transducer PCB Showing Installation of
Spacers and O-Rings
906-2020-501 3-13
®
25 General Procedure for Removal of Regulators 27 Removal of System (Host) Computer

RG2 and RG3 (on Press/Vac Manifold), R1
and RV1 (on LPAS Manifold), and RV1 (on
Main Air Source). 27.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
25.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of position.
26.3 Remove all cables connected to Host except for
the three connected to J4, J22, and J24 on the PC
position.
Card.
25.3 Remove four hex screws securing regulator to
27.4 Return upper level back to horizontal position.
manifold.
27.5 Loosen four captive screws securing Host to
25.4 Carefully lift regulator from manifold. O-ring
upper chassis.
will probably stick to regulator.
Replacement: Remove O-ring from regulator and 27.6 Carefully remove Host from system.
position in manifold. Replace with new O-ring if
necessary. Replacement Notes:
• When replacing the Host, use Field Service Host Assembly
25.6 Place regulator in manifold and secure using four PN 202-1616-501. This kit includes a new Host, a jumper,
hex screws. Alternately tighten each screw until and instructions for installing the new host.
regulator is secure. Reference assembly drawing
in Section Seven for further information. For Model 600DS Systems:
• Transfer Sound PCB from old Host to new Host. The
Sound PCB contains the model type configuration and
doctor's memory settings, and will transfer this
26 General Procedure for Replacement of information to the CPU upon boot-up.
EPROMs on Controller PCBs
For Model 400VS Systems:
26.1 Ensure console is in "power off" state at Power • To transfer doctor's memory settings to a new Host
Supply rear panel switch. installed on a 400VS system (no upgrade), perform the
26.2 Remove assemblies as necessary to gain access following steps:
a) Transfer Sound PCB from old Host to new Host.
to Controller PCB containing EPROM to be
b) Boot-up system.
replaced. c) Shut down system.
26.3 Using an EPROM removal tool, carefully d) Reinstall new Sound PCB into new Host.
remove EPROM from socket on Controller PCB.
• Be sure to document serial numbers of any PCB's
exchanged.
WARNING!
The EPROM socket is fragile. If EPROM is not
removed carefully, the socket may crack or break.
26.4 Install new EPROM into socket. Match beveled

edge with small dot on EPROM to beveled edge
on socket.
3-14 906-2020-501
®
SECTION FOUR
SERVICE TEST PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION
This section of the service manual is reserved for storage

of the Accurus® Service Test Procedure and Checklist.
Each time a field engineer visits a customer it is required

that he perform a system checkout on the customer's
Alcon equipment. The checkout is performed by
following instructions written in the Service Test
Procedure, then returning its associated Checklist to the
local service support center for filing.
The Service Test Procedure for the Accurus® is an

independent document, and can be ordered from the
local service support center by using the following part
number:
78.40.578
906-2020-501 4-1
®
4-2 906-2020-501
®
SECTION FIVE
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL INFORMATION The Accurus® performs "Self Check" diagnostics during
boot-up and continuously monitors all subsystems during
This section of the manual contains information to assist
operation. If a problem occurs, the Front Panel displays a
the Field Engineer in maintenance and troubleshooting of
message indicating the type of problem. These messages
the Accurus®.
are listed in Tables 5-7 through 5-13.
Tables 5-1 through 5-4 list tools, spares, test supplies, NOTE: Record all information displayed in the popup
and hardware which may be used when servicing the window screen before recycling power.
Accurus®.
• Table 5-7. System Information Messages for
• Table 5-1. Recommended Tools ......................... 5-2 Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue) ................. 5-11
• Table 5-2. Recommended Spares ....................... 5-3 • Table 5-8. System Information Messages for
• Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies ............ 5-3 Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue) ................. 5-13
• Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware .................. 5-4 • Table 5-9. Advisory Messages for
Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green) ............... 5-17
Maintenance procedures are provided for the following • Table 5-10. Advisory Messages for
items: Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green) ............... 5-23
• Table 5-11. Error Codes for Software
• Fuse and Voltage Selection ................................. 5-5 Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow) ............................ 5-30
• Backup Low Pressure Adjustment ...................... 5-6 • Table 5-12. Error Codes for Software
• Replacement of Filter on Main Air Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow) ............................ 5-37
Source Assembly ................................................ 5-6 • Table 5-13. Fault Codes for All Software
• Illuminator Bulb Replacement ............................ 5-7 Versions (Red) .................................................... 5-44
• Illuminator Optics Cleaning ................................ 5-7
• CPC Connector Replacement ............................. 5-8 Table 5-14 contains Power On Self Test (POST) codes
• Receiver Latch Vacuum Seal Replacement ........ 5-8 used by the CPU. If there is an error during the boot
• Diathermy Calibration ........................................ 5-9 cycle one of these codes is displayed on POST Code
• Adjustment of Regulators RG2 and RG3 on Display located on the Power/Signal Distribution PCB.
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold ................................ 5-9
• Table 5-14. POST Code Definitions ................... 5-46
General troubleshooting information contained in Table
5-6 lists common problems found in the system and
actions necessary to correct the problems.
• Table 5-6. General Troubleshooting ................... 5-10
906-2020-501 5-1
®
Table 5-1. Recommended Tools
ITEM TOOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
1 Standard Service Tool kit Standard tools including:

• Slotted screwdriver (small and narrow)
• Metric Hex (Allen) Wrench set
• Standard Hex (Allen) Wrench set
• Static protection wrist strap (ESD)
• Hemostat
• 15/16 wrench for Schrader connector
removal
2 Oscilloscope or DVM Capable of measuring:

• 43 Vrms at a frequency up to 360 Khz.
• AC Volts: 0 to 150
• DC Volts: 0 to 150
• Resistance: 0 to infinite
3 Vacuum Pressure Meter Capable of measuring:

• 0 to 600 mmHg (vacuum)
• 0 to 100 psi (pressure)
• 0-120mmHg (pressure)
4 IC Extraction Tool Reference AMP PN 821981-1 or

generic PLCC extraction tool
5 Sensor Test Tools Tools used for cassette and fluid level Alcon P/N 995-2020-019
simulation - 2 required
6 Cautery Test Load 75 ohm +/- 1% (non-inductive) Alcon P/N 995-2000-047
7 Fragmentation Handpiece Alcon P/N 202-1479-501
Cleaning Agent: reagent For cleaning illuminator optics

8 grade alcohol, acetone, or
methanol
9 Lens Tissue For cleaning illuminator optics
5-2 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-2. Recommended Spares
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
1 202-1014-501E LPAS/ Illuminator Controller PCB 1

2 202-1015-501E Front Panel Controller PCB 1
3 202-1176-501E Receiver Mechanism 1
4 202-1243-501E Pressure/Vacuum Manifold 1
5 202-1247-501E Pneumatic Connector Assembly 1
6 202-1332-501E Air/Fluid Controller PCB 1
7 202-1457-501E LPAS/Standby Power PCB 1
8 202-1331-501E U/S Diathermy Controller 1
9 394-1100-501E Diathermy Driver 1
10 200-1546-501E U/S Driver 1
11 202-1275-501 HP LED PCB 1
12 202-1016-501 Receiver Mechanism PCB 1
13 202-1013-501E Transducer PCB 1
14 202-1334-001 Female CPC Connector 2
15 202-1333-001 Male CPC Connector 4
16 202-1230-001 Cassette Latch Seal 2
17 202-3103-501E LPAS Manifold Assy 1
18 774-075 O-ring 5
Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
1 893-513 Male CPC Fitting 2

2 893-512 Female CPC Fitting 2
3 893-420 Male Luer Plug 2
4 893-499 Female Luer Plug 2
5 893-432 Female to Female Adapter 2
6 893-344 Male to Male Adapter 2
7 812-1417-001 Tubing Tri-Lumen 1
8 043-028 Test Tubing 2 feet
9 893-242 Male Luer Fitting 2
10 893-397 Female Luer Fitting 2
11 812-1499-601 Anterior Test Cassette 1
12 812-1465-603 Posterior Test Cassette 1
13 995-2020-019 Sensor Test Tool 2
14 043-004 Tubing 2 inches
15 403-025 Check Valve 2
16 202-1447-506 Software Flash Card, V1.11 1
906-2020-501 5-3
®
Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware

ITEM # WHERE PART
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
ON DWG USED NUMBER
004 Console 813-003 NUT,HEX,M5X0.8 W/LOCK WASHER 2

016 Console 809-010 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M5X10 SST 2
019 Console 825-016 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X16 SST 2
023 Console 825-019 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X30 SST 2
027 Console 026-030 CLAMP,CABLE,.312 DIA NYL WHT 1
032 Console 797-085 WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST 2
046 Console 800-203 WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST 4
049 Console 813-002 WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST 1
050 Console 797-063 WASHER,EXT LOCK.17X.38X.02 SST 1
053 Console 801-004 WASHER,FLAT,M4 SST 1
054 Console 027-002 CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL 5
075 Console/Post Ops 825-020 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X35 SST 5
045 Footpedal 809-007 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M4X10 SST 3
018 Illuminator 026-029 CLAMP,CABLE,.250 DIA NYL WHT 1

021 Illuminator 784-190 SCREW,PH SLT,M4X16 NYLON 1
023 Illuminator 809-002 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST 2
024 Illuminator 807-014 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X10 SST 3
006 Lower Front Panel 825-001 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X5 SST 3

007 Lower Front Panel 801-003 WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST 3
015 LPAS 825-015 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X12 SST 2
010 Manifold 788-075 SPACER,ROUND,6MMX6MM AL 4

011 Manifold 825-004 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X10 SST 3
013 Manifold 825-008 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X25 SST 4
026 Manifold 774-073 O-RING,.125X.250X.062,NITRILE 4
N/A Manifold 774-075 O-RING,.145X.285X.070,BUNA-N 6
011 Pneumatic Conn. 774-135 O-RING,.158X.047,BUNA-N 2
006 Posterior Options 819-005 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST BLK 1

008 Posterior Options 825-018 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X25 SST 2
017 Receiver Mech 202-1230-001 LATCH, SEAL 1

030 Receiver Mech 825-002 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST 2
008 Upper Front Panel 801-003 WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST 2

010 Upper Front Panel 825-006 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X16 SST 1
011 Upper Front Panel 800-203 WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST 2
017 Upper Front Panel 825-002 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST 2
019 Upper Front Panel 026-074 CLAMP,CABLE,.25X.375 NYL BLK 1
024 Upper Front Panel 775-009 GASKET,.125X.30X.020,BUNA N 2
025 Upper Front Panel 813-001 NUT,HEX,M3X0.5 W/LOCK WASHER 2
5-4 906-2020-501
®
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
3 Push gently to the right until tab releases fuse drawer.

FUSE AND VOLTAGE SELECTION NOTE: This must be done gently to ensure the tab
does not break.
The Accurus® system is configured to 115 VAC with 10
amp fuses. Voltage and fuse/fuse drawer selection must 4 Ease the fuse drawer out of the Fuse Module as
be performed for systems using input power levels of shown in Figure 5-2.
100, 220, and 240 VAC. Table 5-5 lists the various FUSE FUSES FUSE
voltage selections and corresponding fuse ratings. DRAWER MODULE
Table 5-5. Fuse and Voltage Selection

LINE VOLTAGE FUSE RATING, ALCON
VOLTAGE SELECTION TYPE, SIZE P/N
100 VAC 100 VAC 10 AMP/250V, T, 130-023

1/4" x 1 1/4"
115 - 120 VAC* 120 VAC 10 AMP/250V, T, 130-023

1/4" x 1 1/4"
220 VAC 220 VAC 5 AMP/250V, T, 130-054

5 x 20 mm VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
230 - 240 VAC 240 VAC 5 AMP/250V, T, 130-054 JUMPER BOX
5 x 20 mm
Figure 5-2
* System is factory configured for 115 VAC Removal of the Fuse Drawer
NOTE: Use appropriate fuse drawer for 5 amp and 5 Gently remove and replace fuse(s).
10 amp fuses.
6 Reinsert fuse drawer; a snap is heard which indicates
CAUTION drawer is secured inside Fuse Module.
The Accurus® is shipped with a kit that contains the
7 Plug power cord back into Main Power Connector.
fuses and fuse drawer used for 220/240 VAC. Prior to
applying power levels of 220/240 VAC, the voltage
selector, fuses and fuse drawer must be changed or VOLTAGE SELECTION
damage may result.
1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of fuse replacement
FUSE REPLACEMENT procedure.
1 Unplug power cord from Main Power Connector on 2 Gently remove Voltage Selector Jumper Block,
Rear Panel. located in the far right section of the Fuse Module.
2 Insert a flat surfaced instrument into the Release Tab 3 Rotate Jumper Block to the preferred voltage (100,
opening located just to the left of the fuse drawer (see 120, 220, or 240).
Figure 5-1). 4 With selected voltage facing you, reinsert the Jumper
FUSE RELEASE
ON/OFF
MODULE TAB Block back into the Fuse Module.
SWITCH
5 Reinsert fuse drawer; a snap is heard which indicates
module is secured.
6 Plug power cord back into Main Power Connector.
FUSE
DRAWER
Figure 5-1
Fuse Module Location and Components
906-2020-501 5-5
®
BACKUP LOW PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT REPLACEMENT OF FILTER AND O-RING

ON MAIN AIR SOURCE ASSEMBLY
1 Remove Top Cover per procedure in Section Three.
1 Remove Main Air Source Assembly from system per
2 Loosen two screws securing front of upper level to
instructions in Section Three.
chassis and tilt upper level back to locked position.
2 Remove Housing from water filter assembly by
3 Power up the system.
turning the Housing counterclockwise.
4 For systems with software versions below 1.11:
3 Remove old O-ring and replace with new (see Figure
4.1 Turn on F/AX without any tubing connected. 5-3).
Advisory Error 318 appears.
4 Remove Filter and Filter Retainer by turning Retainer
4.2 Select “Yes” on the Advisory. Another message counterclockwise.
appears with “Backup” as an option.
5 Replace Filter and secure to water filter assembly
4.3 Select “Backup” and attach pressure meter to F/AX with Filter Retainer. The flat end of Filter faces up
connector. The pressure meter should read 30 mmHg. towards threads and rounded end is down, resting on
If not, proceed to the next step. the Filter Retainer.
4.4 Adjust R1 on the LPAS manifold (see Figure 3-5) 6 Replace Housing.
using a 9/64 inch hex wrench until backup pressure
7 Replace Main Air Source Assembly per instructions
reading is 30 ±5 mmHg.
in Section Three.
5 For systems with software versions 1.11 and above:
5.1 Turn on F/AX without any tubing connected. A
system advisory appears with the message "Check
VGFI/FAX Setup. Select 30 mmHg backup pressure,
or Ignore low pressure condition."
5.2 Select “30 mmHg” and attach pressure meter to
F/AX connector. The pressure meter should read 30
mmHg. If not, proceed to the next step.
5-3 Adjust R1 on the LPAS manifold (see Figure 3-5)
using a 9/64 inch hex wrench until backup pressure
reading is 30 ±5 mmHg.
Figure 5-3
Water Filter on Main Air Source
5-6 906-2020-501
®
ILLUMINATOR BULB REPLACEMENT ILLUMINATOR OPTICS CLEANING
To ensure secondary illuminator source availability at all The Illuminator optic elements (mirror and lenses) may
times, replace a burned out bulb immediately upon become dusty and/or spotted with use. In general, the
completion of surgery. optics can be cleaned using standard photographic lens
cleaning techniques as follows:
WARNING! Dusty Optics

The illuminator bulbs become extremely hot.
Never handle a bulb until it has cooled 1 Gently blow or brush the dust off the optic using an
considerably from its operating temperature. optics blower or canned air.
Do not touch bulb directly with fingers at any
time! CAUTION
Do not use your breath to blow off the optics. Human
breath contains acids which can damage optical
1 Push the Illuminator release button on the rear panel coating.
to eject illuminator drawer.
2 Pull the illuminator drawer out to full extension. Do Spotted Optics
not attempt to remove the burned out bulb until it is
cool to the touch. Required Supplies:
3 Using a soft cloth or protective glove, grip the bulb at • Cleaning agent such as reagent grade alcohol,
its base and pull out of socket. Discard bulb. acetone, or methanol. Ensure cleaning agent does
not contain free (condensed) water in the solution
4 Using a soft cloth or glove, insert the new bulb's two as it will spot optics.
leads into the two holes of the socket. Press the bulb • Lens tissue.
down until it is fully inserted into the socket. Gently
clean any smudges or dirt from the bulb with a soft 1 Place one or two drops of cleaning agent onto a
cloth. folded lens tissue.
2 Apply the wetted tissue to center of optic, and gently
CAUTION drag tissue in an overlapping spiral pattern to the
Handling bulb with bare hands can reduce brightness perimeter. Repeat if streaks appear.
and life of the bulb.
5 Ensure bulb is straight (see Figure 5-4).

To do this, look into the fiber optic
illuminator probe receptacle; the bulb ®
SURGICAL
filament should be centered within the

receptacle.
6 Gently push illuminator drawer back TM
into its receptacle. The illuminator is

now ready for use.
Filament is centered and level

within the receptacle
Figure 5-4
Bulb Alignment
906-2020-501 5-7
®
CPC CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT RECEIVER LATCH VACUUM SEAL

REPLACEMENT
This procedure tells how to replace the CPC connectors
on the top four pneumatic outputs located on the lower This procedure replaces the vacuum seal for the latch in
front panel. the Receiver Mechanism.
1 Place a 2 mm hex head wrench in the center of the 1 Turn system power OFF.
connector and turn counterclockwise until connector 2 Place a small allen wrench (approximately 3 mm)
separates from front panel. next to system. This wrench will be used in step four.
2 Line up notch on new CPC connector with post on 3 Pull and hold manual cassette release lever on rear
front panel and tighten connector with 2 mm hex panel. This will hold the latch in the up position.
head wrench (see Figure 5-5). Ensure that post rests
in notch so that plastic sleeve on connector does not 4 Insert the small leg of allen wrench into latch seal
rotate. hole and pull down to remove latch seal (see Figure
5-6).
CPC Connector
O-ring (PN 774-147) 5 Push new seal into latch.
Notch
O-ring (PN 774-146)
Latch
Post
Figure 5-5 Latch

CPC Connector Alignment Seal
Replacement of the O-ring

3 Use a small needle-nose pliers to carefully remove/
cut the O-ring.
4 Place O-ring over face of connector, press over
connector and into groove.
Figure 5-6
Removal of Latch Seal from
Receiver Mechanism
5-8 906-2020-501
®
8 Ensure Diathermy power is set to 100%. Set DMM to

DIATHERMY CALIBRATION read DC voltage and connect to MP9(+) and MP7(-)
on Erbe Coag PCB. Press Left vertical switch on
1 Prior to using cautery test load (PN 995-2000-047) footswitch and verify that reading is 3.96 to 4.04
verify load box resistance. VDC (nominal is 4.00). If not within specifications,
adjust TP4 on Erbe Coag PCB.
1.1 Ensure that the banana plugs of the cautery test load
are not connected to any jacks (open). 9 Remove Diathermy load box and Scopemeter.
1.2 Verify the resistance across the two test points of

cautery test load is 75.0 +/- 4.0 ohms. ADJUSTMENT OF REGULATORS RG2 AND RG3
2 Turn system power on. ON PRESSURE/VACUUM MANIFOLD
3 Insert cautery test load into Diathermy output jacks Perform the following steps when regulator output does
on the front panel. Connect oscilloscope to output of not meet specification listed on Service Test Procedure.
load box. Set Diathermy power to 100. NOTE: Be aware that a pressure leak elsewhere in the
4 Press Left Vertical switch on footswitch. Verify system may be affecting the regulator output.
frequency is 323 to 357 KHz (nominal is 340). If not
within specifications, remove top cover and adjust 1 Using blue metric tubing, connect a pressure meter to
TP2 on Erbe Coag PCB (see Figure 5-7). pneumatic test port TP2 (30psi) or TP3 (57psi) on
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold.
5 Verify Vrms is 38.8 to 42.4 (nominal is 40.6). If not
within specifications, Adjust TP1 on Erbe Coag PCB. 2 Locate regulator RG3 (30psi) or RG2 (57psi), and
use a 3/32 allen wrench to increase pressure to
6 Set Diathermy power to 0. Verify amplitude is less specification listed on Service Test Procedure.
than 0.7 Vrms.
3 Remove tubing and pressure meter.
7 While continuing to depress footswitch, increase
power on front panel in increments of 10 up to 100.
Verify increase of 2.8 to 4.24 Vrms for each
increment of 10.
TP = Trim Pot MP = Measure Point

TP4 TP1 TP2
J2 MP7
MP9
L1
ERBE
Figure 5-7
Erbe Coag PCB Layout
906-2020-501 5-9
®
Table 5-6
General Troubleshooting
CONDITION OR POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

ERROR MESSAGE
System won’t turn ON. No electrical power supplied to system. Check electrical plug connection.
Check fuses on rear panel.
Check power source and fuses.
Bad power supply. Replace power supply.
Blank or logo screen only. System has detected a power on self test Cycle power. Check cables between host module and
error due to corrupted data or bad host power supply.
module.
Bad power supply. Check power supply voltages and replace power
supply if necessary.
Low pressure. Air pressure supply is less than 60 psi. Check air supply.
Set external regulator between 90-120 psi.
Check air supply hose and connections.
Internal pressure leak. Verify pressure at 85 psi test point on Main Air Source
Manifold.
Unable to acheive low Patient eye level setting incorrect. Check and, if necessary, correct the patient eye level
vacuum. setting.
Regurgitation or backflow. Vacuum too low. Check and, if necessary, increase vacuum level.
Cassette is above the patient eye level. Check and, if necessary, adjust the patient eye level in
the infusion setup screen.
Illuminator drawer will not Misalignment of electrical connector. Adjust lamp socket cable connector until illuminator
release. drawer properly releases.
5-10 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-7
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS
1 “Prime was not successfully The Surg key was pressed to enter A Continue key is on the popup to
performed. Press Test to the surgery modes. remove the popup and go to the
prime.” Surgery modes.
Prime was not successfully
performed. A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime cycle if a handpiece is selected.
Priming is considered successful Otherwise, pressing this key just
even if it was aborted. removes the popup.
2 “Prime and tune were not The Surg key was pressed to enter An OK key is on the popup to remain in
successfully performed. the surgery modes, and the Frag Setup mode.
Press Test to prime/tune.” handpiece is selected but it was not
primed or tuned successfully. A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime/tune cycle.
3 “Tune was not successfully The Surg key was pressed to enter An OK key is on the popup to remain in
performed. Press Test to the surgery modes, and the Frag Setup mode.
prime/tune.” handpiece is selected, but it was
not tuned successfuly. A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime/tune cycle.
4 “Press Continue to turn off the The F/AX key was pressed, the A Continue key is on the popup to turn
air pump.” BSS+ infusion type is GFI, and the pump off and deselect and dim both
F/AX is currently in use. the F/AX and BSS+ Infusion keys and
their LEDs.
The BSS+ Infusion key was
pressed, the infusion type is GFI, A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
and GFI is currently in use. in the current state.
5 “Press Continue to begin The F/A key was pressed, and A Continue key is on the popup to
Fluid/Air Exchange BSS+ Infusion is currently in use. enable F/AX.
(F/AX).”
A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
in the current state.
6 “Press Continue to begin The BSS+ Infusion key was A Continue key is on the popup to
infusion.” pressed, and F/AX is currently in enable infusion.
use.
A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
The F/A key was pressed, the Auto in the current state.
stopcock is selected, Manual
infusion is selected, and F/A is
currently in use.
7 “Priming is in progress. Either cassette port is being primed. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” priming.
A Skip key is on the popup to begin the

probe test or tuning.
The popup is automatically removed

when priming is complete.
906-2020-501 5-11
®
Table 5-7
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue)
8 “Tuning is in progress. The Frag handpiece is being tuned. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” tuning.

when tuning is complete.
9 “Testing is in progress. A Vit probe is being tested. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” testing.

when testing is complete.
10 “Cleaning is in progress. The cassette is being purged. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” purging.

when purging is complete.
11 “Use footswitch to control The global Diathermy key was A Continue key is on the popup to
diathermy on/off.” pressed. remove it.
12 “Please select a handpiece The Test key was pressed and a An OK key is on the popup to remove
for Test.” handpiece key is not selected for it.
test.
13 For software versions below The Yes key was pressed on error A BACK-UP key is on the popup to put
version 1.11: 318 popup indicating that the GFI the module into mechanical default.
"A Fault Has Been Detected! line is connected.
Press BACK-UP to set the An Ignore key is on the popup to return
GFI, F/AX (BSS) to 30 to the error 318 popup.
mmHg.”
14 For software versions 1.11 VGFI or FAX is on but nothing is A BACK-UP key is on the popup to put
and above: connected to port. the module into mechanical default.
"Check VGFI/FAX Setup or
choose 30 mmHg non- An OK key is on the popup allowing
adjustable backup pressure." you to connect a fitting.
5-12 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-8
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue)
1 “Prime was not successfully The Surg key was pressed to enter • A Continue key is on the popup to
performed. Press Test to the surgery modes and prime was remove the popup and go to the
prime.” not successfully performed. Surgery modes.
Priming is considered successful • A Test key is on the popup to start
even if it was aborted. the prime cycle if a handpiece is
selected. Otherwise, pressing this
key just removes the popup.
2 “Prime and tune were not The Surg key was pressed to enter • An OK key is on the popup to remain
successfully performed. the surgery modes, and a U/S in Setup mode.
Press Test to prime/tune.” handpiece is selected but it was not • A Test key is on the popup to start
primed or tuned successfully. the prime/tune cycle.
3 “Tune was not successfully The Surg key was pressed to enter • An OK key is on the popup to remain
performed. Press Test to the surgery modes, and a U/S in Setup mode.
prime/tune.” handpiece is selected, but it was • A Test key is on the popup to start
not tuned successfully. the prime/tune cycle.
4 “Press Continue to turn off the • The F/AX key was pressed, the • A Continue key is on the popup to
air pump.” BSS+ infusion type is VGFI or turn the pump off and deselect and
Gravity, and F/AX is currently in dim both the F/AX and BSS+
use. Infusion keys and their LEDs.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
• The BSS+ Infusion key was remain in the current state.
pressed, the infusion type is
VGFI, and VGFI is currently in
use.
5 “Priming is in progress. Either cassette port is being primed. • A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” priming.
• A Skip key is on the popup to begin
the probe test or tuning.
• The popup is automatically removed
when priming is complete.
6 “Tuning is in progress. A U/S handpiece is being tuned. • A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” tuning.
when tuning is complete.
7 “Testing is in progress. A Vit probe is being tested. • A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” testing.
when testing is complete.
8 “Cleaning is in progress. The cassette is being purged. • A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” purging.
when purging is complete.
906-2020-501 5-13
®
Table 5-8
9 “Use footswitch to control The global Diathermy key was • A “Continue” key is on the popup to
diathermy on/off.” pressed. remove it.
10 “Please select a handpiece The Test key was pressed and a • An OK key is on the popup to remove
for Test.” handpiece key is not selected for it.
test.
11 “Do you want to apply the The Exit key was pressed in the • A Yes key is on the popup to apply
Presets values to the Doctor Presets screen after the presets.
system?” 1) modifications have been made to • A No key is on the popup to exit
values in the current domain or the without applying the presets.
common presets, or 2) a new doctor
or memory was retrieved.
12 “Press Continue to save The Save key was pressed on the • A Continue key is on the popup to
Presets values.” Presets screen or on the Quick save the presets.
Save popup and the current doctor • A Cancel key is on the popup to
has no PIN protection. cancel the save request.
13 “Press Continue to delete The Delete key was pressed on the • A Continue key is on the popup to
doctor.” Presets screen and the current delete the doctor.
doctor has no PIN protection. • A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel the delete request.
14 “Invalid PIN. Please re-enter.” The Enter key was pressed • The current PIN entry is cleared so
following a PIN entry and the PIN is the user can re-enter the PIN.
invalid.
15 “PINs do not match. Re- The Enter key was pressed • The current PIN entry is cleared so
enter.” following a PIN confirmation entry that the user can re-enter the PIN.
and the entry does not match the • An invalid key tone is emitted.
first PIN entry.
16 “Insert Alcon PC card to The PIN Override key was pressed • A Continue key is on the popup to
override the PIN, then press on the PIN entry popup. remove it and detect the PC card. If
Continue.” an Alcon PC card is detected, the
PIN entry requirement is overridden
and the PIN entry screen is removed.
If an Alcon PC card is not detected, a
popup is displayed indicating this to
the user.
cancel PIN Override.
17 “The PC Card is invalid or is The PIN Override popup is • An OK key is on the popup to remove
not inserted correctly.” displayed, the Continue key was it and display the PIN Override
pressed, and an Alcon PC card was popup.
not detected.
5-14 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-8
18 “The system is at the The New key was pressed on the • An OK key is on the popup to
maximum number of doctors Presets screen and the system is at remove it.
available.” the maximum number of doctors
allowed.
19 “Duplicate entry. Please enter The Enter key was pressed on the • An OK key is on the popup to
a different name.” Keyboard screen to enter a new remove it.
doctor name and the doctor name
currently exists.
20 “Do you want to protect your The Enter key was pressed on the • A Yes key is on the popup to display
Presets with a PIN?” Keyboard screen to enter a new the PIN entry popup.
doctor and the entry is valid. • A No key is on the popup to skip PIN
entry.
21 “Select PIN request.” The PIN key was pressed on the • An Add key is on the popup to enter
Presets screen. a PIN.
• A Modify key is on the popup to
change the existing PIN.
• A Remove key is on the popup to
remove PIN protection.
cancel the PIN request.
• The popup is removed regardless of
which key is pressed.
• The PIN entry popup is displayed if
the Add, Modify, or Remove keys are
pressed.
22 “Continuing will disable all The Memories key was pressed to • A popup is displayed indicating
footswitch and global function enter the Presets screens. “Continuing will disable all footswitch
controls.” and global function controls.”
• A Continue is on the popup to enter
the Presets screen of the current
domain. The illuminators, irrigation,
infusion, and LPA are left in their
current state of on or off. The
Continue is disabled as long as the
footswitch treadle is depressed, or
the left horizontal, right horizontal,
left vertical, or heel switches are
depressed, or micro-reflux is active.
remove it and remain in the current
mode.
23 “Do you want to restore the The system is powered on following • A Yes key is on the popup for full
system’s previous settings a power failure or after the system system recovery.
and mode?” is powered down using the main • A No key is on the popup to bring up
power switch (located on the rear the system defaults.
panel).
906-2020-501 5-15
®
Table 5-8
24 “Updating memory…” • Doctor presets are being saved • The popup is removed when the
or deleted. memory operation is complete.
• A doctor is being added, edited or
deleted.
25 “Please disable write The system is executing from a • A Continue key is on the popup to
protection on PC card, then software installation PC card and it remove it, check the write protection,
press Continue.” is write protected. and proceed with the s/w installation.
If write protection is still enabled, the
popup remains displayed.
cancel the s/w installation
26 “Continuing will disable all The Exit key was pressed to go to • A Continue key is on the popup to
active functions.” the Procedure Select screen and a enter the Procedure Select screen.
global function is active All active functions are turned off,
including the global functions.
remove it and remain in the current
mode.
27 “Installation card has been The Install key was pressed in the • An OK key is on the popup to remove
used. Please insert a new System Configuration screen, and the popup.
card to perform upgrade.” the PC card has been previously
used to install software.
28 “Installation card is write Installation card is write protected • Pressing OK removes the popup.
protected. Please remove and a install is attempted.
protection and press OK.”
29 “Installation card not detected. Installation card is removed before • Pressing OK removes the popup.
Please insert card and install key is pressed. Install key is
press OK.” pressed with card missing.
5-16 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)
1 “Footswitch not detected. The footswitch is not connected. An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please check for proper it.
connection.”
Any function not requiring the
footswitch is still available.
The popup is removed if the footswitch

is connected.
The popup is only redisplayed if the

footswitch is connected, then
disconnected again.
2 “Alcon Ultrasonic h/p not The installed U/S handpiece ID An OK key is on the popup to remove
detected. Check for proper does not match the Frag handpiece it.
installation.” ID.
No attempt will be made to tune this
handpiece if the Test key is pressed.
The popup is removed if all

unrecognized handpieces are
disconnected.
The popup is only redisplayed if the

unrecognized handpiece is removed,
then reconnected.
3 “Please install an Alcon The Test key was pressed when the An OK key is on the popup to remove
Ultrasonic handpiece.” Frag handpiece is selected but not it.
connected.
If the popup was displayed because the
Frag mode was entered and the Test key was pressed, prime is not
Frag handpiece is not connected. started.
The system is in Frag mode and the The popup is removed if the Frag
Frag handpiece was removed. handpiece is connected. If the popup
was displayed because the Test key
The treadle is depressed in Frag was pressed, prime is started.
mode when the Frag handpiece is
not connected. In Frag mode, frag and vac are not
available at the footswitch.
4 “Ultrasonic handpiece is not Frag handpiece was just connected An OK key is on the popup to remove
tuned. Press Test to prime/ (so it is not tuned) and system is in it.
tune.” Frag mode.
A Test key is on the popup to start
Treadle is depressed in Frag mode prime/tune.
and Frag handpiece is connected
but not tuned. The popup is redisplayed each time
Frag mode is entered, or when the
Error occurred (U/S h/p current out of treadle is again depressed in Frag
range or U/S frequency error too mode.
large), causing h/p to lose tuning and
system is in Frag mode.
906-2020-501 5-17
®
Table 5-9
5 “Ultrasonic handpiece tune Frag tuning failed. An OK key is on the popup to remove
failure. Check tip for proper it.
installation.”
In Frag mode, frag and vacuum are not
available.
6 “Priming unsuccessful. Fluid No fluid intake was detected during An OK key is on the popup to remove
not detected in cassette. the prime sequence. it.
Please attempt re-prime.”
If the Surg key is pressed, the
Information popup indicating prime was
not performed will still be displayed.
7 “Bulb failure detected. Either bulb is burned out. An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please replace bulb.” it.
The Bulb key of a burned out bulb
was pressed. The bulb icon is greyed and covered
with a red “x”.
If the burned out bulb is replaced, the

popup is removed and the normal bulb
icon is displayed.
8 “Cassette is not ready. The cassette is not installed or did An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please check cassette for not pass the vacuum test and the it.
proper installation.” Test key pressed.
If the popup was triggered because the
The cassette is not installed or did Test key was pressed, prime is not
not pass the vacuum test, the Vit started.
key, Frag key, or Extrude key is
pressed, and the system enters the The popup is removed if the cassette is
mode. installed and passes the vacuum test.
9 “Drainbag may be full. Approximately 500 cc of fluid have An OK key is on the popup to remove
PLEASE REPLACE been drained into the bag. The fluid it.
CASSETTE.” cc count is reset whenever the
cassette is ejected. The popup is removed if the cassette is
removed.
The popup is redisplayed the next time

the bag is full after a new cassette is
installed.
10 “Cassette failed vacuum test. The cassette failed the vacuum test An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please eject and reinsert, or and the cassette ID is valid. The it.
replace cassette.” vacuum test will be executed when
a cassette is installed and the Vit, Frag, and Extrude Vac functions
system is in a Setup mode or a are not available at the footswitch.
mode that uses vacuum. The Pressing the Test key will cause no
vacuum test is executed once for action.
each cassette insertion.
5-18 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-9
11 “Cassette type is incorrect. The cassette failed the vacuum test An OK key is on the popup to remove
Ensure appropriate cassette and cassette ID is invalid. it.
is installed.”
Vit, Frag, and Extrude Vac functions
are not available at the footswitch.
Pressing the Test key will cause no
action.
12 “Please adjust supply source The detected internal A/F module Vac, vit, frag, scisr, Extrude vac, and
pressure from 90 to 120 psi.” source pressure is less than 80 psi. VFC are all turned off.
No keys are displayed on the popup.
The popup is removed when a certain

location on the poup is pressed. This
location will be only be known to Alcon
personnel to allow demonstration of the
system without air.
The popup is removed once pressure is

within its valid range.
The popup will only be redisplayed if

pressure is put within its valid range,
then drops below it again.
Vit, Frag, Scisr, Extrude, and VFC

modes can be entered, but these
functions are not provided at the
footswitch.
13 “Vacuum surges detected. The vacuum level exceeds its upper Vac, frag, and vit are turned off.
Check aspiration lines and tolerance.
connections for leaks.” An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Once the popup is removed, all

functions are available again.
The submodule processes new set

points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
14 “Pressure surges detected. Proportional pressure exceeds its VFC and proportional scissors are
Check VFC/Scissors lines upper tolerance. turned off.
and connections for leaks.”
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.


906-2020-501 5-19
®
Table 5-9
15 “Pressure surges detected. Proportional pressure transducer VFC and proportional scissors are
Check Scissors/VFC lines discrepancy (this may be a real turned off.
and connections for leaks.” problem or it may be that the
handpiece is just not connected). An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.


16 “Draining cassette. Please The cassette top fluid sensor No keys are displayed on the popup.
wait.” triggers.
Vacuum, vit, and frag are turned off.
The popup is removed when cassette

draining is complete.
If cassette draining is not complete

within TBD seconds, the A/F module
sends a Cassette Pump Failure
Advisory to the Host.
17 If the cassette is loaded: Cassette pump failure If the cassette is loaded:

“Cassette detected full. An OK key is on the popup to remove
PLEASE REPLACE it.
CASSETTE.”
Vacuum, vit, prime and frag are turned
If the cassette is not loaded: off.
A popup is displayed
indicating “Please check If the cassette is not loaded:
cassette receiver mechanism An OK key is on the popup to remove
for blockage.” it.
18 “Please check cassette.” Cassette loading problem (cannot The cassette is not loaded.
rotate pump when loading the
cassette). An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
19 “Please check cassette.” Cassette unloading problem. The cassette is considered to be

unloaded.

it.
20 “Apply vacuum to enable The operator has requested more An OK key is on the popup to remove
additional Reflux pulses.” than 10 consecutive reflux pulses it.
on a cassette port without
requesting vacuum. Each cassette The popup is removed when vacuum is
port has its own reflux count. applied on that cassette port.
5-20 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-9
21 “Light Sensor Triggered” Top fluid level sensor detects light VFI, Vit, Frag, & Extrude functions are
“Remove Flashlight and when transmitter LED is off. disabled.
Release Footswitch Treadle”
A timer is started.
If the timer expires, the popup is

displayed.

it.
Popup is removed and functions are

restored when light is no longer
detected when the transmitting LED is
off. A pedal up condition is required
before cutting and/or vacuum is
resumed.
If the condition is cleared before timer

expiration, functions are restored and
cutting and/or vacuum continue without
requiring a pedal up.
22 “Check VGFI FAX Setup or LPA output out of lower tolerance The VGFI and F/AX up arrow
Choose 30mmHg Non- for 5 seconds. membrane keys and the footswitch
Adjustable Backup Pressure” infusion toggle key are unavailable.
The popup is displayed.
The advisory tone is emitted every 5

seconds until a key on the popup is
pressed.
If the condition goes away and the

mechanical default has not been
activated, the popup is removed and
the keys are available again. The
popup is redisplayed if the condition
occurs again.
The popup has an OK key to remove

the popup, and a 30mmHg key to
activate mechanical default.
If the mechanical output is activated,

the error is latched and the elevated
infusion keys, F/AX and VGFI
membrane arrow keys, and footswitch
infusion toggle are unavailable. The
icon representing the function that was
active (VGFI or F/AX) is turned off.
Adjustable pressure mode can be

reentered and the condition cleared if
either the VGFI or F/AX icon is
pressed.
906-2020-501 5-21
®
Table 5-9
23 “Diathermy output exceeded Diathermy voltage exceeds upper The submodule turns diathermy off.
upper tolerance. Press OK tolerance.
to continue.” The popup is displayed.
Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,

Diathermy membrane arrow keys,
Footswitch Diathermy keys, Diathermy
Handpiece key.
An OK key is on the popup to remove it

and reenable keys. Diathermy
capability is available after pressing the
OK key and releasing the diathermy
footswitch.
24 “Please check cassette Pump roller hub rotation not The submodule attempts to put the
receiver mechanism for detected during draining of the roller hub in the home position.
possible blockage” cassette
The popup is displayed.

it.
The cassette must be removed and

reinserted before cassette functions are
enabled.
5-22 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
1 “Footswitch not detected. The footswitch is not connected. • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
Please check for proper • Any function not requiring the
connection.” footswitch is still available.
• The popup is removed if the
footswitch is connected.
• The popup is only redisplayed if the
footswitch is connected, then
disconnected again.
2 “Alcon Ultrasonic h/p not The installed U/S handpiece ID • An OK key is on the popup to remove
detected. Check for proper does not match the Frag, Mackool, it.
installation.” or 375/40 handpiece ID. • No attempt will be made to tune this
handpiece if the Test key is pressed.
• The popup is removed if all
unrecognized handpieces are
disconnected.
• The popup is only redisplayed if the
unrecognized handpiece is removed,
then reconnected.
3 “Please install an Ultrasonic • The Test key was pressed when • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
handpiece for the current the appropriate U/S handpiece is • If the popup was displayed because
mode.” selected but not connected. the Test key was pressed, prime is
• Frag or U/S mode was entered not started.
and the appropriate U/S • The popup is removed if the
handpiece is not connected. appropriate U/S handpiece is
• The system is in Frag or U/S connected. If the popup was
mode and the appropriate U/S displayed because the Test key was
handpiece was removed. pressed, prime is started.
• The treadle is depressed in Frag • In U/S or Frag modes, U/S and
or U/S mode when the vacuum are not available at the
appropriate U/S handpiece is not footswitch if the appropriate U/S
connected. handpiece is not installed and tuned.
• An inappropriate U/S handpiece
was just installed for the current
domain, and an appropriate U/S
handpiece is not already installed
in the remaining port.
4 “Ultrasonic handpiece is not • The U/S or Frag handpiece was • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
tuned. Press Test to prime/ just connected (so it is not tuned) • A Test key is on the popup to start
tune.” and the system is in the prime/tune.
corresponding U/S or Frag mode. • The popup is redisplayed each time
• The treadle is depressed in a U/S U/S or Frag mode is entered, or
or Frag mode and the when the treadle is again depressed
corresponding U/S handpiece is in U/S or Frag mode, and the
connected but not tuned. corresponding U/S handpiece is
• An error occurred causing the connected but not tuned.
handpiece to lose tuning and the
system is in a U/S or Frag mode.
906-2020-501 5-23
®
Table 5-10
5 “Ultrasonic handpiece tune U/S or Frag tuning failed. • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
failure. Check tip for proper • In U/S and Frag modes, U/S and
installation.” vacuum are not available.
6 “Priming unsuccessful. Fluid No fluid intake was detected during • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
not detected in cassette. the prime sequence. • If the Surg key is pressed, the
Please attempt re-prime.” Information popup indicating prime
was not performed will still be
displayed.
7 “Bulb failure detected. • Either bulb burns out when it is • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
Please replace bulb.” on. • The bulb icon is grayed and covered
• The Bulb key of a burned out bulb with a red circle with a slash.
was pressed. • If the burned out bulb is replaced, the
popup is removed and the normal
bulb icon is displayed.
8 “Cassette is not ready. The cassette is not installed and the • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
Please check cassette for Vit (anterior or posterior) key, Frag • The popup is removed if the cassette
proper installation.” key, Extrude key, U/S key, or I/A is installed and passes the vacuum
key was pressed, and the system test.
enters the mode.
9 “Drainbag may be full. Approximately 500 cc of fluid have • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
PLEASE REPLACE been drained into the bag. The fluid • The popup is removed if the cassette
CASSETTE.” cc count is reset whenever the is removed.
cassette is ejected. • The popup is redisplayed the next
time the bag is full after a new
cassette is installed.
10 “Cassette failed vacuum test. The cassette failed the vacuum test. • An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please eject and reinsert, or The vacuum test will be executed it.
replace cassette.” when a cassette is installed, the • Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
cassette ID is valid for the current Extrude, U/S and I/A functions are
domain, and the system is in a not available at the footswitch.
Setup mode or a mode that uses Pressing the Test key will cause no
vacuum. The vacuum test is action.
executed once for each cassette
insertion.
11 “Please adjust supply source The detected internal A/F module • Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
pressure from 90 to 120 psi.” source pressure is less than 78 psi Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
and the pressure source has been turned off.
set to “Standard” or the A/F module • No keys are displayed on the popup.
source pressure is less than 68 psi • The popup is removed when a certain
and the pressure source has not location on the popup is pressed. This
been explicitly selected. location will only be known to Alcon
personnel to allow demonstration of
the system without air.
• The popup is removed once pressure
is within its valid range.
continued on next page...
5-24 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-10
...continued from previous page
• The popup will only be redisplayed if

• Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
Scisr, Extrude, VFC, U/S and I/A
footswitch.
12 “Press 5 Bar for low pressure The detected internal A/F module • Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
operation or press Standard source pressure is less than 78 psi Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
and increase air pressure.” and the module source pressure turned off.
has not been selected or has been • A “5 Bar” key is for selecting 5 bar
set to “Select”. mode (68 – 120 psi supply pressure)
and a “Standard” key is for selecting
standard mode (80 – 120 psi supply
pressure).
• The popup is removed when the 5
Bar key is pressed and the system
now is in 5 bar operation mode. The
popup can also be removed by
pressing the “Standard” key. After
which the popup is replaced with
advisory popup #11.
• The popup is also removed once
pressure is within its valid range.
no keys were pressed and the
footswitch.
13 “Please adjust supply source The detected internal A/F module • Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
air pressure from 5 to 8 bar.” source pressure is less than 68 psi Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
and the module source pressure turned off.
has been set to “5 Bar”. • No keys are displayed on the popup.
• The popup is removed when a
certain location on the popup is
pressed. This location will only be
known to Alcon personnel to allow
demonstration of the system without
air.
• The popup is removed once pressure
is within its valid range.
footswitch.
906-2020-501 5-25
®
Table 5-10
14 “Vacuum surges detected. The vacuum level exceeds its upper • Vacuum, frag, vit (anterior and
Check aspiration lines and tolerance. posterior), U/S and I/A are turned off.
connections for leaks.” • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Once the popup is removed, all
• The sub-module processes new set
15 “Pressure surges detected. Proportional pressure exceeds its • VFC and proportional scissors are
Check VFC/Scissors lines upper tolerance. turned off.
and connections for leaks.” • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Once the popup is removed, all
16 “Pressure surges detected. Proportional pressure transducer • VFC and proportional scissors are
Check Scissors/VFC lines discrepancy (this may be a real turned off.
and connections for leaks.” problem or it may be that the • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
handpiece is just not connected). • Once the popup is removed, all
17 “Draining cassette. Please The cassette top fluid sensor • No keys are displayed on the popup.
wait.” triggers. • Vacuum, vit (anterior and posterior),
prime, frag and U/S are turned off.
• The popup is removed when cassette
draining is complete.
• If cassette draining is not complete
within 12 seconds, the A/F module
sends a Cassette Pump Failure
Advisory to the Host.
18 If the cassette is loaded: Cassette pump failure If the cassette is loaded:

“Cassette detected full. • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
PLEASE REPLACE • Vacuum, vit (anterior and posterior),
CASSETTE.” prime, frag, U/S and I/A are turned
off.
If the cassette is not loaded:
“Please check cassette If the cassette is not loaded:
receiver mechanism for • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
blockage.”
19 “Please check cassette.” Cassette loading problem (cannot • The cassette is not loaded.
rotate pump when loading the • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
cassette).
20 “Please check cassette.” Cassette unloading problem. • The cassette is considered to be

unloaded.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
5-26 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-10
21 “Apply vacuum to enable The operator has requested more • An OK key is on the popup to remove
additional Reflux pulses.” than 10 consecutive micro-reflux it.
pulses in the posterior domain or 20 • The popup is removed when vacuum
consecutive micro-reflux pulses in is applied on that cassette port.
the anterior domain on a cassette
port without requesting vacuum.
Each cassette port has its own
micro-reflux count.
22 “Cassette type does not • The cassette was just installed or • An OK key is on the popup to remove
match surgical mode. Please a new domain was entered and it.
insert the correct cassette.” the cassette is the wrong type for
the current surgical domain.
• The cassette is the wrong type for
the current surgical domain, and
a key to enter a mode that uses
vacuum was pressed.
23 “Memory error, capabilities At power-up, the CRC of the system • An OK key is on the popup to remove
may be limited.” version number and model is it and the system provides functions
invalid. at the 400VS level.
24 “Low battery condition. • A remote control key was • An OK key is on the popup to remove
Please replace the battery on pressed and a low battery it.
the remote control.” condition exists. • The popup is only displayed once per
• A new domain was just entered domain entry.
and a remote low battery
condition exists.
25 “Doctor memories do not At power-up, the SRAM doctor • A CPU Bd key is on the popup to
match backup copy. Which memories CRC is valid and the overwrite the SRAM doctor memories.
copy do you want to Sound board doctor memories CRC • A Snd Bd key is on the popup to
overwrite?” is valid, but the two CRCs do not overwrite the Sound board doctor
match. memories.
• An Ignore key is on the popup to use
the SRAM doctor memories, and skip
all writes to the sound board
memory.
26 “Light sensor triggered The cassette top fluid sensor • VFI, Vit (Anterior and Posterior),
remove flashlight and release detects light when the transmitter Frag, Extrude, Prime, Phaco and I/A
treadle if vacuum was on.” LED is off. functions are disabled.
• A Timer is started.
• If the timer expires, the popup is
displayed.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Popup is removed and functions are
restored when light is no longer
detected when the transmitting LED
is off. A pedal up is required before
cutting and/or vacuum is resumed.
• If the condition is cleared before the
timer expiration, functions are
restored and cutting and/or vacuum
continue without requiring a pedal up.
906-2020-501 5-27
®
Table 5-10
27 In the posterior domain: a LPA output out of lower tolerance • The VGFI, AVGFI and F/AX up arrow
popup is displayed indicating for 5 seconds. membrane keys, Alternate infusion/
“Check VGFI F/AX setup. irrigation up keys and the footswitch
Select 30 mmHg backup infusion/irrigation toggle keys are
pressure, or Ignore low unavailable.
pressure condition.” • The advisory tone is emitted every 5
In the anterior domain: pressed.
a popup is displayed • The popup is removed and the keys
indicating “Check AVGFI are available again if the condition
setup. Select Gravity goes away and the fixed backup
irrigation, or Ignore low pressure has not been activated.
pressure condition.” The popup is redisplayed if the
condition occurs again.
• Both popups have an Ignore key to
remove the popup and ignore the
condition until it has been corrected.
If the Ignore key is pressed, the
VGFI, AVGFI and F/AX up arrow
membrane keys, Alternate infusion/
irrigation up keys and the footswitch
infusion/irrigation toggle keys are
unavailable until the condition has
been corrected.
• If an unavailable key is pressed while
ignoring the condition, the popup for
the current domain is displayed.
• If an unavailable key is pressed while
in fixed backup pressure, an invalid
key tone is emitted and no popup is
displayed.
• The posterior popup has a 30 mmHg
key to turn the LPA pump on at its
fixed backup pressure. The VGFI
and F/AX arrow membrane keys,
Alternate infusion keys and the
footswitch infusion toggle keys are
unavailable. The F/AX and Infusion
keys are off but still available, so that
if one is pressed the condition is
cleared and the LPA pump is turned
on. If the anterior domain is entered,
gravity irrigation is selected and the
LPA pump is turned off.
• The anterior popup has a Gravity key
to switch to gravity irrigation. If the
Gravity key is pressed, all keys are
available in the anterior domain. A
popup is displayed indicating
“Disconnect AVGFI lines and raise
the bottle.” When the OK is key is
pressed to acknowledge this popup,
the system is switched to gravity
mode. If the posterior domain is
entered, the LPA pump is turned on
at its fixed backup pressure.
5-28 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-10
28 “Doctor memories backup Sound Board Flash memory has a • The popup is removed by pressing
copy must be replaced. problem during a Flash write. the “OK” popup key.
Please call Field Service.” • This popup is displayed any time a
write is attempted to the Flash
memories.
29 “The CPU board battery must CPU SRAM battery is getting low or • The popup is removed by pressing
be replaced. Please call is dead the “OK” popup key.
Field Service.” • This popup is displayed once after
each power up.
906-2020-501 5-29
®
Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED
“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 101 • A/F communication line Init, run time. • The Air/Fluid module lets its WDT
Scissor and VFI are failure. reset it and the Host gets a Service
not available.” • A/F RAM failure. Init. Request interrupt.
• A/F EPROM failure. Init. • The Host times out on the
• A/F WDT test failure. Init. communication interface. This
• A/F WDT reset. Run-time. makes each of these failures appear
• A/F invalid interrupt. Run-time. to the Host as a communication
• Critical data discrepancy. Run-time. failure.
• The Host resets the A/F module.
• Remaining actions are the same as
for error code 103.
“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 102 • A/F I/O readback error. Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 103,
Scissor and VFI are except Host resets the A/F module.
not available.”
“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 103 • A/F ADC out of tolerance. Init, run time. • All A/F module functions are
Scissor and VFI are 104 • A/F ±15V out of tolerance. Init, run time. disabled.
not available.” 105 • A/F 12V out of tolerance. Init, run time. • Vacuum, frag, vit, scissors, extrude,
106 • A/F 24V out of tolerance. Init, run time. VFC, and Test functions are all
107 • A/F reference voltages out Init. turned off.
of tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
108 • Vac source pressure out of Init, run time. remove it.
tolerance (SP55) p < 50 or • If in any of the above modes, the
p > 65. Checked only if system enters the Surgery Setup
SP85 is OK. (or SP55 mode.
transducer offset is out of • Unavailable keys: Vit, Frag, Scisr,
tolerance). Extrude, VFC mode keys, Test key,
109 • A/F module source Init, run time. Clean key, Surg key, footswitch
pressure > 100 psi. (SP85). Reflux key, and Innovit, Accurus,
(or SP85 transducer offset MicroPort, Frag, Scisr, VFC and
is out of tolerance). Extrude handpiece keys.
110 • Proportional valve drive Init.
(knee) voltage failure.
“Vit, Frag, VFI 111 • Vac transducers Init, run time. • All functions using vacuum are
(Extract), and discrepancy. disabled.
Vacuum are not 112 • Vac transducers range Init, run time. • Vacuum, frag, and vit are all turned
available.” invalid. off.
113 • Fluid level optical receiver Init • An OK key is on the popup to
fault. remove it.
114 • Solenoid valve current error Vac is on. • If in Vit, Frag, VFC extract or Extrude
status - vacuum. mode, the system enters the Surgery
115 • Cassette ID sensor failure. Cassette is not Setup mode.
present. • Unavailable keys: Vit, Frag, Extrude
mode keys, VFC extract submode
key, Test key, Clean key, footswitch
Reflux key, Innovit, Accurus,
MicroPort, Frag and Extrude
handpiece keys.
5-30 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS
“VFI (Inject) and 116 • Proportional pressure Init, run time. • Proportional pressure functions are
Prop Scissors are transducers range invalid. disabled.
not available.” • Solenoid valve current error Proportional • An OK key is on the popup to
117 status - proportional pressure is on. remove it.
pressure. • If in VFC Inject or Prop Scissors
mode, the system enters the Surgery
Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: VFC Inject, Prop
Scisr submode keys.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, an
invalid key click is emitted and the
popup is redisplayed.
“Vit, Single Cut and 118 • Solenoid valve current error Pulse pressure • Pulse pressure functions are
Multi-Cut Scissors status - pulse pressure. is on. disabled.
are not available.” • Vit, Single Cut and Multi-Cut
Scissors are turned off. Vac is
turned off if current mode is a Vit
mode.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in Vit or Single Cut or Multi-Cut
Scissors modes, the system enters
the Surgery Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit mode key,
Single and Multi Scisr submode
keys, Innovit, Accurus, MicroPort
handpiece keys.
“Ultrasonic power 201 • U/S Diathermy Init, run time. • The U/S Diathermy module lets its
and Diathermy are communication line failure. WDT reset it and the Host gets a
not available.” • U/S Diathermy RAM failure. Init. Service Request interrupt.
• U/S Diathermy EPROM Init. • The Host times out on the
failure. communication interface. This
• U/S Diathermy WDT test Init. makes each of these failures appear
failure. to the Host as a communication
• U/S Diathermy WDT reset. Run-time. failure.
• U/S Diathermy invalid Run-time. • The Host resets the U/S Diathermy
interrupt. module.
• Critical data discrepancy. Run-time. • If U/S was on, vacuum is also turned
off.
remove it.
• If in a Frag mode, the Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag mode key,
Frag and Diathermy handpiece keys
in Setup mode, Diathermy key,
footswitch diathermy keys, footswitch
U/S power keys.
906-2020-501 5-31
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
CHECKED
202 • U/S Diathermy I/O Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 201,
readback error. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host.
203 • U/S Diathermy ADC out of Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 201,
tolerance. except the submodule does not let
204 • U/S Diathermy +/-15V out Init, run time. the WDT reset it, and the Host does
of tolerance. not reset the submodule.
205 • U/S Diathermy 12V out of Init, run time.
tolerance (fan).
207 • U/S Diathermy 85V out of Init, run time.
tolerance.
For software 208 • Diathermy voltage exceeds Diathermy is on. • The submodule turns diathermy off.
versions below 1.11: upper tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
“Diathermy is not 209 • Diathermy compliance fault. Diathermy is on. remove it.
available.” • Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,
footswitch diathermy keys,
Diathermy handpiece key.
“Ultrasonic power 210 • U/S power level adjustment Frag is on. • The submodule turns U/S power off
error Press OK to out of range (control loop until next zero power set point is
resume.” error). received from the Host.
remove it.
“Ultrasonic power is 211 • U/S Diathermy 10V out of Init, run time. • The submodule turns U/S power off.
not available.” tolerance (affects • An OK key is on the popup to
handpiece readings). remove it.
• If in a Frag mode, the Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag mode key,
Frag hdpc key, footswitch Frag keys.
“Ultrasonic h/p 212 • U/S h/p ground fault Run-time • The submodule turns U/S power off.
ground fault. Please • The U/S handpiece must be retuned.
replace handpiece.” • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
5-32 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
“Illuminator and Air 301 • LPA/Illum communication Init, run time. • The LPA/Illum module lets its WDT
Pump settings are line failure. reset it and the Host gets a Service
fixed.” • LPA/Illum RAM failure.1 Init. Request interrupt.
• LPA/Illum EPROM failure. Init. • The Host times out on the
• LPA/Illum WDT test Init. communication interface. This
failure.2 makes each of these failures appear
• LPA/Illum WDT reset. Run-time. to the Host as a communication
• LPA/Illum invalid interrupt. Run-time. failure.
• Critical data discrepancy Run-time. • The Host resets the LPA/Illum
module.
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: F/A key, Infusion
key, VGFI key and Manual Infusion
key in Setup mode, elevated infusion
keys, F/A, VGFI and illuminator
membrane arrow keys, footswitch
infusion toggle, illuminator keys.
302 • LPA/Illum I/O readback Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 301,
error. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host and does not let its
WDT reset it.
303 • LPA/Illum ADC out of Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 301,
tolerance. (no effect on except the submodule does not let its
illuminator). WDT reset it, and the Host does not
304 • LPA/Illum +/-15V out of reset the submodule.
tolerance.
“Air pressure is in 306 • LPA/Illum 24V out of Init, run time. • The LPA mechanical output is
BACK-UP mode set tolerance. (affects LPA). activated.
at 30 mmHg.” 309 • LPA transducers Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
discrepancy. remove it.
310 • LPA output out of upper LPA is on. • Unavailable keys: F/A key, Infusion
tolerance for 5 seconds. key, VGFI key and Manual Infusion
311 • LPA transducer invalid. LPA is on. key in Setup mode, elevated infusion
312 • LPA output ripple level Init. keys, F/A and VGFI membrane
error. LPA is on. arrow keys, footswitch infusion
313 • LPA dynamic pressure Init. toggle.
range failure.
906-2020-501 5-33
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
CHECKED
“Possible Air Pump 307 • LPA directional solenoid Init, Run-time. If the error occurs at run-time:
error. Press Default valve status feedback error. • An Ignore key is to continue and
for 30mmHg.” ignore the error.
• A Default key is on the popup to
activate the mechanical output.
• The error tone is emitted every 5
pressed.
• If the mechanical output is activated,
the F/A key, Infusion key, VGFI key
and Manual Infusion key in Setup
mode, elevated infusion keys, F/A
and VGFI membrane arrow keys,
and footswitch infusion toggle are
unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, a
popup indicating air pressure is not
available is displayed.
If the error occurs at initialization, the
actions are the same as those for error
code 306.
“Air pressure is not 314 • LPA output solenoid valve Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 306,
available.” status feedback error. except different popup.
remove it.
If the error occurs at 315 • Bulb temperature fault. Init, Bulb is on If the error occurs at initialization:
initialization: • An OK key is on the popup to it.
“Illuminator is not • The illuminator is left off.
available.” • The illuminator icon keys and
membrane arrow keys are
If error occurs at run- unavailable.
time: If error occurs at run-time:
“Overtemp detected. • An OK key is on the popup to
Illuminator will turn remove it.
off in 3 minutes.” • The illuminator is turned off after the
elapsed time.
• The illuminator icon keys and
membrane arrow keys are
unavailable.
invalid key click is emitted and a
popup is displayed indicating the
illuminator is not available.
5-34 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
“Illuminator power 316 • LPA/Illum 17V out of Init. If the error occurs at initialization:
fault. Illumination tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be dim.” remove it.
• All functions are still available.
If the error occurs at run-time, no

action will be taken.
“Auto stopcock 317 • LPA auto stopcock solenoid Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
failure. Switch (Future) valve status feedback error. remove it.
stopcock manually.” • Unavailable key: Auto stopcock.
For software • LPA output out of lower LPA is on. • The VGFI and F/AX up arrow
versions below 1.11: 318 tolerance for 5 seconds. membrane keys and the footswitch
“VGFI, F/AX (BSS) infusion toggle key are unavailable.
Pressure Low. Is • The error tone is emitted every 5
Infusion Line seconds until a key on the popup is
Connected?” pressed.
• Both popups are removed and the
keys are available again if the
condition goes away and the
mechanical default has not been
activated. The popup is redisplayed
if the condition occurs again.
• The popup has a No key to remove
the popup.
• The popup has a Yes key to activate
a secondary popup indicating “A
Fault Has Been Detected! Press
BACK-UP to set the VGFI, F/AX
(BSS) to 30 mmHg”. The Popup has
a BACK-UP key that will place the
module into mechanical default. The
popup also has an Ignore key that
will remove the popup and redisplay
the previous popup stating “Is
Infusion Line Connected?”.
• If the mechanical output is activated,
the error is latched and the F/AX key,
Infusion key, VGFI key and Manual
Infusion key in Setup mode, elevated
infusion keys, F/AX and VGFI
membrane arrow keys, and
footswitch infusion toggle are
unavailable.
• Once the error is latched, if an
unavailable key is pressed, a popup
indicating air pressure is fixed is
displayed.
906-2020-501 5-35
®
Table 5-11
WHEN
CHECKED
“Air Pressure is not 319 • LPA 115V failure LPA is on • An O.K. key is available to remove
available”. the popup.
• The F/AX key, Infusion key, VGFI
key and Manual Infusion key in
Setup mode, elevated infusion keys,
F/AX and VGFI membrane arrow
keys, and footswitch infusion toggle
are unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, the
“Footswitch detents 906 • Host 24V out of tolerance Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be irregular.” (footswitch detents invalid). remove it.
1
RAM, EPROM, invalid interrupt, and critical data discrepancy errors are not specifically reported to the Host because their
occurrence indicates operation of the submodule is marginal, at best.
2
The WDT test failure is not specifically reported to the Host since some failure modes prevent the ability to do so. These failure
modes include if the WDT circuits hold the PIO’s in the reset state, preventing the generation of a Service Request.
5-36 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
“All surgical modes 101 • A/F communication line Init, Run-time. • The Air/Fluid module lets its WDT
are not available.” failure. reset it and the Host gets a Service
• A/F RAM failure. Init. Request interrupt.
• A/F EPROM failure. Init. • The Host times out on the
• A/F WDT test failure. Init. communication interface. This
• A/F WDT reset. Run-time. makes each of these failures appear
• A/F invalid interrupt. Run-time. to the Host as a communication
• Critical data discrepancy. Run-time. failure.
• The Host resets the A/F module.
• Remaining actions are the same as
for error code 103.
“All surgical modes 102 • A/F I/O read back error. Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 103,
are not available.” except Host resets the A/F module.
“All surgical modes 103 • A/F ADC out of tolerance. Init, Run-time. • All A/F module functions are disabled.
are not available.” 104 • A/F +/-15V out of Init, Run-time. • The A/F module reports the error
tolerance. then lets its WDT reset it.
105 • A/F 12V out of tolerance. Init, Run-time. • Vacuum, frag, vit, scissors, extrude,
106 • A/F 24V out of tolerance. Init, Run-time. VFC, U/S, I/A, and Test functions
107 • A/F reference voltages out Init. are all turned off.
of tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
108 • Vac source pressure out of Init, Run-time. remove it.
tolerance (SP55) p < 50 or • If in any of the above modes, the
p > 65. Checked only if system enters the current domain
SP85 is OK. (or SP55 Surgery Setup mode.
transducer offset is out of • Unavailable keys: Vit (Posterior),
tolerance). Frag, Scissor, Extrude, VFC, Vit
109 • A/F module source Init, Run-time. (Anterior), U/S, I/A mode keys, Test
pressure > 100 psi. key, Clean key, Surg key, footswitch
(SP85). (or SP85 Micro Reflux key, Continuous Reflux
transducer offset is out of key, Irrigation key, and Innovit,
tolerance). Accurus, Frag, Scisr, VFC, Extrude,
110 • Proportional valve drive Init. Phaco, I/A, Ant. Vit handpiece keys.
(knee) voltage failure.
“Modes using 111 • Vac transducers Init, Run-time. • All functions using vacuum are
vacuum are not discrepancy. Init, Run-time. disabled.
available.” 112 • Vac transducers range • Vacuum, frag, vit, U/S, and I/A are
invalid. Init. all turned off.
113 • Fluid level optical receiver • An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
fault. Vac is on. • If in Vit (Posterior), Frag, VFC
114 • Solenoid valve current extract, Extrude, Vit (Anterior), U/S
error status – vacuum. Cassette is not or I/A mode, the system enters the
115 • Cassette ID sensor failure. present. current domain Surgery Setup
mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Posterior),
Frag, Extrude, Surg (Anterior), Vit
(Anterior), U/S, I/A mode keys, VFC
extract submode key, Test key,
Clean key, footswitch Micro Reflux
key, Continuos Reflux key, Innovit,
Accurus, Frag, Extrude, Phaco, I/A
and Ant. Vit handpiece keys.
906-2020-501 5-37
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
CHECKED
“VFC (Inject) and 116 • Proportional pressure Init, Run-time. • Proportional pressure functions are
Prop Scissors are transducers range invalid. disabled.
not available.” 117 • Solenoid valve current Proportion-al • VFC inject and proportional scissors
error status – proportional pressure is on. are turned off.
pressure. • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in VFC Inject Prop or Calib
Scissors mode, the system enters
the Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
mode.
• Unavailable keys: VFC Inject, Prop
Scissor, and Calib Scissor submode
keys.
invalid key click is emitted and the
“Vit and Multi-Cut 118 • Solenoid valve current Pulse pressure • Pulse pressure functions are
Scissors are not error status – pulse is on. disabled.
available.” pressure. • Vit (Anterior, Posterior) and Multi-Cut
Scissors are turned off. Vacuum is
turned off if current mode is a Vit
(Anterior, Posterior) mode.
remove it.
• If in Vit (Anterior, Posterior), or Multi-
Cut Scissors modes, the system
enters the current domain Surgery
Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Anterior,
Posterior), mode key, Multi Scissor
submode key, Innovit, Accurus, and
Ant. Vit handpiece keys.
“Anterior surgical 119 • Continuous reflux valve Run-time • Anterior functions using vacuum are
modes are not stuck open error. (anterior) disabled.
available.” • Vit (Anterior), Phaco, I/A and Test
(Anterior) functions are turned off.
• To prevent cassette flooding, the
lower cassette valves will be closed
while an Anterior cassette is present.
remove it.
• If in Vit (Anterior), Phaco or I/A
mode, the Cataract Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Anterior),
Phaco, and I/A mode keys, Test key
(Anterior), Surg key (Anterior),
Continuous reflux, Micro-reflux
(Anterior), Phaco, I/A and Vit
(Anterior) handpiece keys.
5-38 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
“Some surgical 120 • Irrigation valve stuck Run-time • U/S, I/A, Wet Vit (Anterior), Test
modes are not closed error. (anterior) (Anterior), and Extrude functions are
available.” turned off.
remove it.
• If in Wet Vit (Anterior), Phaco or I/A
mode, the Cataract Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag, U/S, I/A,
Wet Vit (Anterior), and Extrude
mode keys, Test key (Anterior),
Continuous irrigation (footswitch and
touch key), Frag, Phaco, I/A, and
Extrude handpiece keys.
“Continuous reflux is 121 • Continuous reflux valve Run-time • Continuous reflux is disabled.
not available.” stuck closed error. (anterior) • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable key: Continuous reflux
footswitch.
“Irrigation must be 122 • Irrigation valve stuck open Run-time • Irrigation is turned on. If a valid
turned off manually.” error. (anterior) cassette is present and AVGFI is
selected, the AVGFI pump will be
turned on.
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: Continuous
irrigation (footswitch and touch key).
The continuous irrigation key is
turned on (highlighted in blue) as
long as a cassette is inserted and
has passed the vacuum test.
• The Gravity key in the Irrigation
Setup screen will be available to
allow switching to Gravity even
though irrigation and AVGFI may be
on.
“Ultrasonic power 201 • U/S Diathermy Init, Run-time. • The U/S Diathermy module lets its
and Diathermy are communication line failure. WDT reset it and the Host gets a
not available.” • U/S Diathermy RAM Init. Service Request interrupt.
failure.5 • The Host times out on the
• U/S Diathermy EPROM Init. communication interface. This
failure. makes each of these failures appear
• U/S Diathermy WDT test Init. to the Host as a communication
failure.6 failure.
• U/S Diathermy WDT reset. Run-time. • The Host resets the U/S Diathermy
• U/S Diathermy invalid Run-time. module.
interrupt. • If U/S was on, vacuum is also turned
• Critical data discrepancy. Run-time. off.
• U/S Diathermy I/O Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
readback error. remove it.
continued on next page...
906-2020-501 5-39
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
CHECKED
• If in a Frag or U/S mode, the current

domain Surgery Setup mode is
entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag, U/S mode
keys, Frag, Phaco and Diathermy
handpiece keys in Setup mode,
Diathermy key, Diathermy
membrane arrow keys, footswitch
diathermy keys, footswitch U/S
power keys.
203 • U/S Diathermy ADC out of Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 201,
tolerance. except the submodule reports the
204 • U/S Diathermy +/-15V out Init, Run-time. error to the Host.
of tolerance.
205 • U/S Diathermy 12V out of Init, Run-time.
tolerance (fan).
207 • U/S Diathermy 85V out of Init, Run-time.
tolerance.
“Diathermy is not 208 • Diathermy voltage exceeds Diathermy is • The submodule turns diathermy off.
available.” upper tolerance. on. • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,
footswitch diathermy keys,
Diathermy handpiece key.
“Ultrasonic power is 211 • U/S Diathermy 10V out of Init, Run-time. • The submodule turns U/S power off.
not available.” tolerance (affects • An OK key is on the popup to
handpiece readings). remove it.
• If in a Frag or U/S mode, the current
domain Surgery Setup mode is
entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag and U/S
mode keys, Frag and Phaco
handpiece keys, and footswitch Frag
keys.
“Ultrasonic h/p 212 • U/S h/p ground fault Run-time • The submodule turns U/S power off.
ground fault. Please • The Frag, Phaco, Mackool
replace handpiece.” handpieces must be retuned.
remove it.
5-40 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
In posterior domain: 301 • LPA/Illum communication Init, Run-time. • The LPA/Illum module lets its WDT
“Illuminator and Air line failure. reset it and the Host gets a Service
Pump settings are • LPA/Illum RAM failure.1 Init. Request interrupt.
fixed.” • LPA/Illum EPROM failure. Init. • The Host times out on the
• LPA/Illum WDT test Init. communication interface. This makes
In anterior domain: failure.2 each of these failures appear to the
“Illuminators and • LPA/Illum WDT reset. Run-time. Host as a communication failure.
AVGFI are not • LPA/Illum invalid interrupt. Run-time. • The Host resets the LPA/Illum module.
available. • Critical data discrepancy Run-time. • The LPA pump is on at its fixed
Disconnect AVGFI.” • LPA/Illum I/O readback Init, Run-time. backup pressure.
error. • If the error occurs during run-time,
the illuminators are on, otherwise,
they are off.
• In anterior domain: Vacuum is
disabled until the OK key is pressed.
• Both popups have an OK key to
remove the popup.
• Unavailable keys: F/AX key, Infusion
key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
Infusion key, Gravity Irrigation key in
Setup mode, Alternate infusion/irrigation
keys, F/AX, Infusion, Irrigation, and
illuminator membrane arrow keys,
footswitch alternate infusion/irrigation
toggle, illuminator keys.
304 • LPA/Illum +/-15V out of Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 301,
tolerance. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host and then lets its
WDT reset it.
In posterior domain: 303 • LPA/Illum ADC out of Init, r-time • In the posterior domain: LPA pump
“Air pressure in non- tolerance. (no effect on is on at its fixed backup pressure.
adjustable backup illuminator). • In the anterior domain: Vacuum is
mode set at 30 306 • LPA/Illum 24V out of Init, Run-time. disabled and the LPA pump remains
mmHg.” tolerance. (affects LPA). on until the OK key is pressed.
309 • LPA transducers Init, Run-time. • Both popups have an OK key to
In anterior domain: discrepancy. remove the popup.
“Disconnect AVGFI 310 • LPA output out of upper LPA is on. • Unavailable keys: F/AX key, Infusion
and use gravity tolerance for 5 seconds. key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
irrigation.” Vacuum 311 • LPA transducer invalid for LPA is on. Infusion, and Gravity Irrigation keys in
is disabled until the 3 seconds. Setup mode, Alternate Infusion keys,
OK key is pressed. 312 • LPA output ripple level LPA is on. Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX, Infusion,
error. and Irrigation membrane arrow keys,
313 • LPA dynamic pressure Init. footswitch infusion/irrigation toggle,
range failure. VGFI-F/AX and AVGFI handpiece
keys.
In posterior domain: 307 • LPA directional solenoid Init, Run-time. If the error occurs at run-time:
“Possible Air Pump valve status feedback • In posterior domain: the error tone
error. Press 30 mmHg error. is emitted every 5 seconds until a
backup or ignore.” key on the popup is pressed.
• In anterior domain: Vacuum is
In anterior domain: disabled until one of the popup keys
“Possible Air Pump is pressed.
error. Press Gravity
irrigation, or Ignore.” continued on next page...
906-2020-501 5-41
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
CHECKED
• Both popups have an Ignore key to

continue and ignore the error.
• A 30 mmHg key is on the posterior
domain popup to turn the LPA pump
on at its fixed backup pressure.
• A Gravity key is on the anterior
domain popup to select gravity
irrigation. If the Gravity key is
pressed, the “Disconnect AVGFI lines
and raise the bottle.” Advisory popup
is displayed. The pump remains on
until the OK key is pressed and then
the pump is turned off.
• If the LPA pump is on at its fixed
backup pressure, or the Gravity key is
pressed and the advisory is
acknowledged, the F/AX key, Infusion
key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
Infusion key and Gravity Irrigation key
in Setup mode, Alternate Infusion
keys, Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX,
Infusion, and Irrigation membrane
arrow keys, and footswitch infusion/
irrigation toggle keys are unavailable.
popup indicating “Air pressure is not
available.” is displayed.
• If the error occurs at initialization, the
actions are the same as those for
error code 306.
Same actions as 314 • LPA output solenoid valve • An OK key is on the popup to
error code 306, status feedback error. Init, Run-time. remove it.
except in the
posterior domain, the
popup indicates “Air
pressure is not
available.”
If error occurs at 315 • Bulb temperature fault. Init, If the error occurs at initialization:
initialization: Bulb is on • An OK key is on the popup to
“Illuminator is not remove it.
available.” • The illuminator is left off.
If error occurs at run- membrane arrow keys are unavailable.
time: “Overtemp If error occurs at run-time:
detected. Illuminator • An OK key is on the popup to
will turn off in 3 remove it.
minutes.” • The illuminator is turned off after the
elapsed time.
membrane arrow keys are unavailable.
invalid key click is emitted and a
popup is displayed indicating the
illuminator is not available.
5-42 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-12
WHEN
If the error occurs at 316 • LPA/Illum 17V out of Init. If the error occurs at initialization:
initialization: tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
“Illuminator power remove it.
fault. Illumination • All functions are still available.
may be dim.”
If the error occurs at run-time:
no action will be taken.
“Auto stopcock 317 • LPA auto stopcock Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
failure. Switch solenoid valve status remove it.
stopcock manually.” feedback error. • Unavailable key: Auto stopcock.
• No action is taken for this error until
the auto stopcock function is
implemented.
In the posterior 319 • LPA 115V failure LPA is on • In the anterior domain: Vacuum is
domain: “Air disabled until the OK key is pressed.
pressure is not • Both popups have an OK key to
available”. remove the popup.
• The F/AX key, Infusion key, VGFI
In the anterior key, AVGFI key, Gravity Infusion
domain: “Disconnect key, Gravity Irrigation key in Setup
AVGFI and use mode, Alternate infusion keys,
gravity irrigation.” Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX,
infusion, and irrigation membrane
arrow keys, and footswitch infusion/
irrigation toggle keys are
unavailable.
popup stating “Air pressure is not
available.” is displayed.
“Footswitch detents 906 • Host 24V out of tolerance Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be irregular.” (footswitch detents invalid). remove it.
1
RAM, EPROM, invalid interrupt, and critical data discrepancy errors are not specifically reported to the Host because their
occurrence indicates operation of the submodule is marginal, at best.
2
The WDT test failure is not specifically reported to the Host since some failure modes prevent the ability to do so. These failure
modes include if the WDT circuits hold the PIO’s in the reset state, preventing the generation of a Service Request.
906-2020-501 5-43
®
Table 5-13
Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red)
WHEN
FAULT # POPUP TEXT FAULT CHECKED ACTIONS
401 "Please Note • Front Panel Init, run time. • The Front Panel Submodule lets its
System Fault 401 communication line WDT reset it and the Host gets a
Call Field Service" failure. Service Request interrupt.
• Front Panel RAM failure. Init. • The Host times out on the
• Front Panel EPROM Init. communication interface. This
failure. makes each of these failures appear
• Front Panel WDT test Init. to the Host as a communication
failure. failure.
• Front Panel WDT reset. Init, run time. • The Host puts all modules in Reset.
• Front Panel invalid Init, run time. • The Fault screen is displayed with
interrupt. the error code.
• The operator must cycle power.
402 • Front Panel I/O readback Run-time. • The Host puts all modules in Reset.
error. • The Fault screen is displayed with
903 • Host ADC ref voltage out Init, run time. the error code.
of tolerance. • The operator must cycle power.
904 • Host +/-15V out of Init, run time.
tolerance.
905 • Host 12V out of tolerance Init, run time.
(affects CPU).
907 • Host 5V out of tolerance. Init, run time.
908 • Host WDT test failure. Init, run time.
909 • Host WDT triggered. Init, run time.
910 • Host AC power failure. Init, run time.
911 • Host Critical Data Init, run time.
discrepancy.
912 • Host software error. Init, run time.
913 • Host AMX call error. Init, run time.
914 • Host Fatal AMX error. Init, run time.
915 • Host file open error (font Init.
or icon file).
916 • Host memory allocation Init.
error.
917 • Host graphics init failure. Init.
918 • Host invalid opcode Init, run time.
exception.
919 • Host coprocessor not Init, run time.
available exception.
920 • Host double fault Init, run time.
exception.
921 • Host coprocessor Init, run time.
segment overrun
exception.
922 • Host invalid TSS Init, run time.
exception.
923 • Host segment not present Init, run time.
exception.
924 • Host stack fault Init, run time.
exception.
925 • Host general protection Init, run time.
fault.
926 • Host page fault Init, run time.
exception.
927 • Host DOS critical error. Init, run time.
928 • Host CRC of RFA error. Init.
929 • Host EOC for ADC error. Init, run time.
930 • Module version Init.
mismatch.
5-44 906-2020-501
®
Table 5-13
Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red)
WHEN
FAULT # POPUP TEXT FAULT CHECKED ACTIONS
NA • Host POST failure (see Init. • The system does not complete boot-
HSIS for a list of the up.
tests). • The Alcon logo remains displayed.
• The POST code is displayed on the
POST LEDs on the Power Signal
Distribution board inside the unit.
• The operator must cycle power.
• The EEPROM is not used on any of the submodules so it is not tested.

• The Front Panel 24V signal only affects the flash, it does not affect the module’s function. No action is taken if this signal
is out of tolerance.
• The LPA/Illum 12V out of tolerance signal (affects illuminator fan) is not available to the software. If this signal should fail,
it would eventually result in a bulb temperature fault.
• The U/S Diathermy 24V out of tolerance signal is not used.
906-2020-501 5-45
®
Table 5-14
POST Code Definitions
CODE DEFINITION CODE DEFINITION
02 VERIFY REAL MODE 74 TEST REAL TIME CLK
04 GET CPU TYPE 76 CHECK FOR KEYBD ERROR
06 INIT SYSTEM HARDWARE 7C SET-UP H/W INTRPR VECTORS
08 INIT CHIPSET REGS W/POST VALUES 7E TEST CO-PROC IF PRESENT
09 SET IN POST FLAG 80 DISABLE ONBD l/O PORTS
OA INIT CPU REGS 82 DET/ INST EXT RS232 PORTS
0C INIT CACHE TO POST VALUES 84 DET/ INST EXT PARA PORTS
OE INIT l/O 86 RE-INIT ONBD l/O PORTS
10 INIT POWER MGMT 88 INIT BIOS DATA AREA
11 LOAD ALT REGS W/POST CODES 8A INIT EXTND BIOS DATA AREA
12 JUMP TO USER PATCH0 8C INIT FLOPPY CTLR
14 INIT KEYBD CTLR 90 INIT HARD DISK CTLR
16 BIOS ROM CHKSUM 91 INIT LOCAL BUS HD CTLR
18 8254 TIMER INIT 92 JUMP TO USER PATCH2
1A 8237 DMA CTLR INIT 94 DISAB A20 ADDR LINE
1C RESET PROG INTRPT CTLR 96 CLR HUGE ES SEG REG
20 TEST DRAM REFRESH 98 SEARCH FOR OPT ROMS
22 TEST 8274 KEYBD CTLR 9A SHADOW OPT ROMS
24 SET ES SEG REG TO 4 GBYTES 9C SET-UP POWER MGMT
28 AUTOSIZE DRAM 9E ENAB H/W INTRPTS
2A CLEAR 512K BASE MEM A0 SET TIME OF DAY
2C TEST 512K BASE ADDR LINES A2 CHECK KEY LOCK
2E TEST 512K BASE MEM A4 INIT TYPEMATIC RATE
32 TEST CPU BUS-CLK FREQ A8 ERASE F2 PROMPT
34 TEST CMOS RAM AA SCAN FOR F2 KEY STROKE
37 RE-INIT CHIPSET AC ENTER SETUP
38 SHADOW SYST BIOS ROM AE CLEAR IN-POST FLAG
39 RE-INIT CACHE B0 CHECK FOR ERRORS
3A AUTOSIZE CACHE B2 PREP TO BOOT OP SYST
3C CONFIG ADV CHIPSET REGS B4 ONE BEEP
3D LOAD ALT REGS WITH CMOS VALUES B6 CHECK PASSWORD (OPT)
40 SET INIT CPU SPEED B8 CLR GLOBAL DESC TABLE
42 INIT INTRPT VECTORS BC CLR PARITY CHECKERS
44 INIT BIOS INTRPTS BE CLEAR SCREEN (OPT)
46 CHECK ROM COPYRIGHT NOTICE BF CHK VIRUS & B/U REMINDE
47 INIT MGR FOR PCI OPTION ROMS C0 TRY TO BOOT W/ INT9
48 CHECK VIDEO CONFIG VS CMOS D0 INTRPT HANDLER ERROR
49 INIT PCI BUS & DEVICES D2 UNK INTRPT ERROR (Normal code displayed
4A INIT ALL VIDEO ADAPT IN SYST at end of initialization)
4C SHADOW VIDEO BIOS ROM D4 PENDING INTRPT ERROR
4E DISPLAY COPYRIGHT NOTICE D6 INIT OPT ROM ERROR
50 DISPLAY CPU TYPE & SPEED D8 SHUTDOWN ERROR
52 TEST KEYBD DA EXTENDED BLK MOVE
54 SET KEY CLICK IF ENAB DC SHUTDOWN 10 ERROR
56 ENAB KEYBD E2 INIT CHIPSET
58 TEST FOR UNEXPECT INTRPTS E3 INIT REFRESH COUNTER
5A DISPLAY PROMPT "PRESS F2" E4 CHK FOR FORCED FLASH
5C TEST RAM BETWEEN 512K & 640K E5 CHK H/W STATUS OF ROM
60 TEST EXTENDED MEM E6 BIOS ROM IS OK
62 TEST EXTENDED MEM LINES E7 DO COMPLETE RAM TEST
64 JUMP TO USER PATCH1 E8 DO OEM INIT
66 CONFIG ADV CACHE REGS E9 INIT INTRPT CTLR
68 ENAB EXT & CPU CACHES EA READ BOOTSTRAP CODE
6A DISPLAY EXT CACHE SIZE EB INIT ALL VECTORS
6C DISPLAY SHADOW MSG EC BOOT FLASH PROG
6E DISPLAY NON-DISP SEGS ED INIT BOOT DEVICE
70 DISPLAY ERROR MSGS EE BOOT CODE READ OK
72 CHECK FOR CONFIG ERROR
5-46 906-2020-501
®
SECTION SIX
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PAGE #
System Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-801 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Air/Fluid Module Pneumatic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
LPAS Assembly Pneumatic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
U/S Diathermy Controller (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
U/S Driver (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2000-042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Air Fluid Controller (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Phaco Backplane (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2000-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Coag PCB (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-3940-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Receiver Mech. PCB (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Transducer PCB (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Front Panel Controller (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Front Panel Controller (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
7 Segment Display (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
7 Segment Display (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Handpiece LED PCB (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Stand-by Switch PCB (A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
LPAS/Illuminator Controller (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Power Supply (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
LPAS/Standby (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Cables
DESCRIPTION FIGURE PAGE #
W1 (202-1270-501) - DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

W2 (202-1241-XXX) - 110VAC Internal Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W3 (202-1259-501) - Illumination Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W4 (202-1271-501) - 85VDC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W5, W7, W9, W11 (202-1119-XXX) Common Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W6, W8, W10, W12 (202-1118-XXX) Common Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W16 (202-1490-501) PCMCIA Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
W17 (202-1473-501) PCMCIA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
W19 (202-1340-001) F/S-IV Pole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
W20 (202-1267-501) F/S-IV Pole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
906-2020-501 6-1
®
Cables - continued
DESCRIPTION FIGURE PAGE #
W21 (202-1269-501) Speaker Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

W22 (202-1330-001) Video Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W23 (202-1366-501) Remote Serial Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W24 (202-1272-501) Standby/Sound Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W25 (202-1128-501) LCD Backlight Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W26 (202-1425-501) 7 Segment Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W27 (202-1426-501) Handpiece LED Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W28 (202-1361-501) Pneumatic Connector Valve Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W29 (202-1342-501) Receiver Mechanism Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W30, W31 (202-1327-XXX) Opto Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W32 (202-1345-001) Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W33 (202-1253-501) Cylinder Valve-A Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W34 (202-1254-501) Cylinder Valve-B Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W35 (202-1263-501) Solenoid Valve PCM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W36 (202-1264-501) A/F Control Valve PVM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W37 (202-1262-501) Main Air Source Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W38 (202-1341-501) LPAS Valves Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W39 (202-1274-501) LPAS Pump Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W40 (202-1255-501) Switch/Sensor Illumination Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W41 (202-1256-501) Illumination Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W43 (202-1265-501) Handpiece Connection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
W44 (202-1463-501) Phaco Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
W45 (202-1268-501) Transducer Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W46 (202-1459-501) Power Control Cable (PS 2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W47 (202-1458-501) 5V Enable Cable (PS 2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W48 (202-1515-501) LCD Inverter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
W49 (202-1517-001) Video Cable for 421 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-3
W3 (202-1259-501) - Illumination Power Cable
Figure 6-4
W4 (202-1271-501) - 85VDC Power Cable
Figure 6-1
W1 (202-1270-501) - DC Power Cable
Figure 6-5
W5, W7, W9, W11 (202-1119-XXX)
Common Signal Cable
Figure 6-2
W2 (202-1241-XXX) - 110VAC Internal Power
Cable
Figure 6-6
W6, W8, W10, W12 (202-1118-XXX)
Common Signal Cable
906-2020-501 6-7
®
Figure 6-7
W16 (202-1490-501) PCMCIA Signal Cable
Figure 6-8
W17 (202-1473-501) PCMCIA Power Cable
6-8 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-9
W19 (202-1340-001) F/S-IV Pole Cable
Figure 6-10
W20 (202-1267-501) F/S-IV Pole Cable
Figure 6-11
W21 (202-1269-501) Speaker Cable
906-2020-501 6-9
®
Figure 6-12
W22 (202-1330-001) Video Cable
Figure 6-13
W23 (202-1366-501) Remote Serial Communications Cable
Figure 6-14
W24 (202-1272-501) Standby/Sound Cable
6-10 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-15
W25 (202-1128-501) LCD Backlight Cable
Figure 6-17
W27 (202-1426-501) Handpiece LED Cable
Figure 6-18
W28 (202-1361-501) Pneumatic Connector Valve
Cable
Figure 6-16
W26 (202-1425-501) 7 Segment Cable
906-2020-501 6-11
®
Figure 6-19
W29 (202-1342-501) Receiver Mechanism Signal Cable
Figure 6-20
W30, W31 (202-1327-XXX) Opto Sensor Cable
Figure 6-21
W32 (202-1345-001) Motor Cable
6-12 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-22
W33 (202-1253-501) Cylinder Valve-A Cable
Figure 6-23
W34 (202-1254-501) Cylinder Valve-B Cable
Figure 6-24
W35 (202-1263-501) Solenoid Valve PCM Cable
906-2020-501 6-13
®
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-25 W39 (202-1274-501) LPAS Pump Cable
W36 (202-1264-501) A/F Control Valve PVM
Cable
Figure 6-26
W37 (202-1262-501) Main Air Source Cable
Figure 6-29
W40 (202-1255-501) Switch/Sensor Illumination
Cable
Figure 6-27
W38 (202-1341-501) LPAS Valves Cable
Figure 6-30
W41 (202-1256-501) Illumination Fan Cable
6-14 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-31
W43 (202-1265-501) Handpiece Connection Cable
Figure 6-32
W44 (202-1463-501) Phaco Fan Cable
906-2020-501 6-15
®
Figure 6-33
W45 (202-1268-501) Transducer Signal Cable
Figure 6-34
W46 (202-1459-501) Power Control Cable (PS 2 only)
Figure 6-35
W47 (202-1458-501) 5V Enable Cable (PS 2 only)
6-16 906-2020-501
®
Figure 6-36
W48 (202-1515-501) LCD Inverter Cable
Figure 6-37
W49 (202-1517-001) Video Cable for 421 LCD
906-2020-501 6-17
®
6-18 906-2020-501
®
SECTION SEVEN
PARTS LISTS AND DRAWINGS
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PAGE #
Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2. Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
PARTS LISTING
Accurus Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-501,-502,-503,-504 . . . . . . 7-3
Power Supply II Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1460-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1435-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Posterior Options Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1362-501,-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1329-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1511-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Front Lower Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1304-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1554-501* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1449-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Footpedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1311-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
ASSEMBLIES
Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Power Supply II Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1460-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1435-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Posterior Options Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1362-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Lower Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1304-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1554-501* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1449-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Footpedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1311-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
* Receiver Mechanism Assembly 202-1176-501 was replaced by 202-1554-501.
906-2020-501 7-1
®
Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions

Console Dash Serial Number Range Description
Number
-501 IACL001006 - IACL001377 Model 400VS with Original Hardware configuration.
-502 IACL001378 - IACL001435 Model 400VS with the following hardware changes: New Upper
Front Panel Assembly* with 421 LCD (PN 202-1511-501,), New
Receiver Mechanism (PN 202-1554-501, required for model
600ds), and new Host (PN 202-1382-003, required for voice
confirmation and new LCD).
-503 IACL001436 and above Model 600DS(includes anterior modes) with same hardware
configuration as -502 console.
-504 IACL001436 and above Model 400VS enhanced with Voice Confirmation, adjustable tones,
(IACL001422 also included) Doctor Presets (programmable memory) and remote control
capability. Same hardware configuration as -502 console.
* The Upper Front Panel Assembly consists of: the Front Panel Controller PCB, 421 LCD, LCD Inverter, Keypad LED PCB, 7
Segment Display PCB, Switch Layer Touch Panel (touchscreen) and associated cables and hardware.
7-2 906-2020-501
®
Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS
ACCURUS CONSOLE ASSEMBLY

202-0000-501, -502, -503, -504
001 ...... 202-1377-001 . . . . . . CHASSIS,CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1202-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 653-023 . . . . . . . . . . . FOOT,ROUND,1.88X.66 RUBBER BLK . . . . . . 4.0 EA
004 ...... 813-003 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M5X0.8 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1267-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM FAN W20 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1435-501 . . . . . . ASSY,AIR SOURCE,MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1440-001 . . . . . . LEVEL,RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1438-001 . . . . . . PLATE,RELEASE LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 278-016 . . . . . . . . . . . FAN,GUARD-KIT,4.65X4.65 PLSTC . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1340-001 . . . . . . CABLE ASSY,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 202-1428-001 . . . . . . BUSHING,PANEL,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 278-015 . . . . . . . . . . . FAN,GUARD,2.36X2.36 PLASTIC . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
013 ...... 773-077 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,EXTERNAL .925 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 773-073 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,.250X.027 EXT . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 691-233 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,COMP,3X1.34X.042 SST . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
016 ...... 809-010 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M5X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
017 ...... 809-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
019 ...... 825-016 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X16 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1429-001 . . . . . . ROD,PUSH,RELEASE ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 202-1414-501 . . . . . . ASSY,BRACKET,INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 202-1256-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,ILLUMINATOR FAN W41 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1460-501 . . . . . . ASSY,POWER SUPPLY II,ACCURUS . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 202-1469-001 . . . . . . HOSE,2.25ID,FLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 200-1450-001 . . . . . . CORD,POWER,AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 026-030 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.312 DIA NYL WHT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 202-1362-501 . . . . . . ASSY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS,ACCURUS . . . . 1.0 EA *for –501, -502
202-1362-502 . . . . . . ASSY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS,ACCURUS . . . . 1.0 EA *for –503, -504
029 ...... 202-1332-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,AIR/FLUID CONTROLLER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 202-1014-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LPA ILLUM CONTROLLER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
031 ...... 771-624 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN,HITCH,.094 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
032 ...... 797-085 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
033 ...... 200-1016-502 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,BACKPLANE U/S-DIATH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
034 ...... 394-1100-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,ERBE COAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
035 ...... 200-1546-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,U/S DRIVER SOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
036 ...... 202-1331-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,U/S-DIATHERMY CONT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
037 ...... 202-1422-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,PCB,DIATHERMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
038 ...... 202-1463-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,U/S-DIATHERMY W44 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
039 ...... 202-1465-001 . . . . . . LABEL,NAMEPLATE,ACCURUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
040 ...... 276-275 . . . . . . . . . . . DRIVE,SOLID STATE,PCMCIA CARD . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 ...... 202-1430-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,MOUNTING,PCMC1A . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
042 ...... 202-1462-001 . . . . . . PLATE,COVER,SERIAL EXPANSION . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
043 ...... 202-1382-001 . . . . . . SYSTEM,COMPUTER,486DX2 50MHZ . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for -501
202-1382-003 . . . . . . SYSTEM,COMPUTER,486DX2 50MHZ . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for –502, -503, -504
044 ...... 825-012 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
046 ...... 800-203 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
047 ...... 202-1329-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT UPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for -501
202-1511-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT UPPER 421 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for –502, -503, -504
048 ...... 202-1304-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
050 ...... 797-063 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,EXT LOCK.17X.38X.02 SST . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
051 ...... 202-1449-501 . . . . . . ASSY,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
052 ...... 202-1439-001 . . . . . . COVER,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
053 ...... 801-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
054 ...... 027-002 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
055 ...... 202-1118-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W6 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
056 ...... 202-1118-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W8 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
057 ...... 202-1118-503 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W10 . . . . . 1.0 EA
058 ...... 202-1118-504 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W12 . . . . . 1.0 EA
059 ...... 202-1119-001 . . . . . . CABLE,SYSTEM,COM SIGNAL 34IN . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
063 ...... 202-1241-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PWR 110VAC INTL W2B . . . . . . 1.0 EA
064 ...... 202-1259-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,ILLUM POWER W3 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
065 ...... 202-1270-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,DC POWER W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
066 ...... 202-1271-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,85VDC POWER W4 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
906-2020-501 7-3
®

DWG PART
...ACCURUS CONSOLE ASSEMBLY CONTINUED.
067 . . . . . . 202-1366-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,REMOTE SERIAL W23 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
068 . . . . . . 202-1473-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,POWER PCMCIA W17 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
069 . . . . . . 202-1490-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PCMCIA SIGNAL W16 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
070 . . . . . . 202-1447-506 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRGMD V1.11 . . . . . . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for –501, -502
202-1555-504 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRGMD 600DS 2.10 . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for -503
202-1578-502 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRG 400VS V2.10 . . . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for -504
071 . . . . . . 202-1389-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V1.06 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for –501, -502
202-1558-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for -503
202-1558-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for -504
072 . . . . . . 202-1209-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG LPA/ILLUM V1.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA LPA/ILL CNTL PCB: U33 for –501, -502
202-1556-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG LPA/ILLUM V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA LPA/ILL CNTL PCB: U33 for –503, -504
073 . . . . . . 202-1392-501 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG FP CTRL X1.00.05 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA FRONT PANEL CNTL PCB:U9 for –501, -502
202-1559-501 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG FP CTRL V2.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA FRONT PANEL CNTL PCB:U9 for –503, -504
074 . . . . . . 202-1386-506 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG AIR/FL CTRL V1.06 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA AIR/FLUID CNTL PCB:U14 for –501, -502
202-1557-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG AIR/FL CTRL V2.08 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA AIR/FLUID CNTL PCB:U14 for –503, -504
075 . . . . . . 825-020 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X35 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
POWER SUPPLY II ASSEMBLY

202-1460-501
001 ...... 202-1466-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MODULE,AC ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1441-001 . . . . . . POWER SUPPLY,ACCURUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1457-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LPAS/STANDBY POWER . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1458-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,5V ENABLE W47 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1459-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,POWER CONTROL W46 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 072-026 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL LUG,22-18 AWG,NO.6 . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
007 ...... 072-186 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL,LUG,.250 TO PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
008 ...... 037-149 . . . . . . . . . . . WIRE,STR,INS 18 AWG WHT 1 COND . . . . . . . .50 FT
009 ...... 796-100 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,.171X.500X.096 NKL . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 821-164 . . . . . . . . . . . SPACER,5.2X8.0X5MM,SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 027-026 . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNT,CABLE,ANCHOR TIE #10 SCR . . . . . . 2.0 EA
014 ...... 027-003 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,.625X3.50L,NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
017 ...... 796-010 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 072-188 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL,LUG,.168 TO PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1464-001 . . . . . . COVER,TERMINAL,POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 811-001 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
021 ...... 130-023 . . . . . . . . . . . FUSE,10A,250V 3AB/SFE SLO BLO . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1488-001 . . . . . . LABEL,SYSTEM GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
MAIN AIR SOURCE ASSEMBLY

202-1435-501
001 ...... 202-1433-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,AIR SOURCE,MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1416-001 . . . . . . COUPLER,MALE,ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 895-324 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 2POS 5 PORT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 886-014 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 100 PSI . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 886-016 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 150 PSI . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 895-321 . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESSURE,90 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 895-320 . . . . . . . . . . . FILTER,5 MICRON,12 NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 893-526 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,.13FTO .187M BRS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-364 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,NIPPLE,HEX .12NPT BRS . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 893-486 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,.12NPT X.25 TUBE . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 593-012 . . . . . . . . . . . TAPE,TEFLON,.50IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R FT
013 ...... 202-1262-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,AIR SOURCE W37 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 646-023 . . . . . . . . . . . SLEEVE,CAP,.406 DIA X 1.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
7-4 906-2020-501
®

DWG PART
PRESSURE/VACUUM MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

202-1243-501
001 ...... 202-1013-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,TRANSDUCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1253-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,CYL VALVE-A W33 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1254-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,CYL VALVE-B W34 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1263-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SOLENOID VALVE PVM . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1264-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,A/F CONT VITON W36 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1268-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,TRANSDUCER SIG W-45 . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1240-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,PRESSURE-VAC ASSY . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1403-001 . . . . . . CHIP,VACUUM,X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1427-001 . . . . . . MUFFLER,POLYSINTERED,.5 NPT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 788-075 . . . . . . . . . . . SPACER,ROUND,6MMX6MM AL . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
014 ...... 825-150 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M2.5X10 SST . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
017 ...... 886-012 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,CHECK,.5 DIA .15 PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 ...... 895-312 . . . . . . . . . . . MUFFLER,.62 ODX1.55,.25-18 NPT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 774-073 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.125X.250X.062,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
027 ...... 891-007 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,GREASE,HI-TEMP WHITE . . . . . . A/R OZ
028 ...... 202-1024-001 . . . . . . SCREW,SKT HD,M1.6X18 ND STRIP . . . . . . . . 18.0 EA
029 ...... 893-533 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,BLEED PLUG,10-32X.012 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 043-009 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 GREEN . . . . . . . . .33 FT
PNEUMATIC CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY

202-1247-501
001 ...... 202-1339-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,PNEUMATIC CONN ASSY . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 886-018 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 65 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1334-001 . . . . . . CONNECTOR,PNEUMATIC,FEM 10-32 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 893-424 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,10-32MX.12H,BRS OSEAL . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1361-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PNEU CONN VALVE W28 . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 784-191 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CHEESE HD,M2X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
009 ...... 893-411 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,LUER-LOK,MALE 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-520 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,LUER,FEM TO 10-32 M SS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 774-135 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.158X.047,BUNA-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1333-001 . . . . . . CONNECTOR,PNEUMATIC,MALE 10-32 . . . . . 3.0 EA
013 ...... 893-524 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,.13MNPT X.12,BRASS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1406-001 . . . . . . HEADER,SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 043-009 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 GREEN . . . . . . . . 2.58 FT
016 ...... 699-010 . . . . . . . . . . . FILTER,MECH,2.4X.82,25 MICRON . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
017 ...... 040-073 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,SILICONE,.125X.250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 FT
018 ...... 202-1509-001 . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,10-32X.09 BRASS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 043-027 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,PU,.16 OD X .09 ID CLR . . . . . . . . . . . .50 FT
020 ...... 893-529 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,STR,M5X0.8 6MM TUBE . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 893-334 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,QC .12X.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 593-012 . . . . . . . . . . . TAPE,TEFLON,.50IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R FT
023 ...... 892-110 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,262 RED . . . . . . A/R EA
024 ...... 798-322 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO 10 .031 THK NYL . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
906-2020-501 7-5
®

DWG PART
POSTERIER OPTIONS ASSEMBLY

202-1362-501, 502
001 . . . . . . 202-1423-001 . . . . . . TRAY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MANIFOLD,PRESSURE VACUUM . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . ASSY,LPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 . . . . . . 202-1176-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MECHANISM,RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA for -501
......... 202-1554-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MECHANISM,RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA for -502
005 . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PNEUMATIC CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 . . . . . . 819-005 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST BLK . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
LOW PRESSURE AIR SOURCE (LPAS) ASSEMBLY

202-3103-501
001 ...... 202-3100-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD ASSY,LPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1341-501 . . . . . . ASSY,KIT,VALVE LPAS W-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 050-807 . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR,HSG,9S LKG RAMP PL2D . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 886-009 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,3.8 PSI MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 403-029 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,CHECK,.12SCFM .06 TUBING . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1274-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PUMP LPAS W39 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1505-001 . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESS,30MMHG . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 893-528 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,PLUG,10-32 BRASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-425 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,PLUG,10-32M BRS OSEAL . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 027-003 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,.625X3.50L,NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
012 ...... 893-498 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,10-32M X.12 TUBE,NYLON . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 774-103 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.070X.210X.070,SIL 60D . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 040-073 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,SILICONE,.125X.250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 FT
017 ...... 826-038 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,4-40X1.00 LKG . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
FRONT UPPER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1329-501
001 ...... 202-1203-001 . . . . . . PANEL,UPPER,DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1228-001 . . . . . . KEYPAD,ELASTOMER,UPPER FRONT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1226-001 . . . . . . TOUCH SCREEN,SWITCH LAYER . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 088-031 . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY,LCD,10.4 DIAGONAL RGB . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1015-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,CONTROLLER FRONT PNL . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1328-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,DISPLAY 7 SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1393-001 . . . . . . STANDOFF,FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 816-016 . . . . . . . . . . . STANDOFF,M/F,M3.0X6MMX30 SST . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
012 ...... 200-1582-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,GROUND CT 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1402-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML
016 ...... 202-1478-001 . . . . . . SPACER,PCB,7-SEG FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1330-001 . . . . . . CABLE,VIDEO,W22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 026-074 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.25X.375 NYL BLK . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1425-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,7-SEGMENT W-26 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 200-1128-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LCD DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 202-1476-001 . . . . . . STANDOFF,SHOULDER,FR DISPLAY . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
023 ...... 202-1477-001 . . . . . . BRACE,LCD,FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
024 ...... 775-009 . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET,.125X.30X.020,BUNA N . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
7-6 906-2020-501
®

DWG PART
FRONT UPPER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1511-501
001 ...... 202-1203-001 . . . . . . PANEL,UPPER,DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

002 ...... 202-1228-001 . . . . . . KEYPAD,ELASTOMER,UPPER FRONT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1519-001 . . . . . . TOUCH SCREEN,SWITCH LAYER . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 200-1836-001 . . . . . . LCD,COLOR TFT,10.4 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1512-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,CONTROL FR PANEL 421 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1514-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,DISPLAY 7 SEGMENT 421 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1513-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,MOUNTING,421 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1516-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LED KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 041-020 . . . . . . . . . . . SHIELDING,INSULATED GRND STRAP . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1515-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LCD INVERTER W-48 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 817-033 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SCH,FP M3X16 SST BLK . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
014 ...... 200-1829-001 . . . . . . LCD,INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1517-001 . . . . . . CABLE,VIDEO,421 W49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1518-001 . . . . . . GASKET,REAR,TOUCH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1425-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,7-SEGMENT W-26 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 040-345 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,HT SHRINK,.120 CLR TFL . . . . . . . . . .10 FT
028 ...... 892-037 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,271 RED . . . . . . A/R ML
FRONT LOWER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1304-501
001 ...... 202-1204-001 . . . . . . PANEL,FRONT,LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1252-001 . . . . . . GASKET,PANEL,FRONT LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1275-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,HANDPIECE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1269-501 . . . . . . ASSY,SPEAKER,W21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1276-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,STAND-BY SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1535-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HP CONN STR RLF W43 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1426-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HANDPIECE LED W-27 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1272-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SOUND/STAND-BY W24 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
RECEIVER MECHANISM ASSEMBLY

202-1554-501
001 ...... 202-1211-001 . . . . . . BEZEL,RECEIVER MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1373-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,EJECTOR,RECEIVER MECH . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1525-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,PINCHER,LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1524-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,PINCHER,RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 771-625 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN, COILED, .125 X .625 CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1527-001 . . . . . . PINCHER,DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1528-001 . . . . . . HAMMER, OFFSET, DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1526-001 . . . . . . PINCHER, FLAG,DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1244-001 . . . . . . TIP,TUBE UNLOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1372-001 . . . . . . LATCH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 202-1198-001 . . . . . . PIN,PIVOT,LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1346-001 . . . . . . SCREW,HEX,UNLOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 202-1363-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,7/16 BORE RET . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1549-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,9/16 RETR . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 202-1550-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,9/16 EXTENDED . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
016 ...... 202-1368-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,LATCH,MODIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 202-1230-001 . . . . . . LATCH,SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1345-001 . . . . . . MOTOR,STEP,12V 2PH W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1205-501 . . . . . . ASSY,HUB ROLLER,4X1.8 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
906-2020-501 7-7
®

DWG PART
...RECEIVER MECHANISM ASSEMBLY CONTINUED
020 . . . . . . 202-1016-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,RECEIVER MECHANISM . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 . . . . . . 202-1327-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,OPTO-SENSOR W30 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 . . . . . . 895-319 . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER,AIR,.36 DIA .5 STRK . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 . . . . . . 893-521 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,10-32 .09DIA PBT . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
024 . . . . . . 893-522 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,CONNECTOR,M INTER HEX . . . . . . . 11.0 EA
025 . . . . . . 202-1509-001 . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,10-32X.09 BRASS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 . . . . . . 811-011 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M4X12 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
030 . . . . . . 825-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
032 . . . . . . 824-309 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,M3X5 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
033 . . . . . . 797-017 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLT LK,.19X.33X.05 SST . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
034 . . . . . . 800-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLITLOCK,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
035 . . . . . . 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
036 . . . . . . 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML
037 . . . . . . 824-041 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
038 . . . . . . 202-1342-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,RCVR MECH SIG W-29 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
039 . . . . . . 202-1327-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,OPTO-SENSOR W31 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
040 . . . . . . 202-1405-001 . . . . . . HEADER,END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 . . . . . . 202-1475-001 . . . . . . FITTING,SWIVEL,.016IN GRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
042 . . . . . . 202-1475-002 . . . . . . FITTING,SWIVEL,.020IN BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
043 . . . . . . 043-027 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,PU,.16 OD X .09 ID CLR . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 FT
044 . . . . . . 893-534 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,QD,SC BARB 3MM CPLG . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
045 . . . . . . 202-1437-001 . . . . . . COUPLER,LATCH RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
046 . . . . . . 202-1506-001 . . . . . . COLLET,TUBING,.156 OD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
047 . . . . . . 798-322 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO 10 .031 THK NYL . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
ILLUMINATOR MODULE
202-1449-501
001 ...... 202-1450-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1495-001 . . . . . . CHANNEL,OPTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1352-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FIBEROPTIC,INTRALUX . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
004 ...... 807-1154-001 . . . . . . HOLDER,FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 807-1148-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 807-1142-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 807-1143-001 . . . . . . BLOCK,CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 807-1194-001 . . . . . . OVERLAY,ILLUMINATOR,INTRALUX . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 301-339 . . . . . . . . . . . LENS,24MM DIA,18MM FL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
011 ...... 807-1145-001 . . . . . . FILTER,HEAT REJECTION,SHT WAVE . . . . . . 2.0 EA
012 ...... 807-1177-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LAMP SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 807-1169-001 . . . . . . LABEL,NAMEPLATE,MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 143-088 . . . . . . . . . . . LAMP,PROJECTION,12V 50W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
015 ...... 807-1187-001 . . . . . . MIRROR,35MM DIA,34.6MM ROC . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
017 ...... 805-146 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,M4X0.7,BBRG END SST . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
019 ...... 892-302 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,EPOXY,WHITE 2 PARTS . . . . . . . . A/R EA
021 ...... 784-190 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,PH SLT,M4X16 NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 807-1176-001 . . . . . . LABEL,BULB SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 807-1144-001 . . . . . . LENS,ASPHERIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
029 ...... 807-1178-001 . . . . . . ADAPTER,INTRALUX TO ACMI . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
030 ...... 807-1195-001 . . . . . . RETAINER,TETHER ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
034 ...... 702-008 . . . . . . . . . . . CHAIN,BEAD,NO.3 .092 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . . . .442 FT 2X2.65"
035 ...... 674-126 . . . . . . . . . . . PLUNGER,SPRING,4-48X.115 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
036 ...... 202-1491-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,DUAL .19 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
7-8 906-2020-501
®

DWG PART
FOOTPEDAL ASSEMBLY
202-1311-501
001 ...... 200-1034-502 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 200-3149-001 . . . . . . CABLE ASSY,SHLD,15 COND 24 AWG . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 200-1334-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,GEARMOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1309-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1496-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FOOTSWITCH,RIGHT SIDE . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 200-3153-001 . . . . . . MOTOR ASSY,GEARHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 200-3035-001 . . . . . . PLUNGER,SPRING RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 200-3036-001 . . . . . . BLOCK,TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 200-3034-001 . . . . . . SHAFT,TENSION,ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 200-1595-001 . . . . . . LEVER/SHAFT ASSY,PINNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 200-1391-001 . . . . . . GEAR,ACTUATOR,ENCODER MODIFIED . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 200-1393-001 . . . . . . GEAR,MOTOR/TREADLE,MODIFIED . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 200-3060-001 . . . . . . HANDLE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 200-3168-001 . . . . . . SUPPORT,WIRE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 200-3029-001 . . . . . . ARM,LEVER,SWITCH ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
019 ...... 200-1735-001 . . . . . . COVER,SWITCH,L DIE CAST MACH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 200-1733-001 . . . . . . COVER,SWITCH,R DIE CAST MACH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 200-1664-001 . . . . . . TREADLE,CASTING,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 200-3066-001 . . . . . . PAD,HEEL,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 ...... 202-1494-001 . . . . . . GASKET,BASEPLATE,.093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1493-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BASE,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 200-3043-001 . . . . . . PAD,RUBBER,BASEPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 200-1662-001 . . . . . . COVER,SIDE,RIGHT FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 200-1663-001 . . . . . . COVER,SIDE,LEFT FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 202-1499-001 . . . . . . LABEL,ID,FOOTSWITCH ACCURUS . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
029 ...... 280-003 . . . . . . . . . . . ENCODER,OPTICAL,PNL 500 CPR . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 263-122 . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST WTRPRF . . . . . 4.0 EA S3-6
031 ...... 711-025 . . . . . . . . . . . GEAR,SPUR,32T 64 PITCH SST . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
032 ...... 774-032 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.239X.070,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
033 ...... 774-122 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.176X.31X.070,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
034 ...... 691-191 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,.58X.75X2.75,EXT MW . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
035 ...... 691-137 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,CPRSN,.75X.360 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
036 ...... 691-207 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,COMP,.59X.72X.75 MW . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
037 ...... 691-193 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,M5X.56X1.25,HELIX MACH . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
040 ...... 773-034 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,.303 SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 ...... 807-143 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M2.0X8 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
046 ...... 805-041 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,FLT M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
047 ...... 814-019 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,SHLDR,SKT HD M5X6.013 SS . . . . . . 5.0 EA
051 ...... 775-012 . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET,M5,.20X.39X.12 NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
052 ...... 672-024 . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNT,CABLE,FLAT NO.8 NYLON . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
053 ...... 027-019 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,BLACK,HT STABILIZED . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
054 ...... 800-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLITLOCK,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
055 ...... 200-1368-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BACKUP,COVER FOOTSWITCH . . . . . 2.0 EA
056 ...... 202-1492-001 . . . . . . GASKET,COVER,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
058 ...... 803-004 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M4X0.7 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
059 ...... 200-1339-001 . . . . . . PAD,SOLE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
060 ...... 200-1380-001 . . . . . . SUPPORT,ENCODER,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
061 ...... 798-014 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.10 .062 THK NYL . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
065 ...... 200-1337-001 . . . . . . GEAR,SPUR,GEARMOTOR MODIFIED . . . . . . 1.0 EA
066 ...... 200-1401-001 . . . . . . PLATE,SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
067 ...... 200-1402-001 . . . . . . BEARING,SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
071 ...... 200-1419-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
072 ...... 200-1494-001 . . . . . . PLATE,CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
073 ...... 200-1495-001 . . . . . . PLATE,STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
075 ...... 262-069 . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH,PROBE & RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
076 ...... 891-013 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,GREASE,MULTI-PURPOSE . . . . . A/R ML
077 ...... 040-049 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,HEAT SHRINK,.063 ID BLK . . . . . . . . A/R FT 2 X .70" LONG
083 ...... 891-019 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,SEALANT,VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R OZ
085 ...... 805-045 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,FLT M4X16 SST . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
906-2020-501 7-9
®

DWG PART
...FOOTPEDAL ASSEMBLY CONTINUED
086 . . . . . . 200-1668-001 . . . . . . BODY,HEEL SWITCH,RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
087 . . . . . . 202-1381-001 . . . . . . SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,WATERPROOF . . . . . 1.0 EA
088 . . . . . . 200-1669-001 . . . . . . CAP,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
089 . . . . . . 200-1701-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
090 . . . . . . 771-622 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN,DOWEL,.0939X.875 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
091 . . . . . . 774-133 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.614X.754X.07,EPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
092 . . . . . . 200-1671-001 . . . . . . GASKET,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
093 . . . . . . 200-1673-001 . . . . . . PAD,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
094 . . . . . . 200-1702-001 . . . . . . GASKET,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
096 . . . . . . 800-107 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,EXT LOCK,M6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
097 . . . . . . 043-004 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 CLEAR . . . . . . . . 1.042FT 12.5"
098 . . . . . . 027-002 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
7-10 906-2020-501
7-68 906-2020-501
®
SECTION EIGHT
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This section is reserved for future enhancements and

accessories that may be developed for the Accurus®.
906-2020-501 8-1
®
8-2 906-2020-501

Accu Rus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accu Rus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accu Rus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Return to the Browser Screen

OPHTHALMIC SURGICAL SYSTEM

906-2020-501 B, ASSEMBLY ©1998, Alcon Laboratories, Inc.

ACCURUS® SERVICE MANUAL

MANUAL REVISION RECORD

DATE REVISION ECN NUMBER & REVISED PAGE NUMBERS

04/98 A ECN 33803 - Initial release for -501 console with

Intel® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

Section One - General Information

Section Two - Theory of Operation

Section Four - Service Test Procedure

Section Five - Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Section Seven - Parts Lists and Drawings

Section Eight - Additional information

Figure 2-1. System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 5-1. Fuse Module Location and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Table 5-1. Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Figure 1-1. The Accurus® Ophthalmic Surgical System

DESCRIPTION OF THIS MANUAL REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

Section Eight-Additional Information

The system was inspected mechanically and electrically

UNPACKING AND SETTING UP

1 Cut and remove the binding straps.

2 Open top of outer carton and remove accessory tray

3 Remove outer carton. Refer to Figure 1-3 for an

4 Remove front and top foam inserts.

7 Remove air hose from bottom of carton and connect

8 Release the 115 VAC power cord from the Rear

NOTE: If system is to be plugged into a voltage

Figure 1-3. Accurus® Shipping Arrangement

GLOSSARY OF TERMS/ABBREVIATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions

TERM OR ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Anterior VGFI® Anterior Vented Gas Forced Infusion.

cmH2O Centimeters of water.

cpm Cuts Per Minute.

Extrusion A mode where vacuum is available to remove fluid/matter.

F/AX Fluid Air Exchange.

IEC International Electromechanical Commission.

ISO International Standards Organization.

LCD Liquid Crystal Display.

LED Light Emitting Diode.

mmHg Millimeter of Mercury. A unit of vacuum.

N/A Not Applicable.

PIN Personal Identification Number.

psi Pressure per Square Inch. A unit of pressure.

pps Pulses Per Second.

VFC Viscous Fluid Control.

VGFI® Vented Gas Forced Infusion.

Vit Vitrectomy. Extraction of the vitreous from the vitreous cavity.

Posterior Surgery Infusion / Irrigation Eject

Fragmentation Fluid Air Exhange Up/Down Adjustments

Vitrectomy Diathermy Standby State

VFC 1 Illuminator 1 or 2 Air Pressure Input

Extrusion Bulb Burned Out Alternating Current

Scissors 0 Footswitch Positions Footswitch

Anterior Surgery System Information I/V Pole

Phacoemulsification SYSTEM System Fault OFF (power)